Home

FluidSIM® 5 User's Guide 04/14

1. When the necessary pressure is reached at the control connection 12 of the unit the 3 2 way valve switches and the flow passes freely from 1 to 2 Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Standard nominal flow rate Flow control valve 0 1 5000 l min 10 Volume 0 001 100 0 01 Standard nominal flow rate Directional valve 0 1 5000 l min 50 Time delay valve normally open The time delay valve is made up of a pneumatically operated 3 2 way valve a one way flow control valve and small air accumulator When the necessary pressure is reached at the control connection 10 of the unit the 3 2 way valve switches and stops the flow from passing between 1 and 2 Adjustable parameters Opening level O 100 100 Standard nominal flow rate Flow control valve 0 1 5000 l min 10 Volume 0 001 100 0 01 Standard nominal flow rate Directional valve 0 1 5000 l min 50 Stepper module type TAA The stepper module is made up of a memory unit 3 2 way impulse valve an AND and an OR component a viewable announcement and an auxiliary manual operation Adjustable parameters Initial Position Left Right Left Desired position 0 2 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Stepper module type TAB The stepper module is made up of a memory unit 3 2 way impulse valve an AND an
2. Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Pneumatic linear drive with shape fitting adaptor The sledge of the double acting cylinder without a piston rod is controlled by alternating the compressed air input This type of linear drive conveys forces by means of a shape fitting piston sledge construction The slitted cylinder prohibits the torsion of the Slider Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000 N 120 Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Festo Didactic GmbH a
3. 0T O av_o Limit switch break ladder Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Switch with roll break ladder Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Reed contact break ladder Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 491 Limit switch make ladder Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch opens immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label Switch with roll make ladder Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch opens immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label Reed contact make ladder Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The 5 switch opens immediately when the cam has
4. NOT logical NOT RE rising edge FE falling edge s s delay s delay short form NOT s time limit If the functions NOT RE or FE refer to a term the term has to be placed in brackets Examples Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 209 NOT a NOT a b RE X1 RE X1 X2 The following additional mathematical functions are available abs absolute amount sign algebraic sign 1 0 2 max maximum of two numbers min minimum of two numbers 4 to the power of e g a 3 sqrt Square root exp to the power of constant e log natural logarithm sin sine cos cosine 10 6 11 Delays time limits Delays have the following form see example Grafcet Grafcet03 ct Time in seconds s Boolean term time in seconds or Time in seconds s Boolean term 210 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Examples 1s X1 2s3s X3 Time limits have the following form NOT time in seconds s Boolean term Example NOT 6s X28 In addition to s for seconds the following units of time can also be used d days h hours m minutes s seconds ms milliseconds Time specifications can also be combined e g 25500ms for 2 5 second
5. The design can deliver pressures of up to approx 17 5 MPa 175 bar Hydraulic motors represent the reverse of the func tion principle Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 603 604 42 Circuit diagram Return flow filter An oil filter situated in the return line to the tank has the advantage that the filter is thus easy to maintain A disadvantage however is that contamination is removed from the hydraulic fluid only after it has passed through the hydraulic components eocccene This configuration is often used 43 Circuit diagram Pump inlet filter With this configuration the pump is protected from contamination The filter is on the other hand less easily accessible a eocecene If these filters have a too fine mesh suction problems and cavitation effects may occur Additional coarse filters upstream of the pump are recommended 44 Circuit diagram Pressure line filter Pressure filters can be installed selectively upstream of valves which are sensitive to contamination this also enables smaller mesh sizes to be used eocccene A pressure resistant housing is required which makes this configuration more expensive 45 Circuit diagram Contamination indicator It is important that the effectiveness of a filter can be checked by a contamination indicator The contamination of a filter is measured by the pressure drop as the contamination increases th
6. 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 21 2 5 Pneumatically Operated Directional Valves 3 2 way valve pneumatically operated normally closed 12 The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying a pilot pressure at connection 12 The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 By stopping the 1 3 signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring Connection 1 is shut This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 431 432 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5
7. 159 Automatic bleed valve When the cylinder is retracted the piston of the bleed valve is closed It is lifted as the piston rod advances Air can then escape via the bleed hole until the hydraulic fluid reaches the piston and pushes it upwards In the forward end position the piston is pushed fully upwards by the hydraulic fluid and thus provides an external seal Bleed valves should be fitted at the highest point in a piping system since this is where any trapped air will collect Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 633 24 12 Gauges s 7 na Be y rit J oT 634 160 Piston pressure gauge Pressure gauges operate on the principle that pressure acting ona given area will produce a given force In the case of piston pressure gauges the pressure acts on a piston against the force of a spring The pressure value is now shown on a scale either by the piston itself or by a pointer driven magnetically by the piston 161 Bourdon tube pressure gauge Most pressure gauges operate on the principle of a Bourdon tube When hydraulic fluid flows into the tube an identical pressure is produced throughout Due to the difference in area between the outer and inner curved surfaces the tube is bent This movement is transferred to a pointer This type of gauge is not protected against overload A cush ioning restrictor must be installed in the inlet connection pre vent pressure surg
8. A The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 7 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 383 384 2 way pressure reducing valve The pressure regulator valve regulates the pressure at connection A to the preset operating pressure and equalizes the pressure fluctu ations The valve closes when the pressure at connection A exceeds the operating pressure The setting of the real components is component dependent and cannot be changed The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 2 way pressure reducing valve adjustable The pressure regulator valve regulates the pressure at connection A to the preset operating pressure and equalizes the pressure fluctu ations The valve closes when the pressure at connection A exceeds the operating pressure Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 3 way pressure reducing valve The pressure reducing valve maintains a constant output pressure despite fluctuating input pressure The hydra
9. Opens the dialog window for selecting an existing folder The entire contents of the selected folder including all of the circuit symbols and sub folders contained therein are displayed as a library Close Current Library Removes the active library from the list in the library window The library file is not deleted by this action and can be opened again using the menu and the Add Existing Library menu item Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 331 19 11 Tools 332 Rename Active Library Opens a dialog window for entering the name of the library This function is only available to libraries which the user has created For write protected libraries the folder name is shown in the tab Sort Current Library Alphabetically Sorts the contents of the active library alphabetically This function is only available to libraries which the user has created Write protected libraries are automatically sorted and cannot be resorted oy lt a fap c 0R gt a Options Opens the dialog window with program settings file paths and D 3 oQ D oq D O ge O 5 s Expert Mode Switches Expert Mode on and off Expert Mode provides advanced options for editing and simulation Restore Defaults Resets the program settings to the default values This enables you to undo unintentional settings made Note Use this function if you feel that FluidSIM is behaving
10. The sliders of the function generator for Frequency and Ampli tude have no function when the signal type is set to Constant This allows us to use it to simulate a manually adjustable potenti ometer Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 165 Start the simulation and click the function generator with a single click A window opens showing the sliders of the function generator Function generator Frequency 1 Hz 0 01 100000 0 01 J Amplitude 4 v 0 400 0 2 v 100 100 Figure 9 35 Adjusting the function generator during the simulation Change the y offset very gradually while observing how the valve moves as a function of the slider setting 9 13 3 Closed loop control in pneumatics 166 Your task now is to set up a simple system of closed loop position control To do so modify the circuit as shown in the following figure Remember that you need to remove the silencers on the valve ports before you can drag lines Instead of the function gen erator it is now the displacement encoder that supplies the input voltage for the proportional valve solenoid So you can apply the label to the cylinder open its properties dialog box go to the Configure Cylinder tab and set the Sensing option Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Figure 9 36 Simple closed loop position control Note that the regula
11. 15 Circuit symbols for single acting cylinders Single acting cylinders have one port i e pressure fluid can be applied only to the piston side With these cylinders the return stroke is produced either by external force shown in the symbol by an opening bearing cap or by a spring is shown within the symbol in this latter case 16 Circuit symbols for double acting cylinders Double acting cylinders have two ports to allow pressure fluid to be applied to both cylinder chambers The symbol for a differential cylinder is distinguished from the symbol for a double acting cylin Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Th Ray bre Palri u y ELLLER I a2 GescetiF Al 1 we Dandilicea 8 XI GeseiP Ag T 1 ut Lindiliea t EE kgni Futura Weg Syria Fleer eT l Ahah hini ine tit Hi an Teamia h B T IUl alii on Syumpetumigue TAE aly ni Lbibeidedins PAT TY i lz Sx lou ska neg enn ene wa pel r sa ree mi fix AN Sie ee T A li ll tz Al gamans Hyman m atav ikeel m iki ued skal heehee dl Hania und Federici ng os Dis hehe ocd Hura neel one l J Daal nnd hein n biri a der by the two lines added to the end of the piston rod The area ratio is generally 2 1 In the case of cylinders with double ended piston rods the symbol shows that the piston areas are of equal size synchronous cylinders 17 Circuit symbols for directional contro
12. Con stant as the signal type Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 1 The sliders of the function generator for frequency and Ampli tude have no function when the signal type is set to Constant This allows us to use it to simulate a manually adjustable potenti ometer Start the simulation and click the function generator with a single click A window opens showing the sliders of the function generator Function generator Frequency 1 He 0 01 100000 0 01 lf Amplitude 5 W kd 0 400 m 5 x 100 100 la Figure 9 32 Adjusting the function generator during the simulation Change the y offset very gradually while observing how the valve moves as a function of the slider setting 9 13 2 Open loop control in hydraulics In order to understand how the continuous components function please construct the following circuit power supply function generator voltmeter proportional valve solenoid regulating valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 163 Figure 9 33 Simple open loop control of the regulating valve Do not forget to fit blanking plugs on the valve s four hydraulic ports in order to prevent warnings from FluidSIM Start the simulation and observe the regulating valve The function generator generates a signal between 10 and 10 volts This varying voltage is converted by a pro
13. Force profile __Extemal load A OOO O D o oom eoo 100m I 100mm 100m 1000 fr d Displacement encoder Show all settings Figure 9 7 Actuating labels on the cylinder Here you can create new actuating labels or modify existing ones This dialog box is identical to the one that opens when you double click an distance rule Displacement encoder In addition to the actuating labels you can also enter a special label for a continuous displacement encoder or select from the list of counterparts already present in the project 130 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 9 3 Special settings for directional control valves To adapt a directional control valve drag a representative cylinder into the circuit and open the properties dialog box It contains settings that you can use to determine the appearance and function of the component See section Configure a way valve for the basic functions for configuring the valve properties 9 3 1 Hydraulic resistance For hydraulic valves you can adjust the hydraulic resistance In practice the hydraulic resistance is often given by a curve or a pair of values pressure drop flow rate In the field Hydraulic re sistance you can either enter a specific value or alternatively click the button That takes you to a dialog box where you can define the parabola either by interactively clicking in the graph field
14. before the specified time has expired also the output follows immediately with a with a Hi to Lo transition ay ob ck Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 100s 3 Edgetriggered Wiping Relay An input signal generates a signal of specified length at the output retriggering The output status is switched to Hi after the input Trg is set to Hi The configured time is started at the same time After expiration of the configured time the output Q status is reset 4s Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 515 516 to Lo pulse output If the input status changes again from Lo to Hi retriggering before the specified time has expired the time is reset and the output remains switched on Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 100s 3 Timer Switch With the timer switch you can create timer switches referring to days weeks and years Upon reach of the specified on transition time the output Q of the timer switch is set to Hi and upon reach of the specified off transition time to Lo If you have chosen the option Repeat every the on and off transition is repeated each time according to the specified repetition time Adjustable parameters On time 0 1000s 10 Off time 0 1 1000s 30 Repeat every 0 1 1000s 60 Up Down Counter Depending on the configuration of the input Dir an internal value is counted up or down thro
15. mid position will solve the problem only if a poppet valve is used If a slide valve would be used the oven door would slip down slowly as the result of internal leakage losses The second solution would be to fit a delockable non return valve in the supply line to the piston rod side of the cylinder downstream of the directional control valve In order to ensure that the non return valve closes immediately when the door Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 639 640 stops both the outlets A and B of the directional control valve to the tank must be de pressurized A B and T connected P closed 169 Exercise Clamping device closing speed Workpieces are clamped by a hydraulic cylinder The closing speed must be reduced in order to prevent damage to the workpieces The Opening speed must however be maintained The question here is how to incorporate the necessary one way flow control valve in the circuit Possible solutions must be examined to see what thermal side effects occur and to determine the pressure load placed on the components concerned The advance stroke can as a general principle be made slower by using either inlet or outlet flow control Either solution can be used in this control in comparison with outlet flow control inlet flow control has the advantage that no pressure intensification will take place The oil heated at the throttle point will however then pass throug
16. 1 contains step 2 and is meant to be addressed in the global GRAFCET Within the global GRAFCET the step variable name G1 X2 has to be used Within partial GRAFCET 1 X2 is enough see example Grafcet Grafcet11 ct Variables of macro steps have the form XM step name macro inputs have XE step name and macro outputs have XS step name see example Grafcet Grafcet15 ct Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Partial GRAFCET Variables Partial GRAFCET variables are automatically inserted for each partial GRAFCET and have the value 1 when and only when at least one step in the corresponding partial GRAFCET is active Partial GRAFCET variables have the form XG partial GRAFCET name If for example the partial GRAFCET name is 1 the asso ciated variable is XG1 see example Grafcet Grafcet12 ct Variables of circuit compo The variables of circuit components can be used in GRAFCETs as nents input and output variables see Access to variables of circuit components 10 6 10 Functions and formula entry A range of functions can be used in conditions and assignations These functions are displayed according to the GRAFCET specifica tions e g upwards arrow for rising edge Entering GRAFCET specific functions is supported by the buttons in the dialogues with the relevant labels logical OR logical AND
17. 1 To be able to use the options for displaying cross references you need to activate the Expert Mode J option in the menu The page number is a predefined placeholder that can be used in text components and drawing frames among other things Cross Reference Representation E Inherit From Parent Node Figure 7 4 Cross Reference Representation tab Inherit From Parent Node Defines whether the representation rules for the parent node should be applied Example A sample location that conforms to the specified rules is displayed here Reset Resets the cross reference representation to the default setting 7 3 3 Manage cross references All paired cross references in a project are listed in a dialog window that is opened using the Manage Cross References 72 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM menu item Using this dialog you can jump to all paired cross references in the project 1 To be able to use the options for managing cross references you need to activate the Expert Mode f option in the menu mP Cross References Containing Fage Find Target ce C EET Figure 7 5 Manage Cross References teb Label Contains the label for the corresponding cross reference Containing Page A page containing the cross reference in question can be selected in the drop down list Jump to Target Using this button you can jump to the corresponding cross reference Festo Didactic Gm
18. 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 360 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Configurable 6 n way valve The configurable 6 n way valve is a way valve with three connec tions where both its body elements and its operation modes are user definable Additionally the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind plugs Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Configurable 8 n way valve The configurable 8 n way valve is a way valve with three connec tions where both its body elements and its operation modes are user definable Additionally the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind plugs Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 361 Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 1
19. 3 2 way valve pneumatically operated normally open The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying a pilot pressure at connection 10 Connection 1 is shut By stopping the signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 5 2 way valve pneumatically operated The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying a pilot pressure at connection 14 The flow passes freely from 1 to 4 By stopping the signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring The flow pa
20. A compatible main component can be selected from a list The main component identification can also be entered directly as text Opens a dialog that shows all compatible main components as a tree in accordance with the object hierarchy If this box is checked then the secondary component is logically linked with the main component If the main component is then renamed the link is retained and the identification of the linked secondary component is adapted as appropriate to the main com ponent identification If the secondary component is logically linked with a main compo nent a search can be performed for the associated main compo nent using this button If this box is checked then the main component s identification is shown as the identification for the secondary component Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Select Q1 from the list of compatible main components Proceed in the same way for the second contact Selecting from the list of compatible main components automatical ly establishes the logical links between the contacts and the coil The circuit diagram should now look as follows Figure 12 7 Relay comprising coil with two contacts If you now change the coil identification to Q2 the logical links mean that the identifications at the contacts will also be automati cally changed to Q2 Examples of this are relays with the coil as the main component and the co
21. All of the symbols have been created with reference to this basic unit of length M The actual size of the symbol is not de fined until the symbol is inserted into a circuit Information on how to convert the basic unit of length M is stored with the circuit diagram You can change the set values for a circuit diagram by calling up the properties dialog window for the circuit diagram using the menu You will find the relevant settings in the Basic Unit Lengthtab Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Basic Unit Length i M 1 5mm M 2mm A M 25mm E User Defined M 15 Figure 15 3 Basic Unit Length tab As soon as the value of M is changed the sizes of the existing symbols are recalculated with respect to the specified basic unit of length The specification has no effect on elements in the drawing frame The Basic Unit Length tab is also in the project settings The set tings made in this tab are used as a template for circuit diagrams created from new in the project tree 15 4 Encryption Projects and circuit diagrams can be encrypted The encryption method used is AES 128 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 259 Encryption Enable Encryption Password This page is part of a singlefile project Thus it cannot be encrypted separately f necessary please encrypt the entire project instead Figure 15 4 Encryption tab
22. Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM a eesseove In this situation for example the piston rod is fully advanced the entire pump delivery is flowing at the preset system pres sure to the tank 61 PRV used to limit system pressure This illustration shows a pressure relief valve within a basic hydrau lic circuit used to control a double acting cylinder The resistances at the outlet tank line filter must be added to the force of the spring in the pressure relief valve See also the animation Interaction of components topic 7 eessoovo 62 Circuit diagram PRV used to limit system pressure This illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the cut away view of the PRV replaced by the appropriate circuit symbol 63 Circuit without brake valve One application of pressure relief valves is as brake valves these prevent pressure peaks which may otherwise occur as the result of mass moments of inertia when a directional control valve is sud denly closed The animation shows an incorrect circuit in schemat ic form in which the working line on the exhaust side has fractured due to the absence of a brake valve o eooecens The next animation topic 64 shows the correct circuit 64 Circuit diagram Brake valve This illustration shows the correct circuit for the problem in topic 63 This circuit incorporates not only a brake valve on the piston rod side but also a n
23. Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 75 Interruption Potential Type of connector Pneumatic Hydraulic Hectic E Define multiple connectors Figure 7 6 Interruption Potential dialog window Type of connector Defines whether a fluidic or electric interruption potential is to be inserted Define multiple connectors Multiple interruptions can be set one after the other if this option is active You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc key You can edit the properties for an interruption by double clicking it The following dialog window opens 76 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Layer Identification Target Jump to Target Show Location Representation Interruption Potential Layer Identification Target Browse IM Only Free Interruptions Potentials E Show Location Representation 7 a Ga Ge Figure 7 7 nterruption Potential dialog window Defines the drawing layer for the interruption Defines the identification for the interruption The identification will be displayed in the circuit if the D sp ay option is active Interruptions can reference each other in pairs The counterpart interruption can be selected from a list or entered directly in the list box opens a dialog window where all interruptions are displayed in a tree and can be selected Only interruptions that are not linked will be shown in the list if the On y
24. Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 2 Configurable 3 n way valve The configurable 3 n way valve is a way valve with two connec tions where both its body elements operation modes are user definable 1 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 415 416 Additionally the pneumatic connections can be closed with either blind plugs or exhausts Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 c
25. Jump to Target Activating this button opens the circuit window containing the corresponding cross reference The associated symbol is indicated by an animation The font type text color and alignment of the texts to be displayed can also be customized 7 3 1 Create cross references from symbols You can generate a cross reference from one or more symbols To do so highlight the corresponding symbols and select the Create Cross reference menu item or the Create Cross reference menu item from the context menu The highlighted symbols are combined into a group that constitutes a cross reference with two additional texts One of these texts shows the label used and the other the target text for the cross reference 7 3 2 Cross reference representation The location of the target object can be shown in cross references How it is represented can be specified in the Cross Reference Representation tab in the properties dialog window for the circuit or project The location can be composed from the Page number Page Page Column Page Row and Object Identification components These reference the target object Separators can be placed before and after each component The default representa tion is Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 71 Page number Page Column The description for the page and the page number are specified in the Properties dialog window for the circuit
26. Proportional gain of the PID controller to 10 and start the simulation Designation Quantity value H Figure 9 44 Position displacement and change in velocity with amplified input signal You can see clearly that the cylinder now moves at a constant velocity for a long distance It then brakes sharply and comes quickly to a stop l If the cylinder had to move a load its inertia would cause it to move slightly beyond its target and it would have to move back and forth Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 177 several times before coming to rest These oscillations around the setpoint position are typical for this kind of simple closed loop control In practice you would try to reduce these oscillations by tweaking the parameters of the PID or loop controller However at this stage we will stop at the simple basic principles and refer you to the literature on proportional and closed loop systems for fur ther reading 9 14 Use of the oscilloscope in electronics 178 For graphic display of the physical simulation variables the state diagram is available However for visual representation of high frequency and periodic signals an oscilloscope is better FluidSIM has such an oscilloscope in its electronics library which can be installed in electrical circuits and connected like other measuring devices e g voltmeter und ammeter Any number of oscilloscopes can be installed and used at t
27. Velocity v Acceleration a Individual Throttle valve Opening level Individual Aluidic connector Pressure p MPa Individual Pneumatic flow rate g min Individual Hydraulic flow rate q min Hlectrical connector Voltage U Individual Current Individual me Digital connector State Lo Hi Individual te Display measurement units Figure 9 9 Dialog box for adjusting the quantity values display Here you can define how every quantity value listed Velocity Pressure etc will be displayed l For the display of pressure values flow rates and forces you can choose between different units of measurement These settings take effect when quantity values are displayed at connectors and components and on state diagrams None Do not display any values for this quantity value Individual Display values only at connection points previously selected by the user Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 135 All Display measurement units Display all values for this quantity value Activate this option if you also want the unit of measurement to be displayed for the quantity values You can use the key in the Shortcut column to switch between the display types None Individual and All for that particular quantity value without having to open the dialog box Proceed as follows to select connection points for the display of individual quantity
28. ae Appearance Drawing Properties Spacing Additional Line Spacing Additional Cell Spacing External Target Identification PeR a as O O A El Lines per Page 0 Joo S y Color Figure 16 28 Terminal diagram Properties dialog window Terminal Strip Defines the associated terminal strip Properties Opens the properties dialog window for the associated terminal Strip You can customize the appearance of the terminal diagram in the Print Options tab You can see the effects of the settings straight away in the preview on the right hand side If the Lines per Page option is selected you can specify the num ber of lines to be displayed per page The relevant pages will also Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 287 16 4 1 Set links 288 be output when the circuit diagram is printed Buttons for naviga tion are displayed underneath the page if the list is split across multiple pages The entries in the Description Identification and Connector columns are taken from the object properties of the associated targets You can Set so called inksin a terminal strip These links are drawn in the circuit diagram as regular electric lines and marked as links The representation of the T distributors can be customized using their properties dialog window The following example shows a circuit diagram with a terminal strip X1 with 10 terminals and the asso
29. load It should also be noted that the drive spindle fitted to the piston rod of the drilling cylinder acts as a tractive load The return stroke of the drilling cylinder should also be at maximum speed A circuit should be drafted with the above mentioned characteristics Pressure regulators can as general principle be used to reduce the general system pressure in a part of a hydraulic installation If we consider the two control chains for the drilling machine without pressure regulation we can observe the following undesirable effects When 1V1 is actuated the workpiece is first clamped at full system pressure If 2V1 is now actuated the system pressure will drop to the operating pressure of the drilling cylinder The same applies to the pressure at the clamping cylinder If the circuit is expanded to include the pressure regulator 1V3 this enables the clamping pressure to be adjusted The system pressure upstream of the PRV will however continue to fall during the advance stroke of 2A In order to maintain the preset clamping pressure at outlet A of the PRV reliably the pressure at inlet P must be higher than this This can be achieved by fitting the additional flow control valve OV2 upstream of the final control element 2V1 Maximum return stroke speed is achieved for the clamping cylinder by means of 1V2 which is used to by pass 1V3 The flow control valve 2V3 means that the advance stroke speed of the drilling cylinder is independent o
30. 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way solenoid valve with floating position ii In normal position the connections A and B are open to T When actuated by the control solenoids the valve is set to crossover or parallel position If no current is flowing through the control sole Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 373 374 noids the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the com ponent library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way solenoid valve with bypass position i In normal position the connections A and B are closed and P to T opened When actuated by the con
31. 121 4 3 way valve overlap positions 1 The illustration shows the left hand overlap position of a 4 3 way valve with positive overlap in the mid position closed mid position This overlap position is a mixture of positive and negative overlap P is connected to A B and T are closed With 4 3 way valves the types of overlap positions is generally specified in the data sheet 122 4 3 way valve overlap positions 2 The illustration shows the right hand overlap position of a 4 3 way valve with positive overlap in the mid position closed mid position This overlap position too is a mixture of positive and negative overlap P is connected to B A and T are closed Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 623 24 9 Shutoff Valves AYO 624 123 Way valve Actual photograph of a directional control valve with lever actua tion 124 4 3 way module This 4 3 way module with hand lever actuation is used in vertical interconnection systems modular hydraulics See also the illustration in topic 58 125 Non return valve 1 Non return valves block flow in one direction and allow free flow in the other In the direction of flow shown the sealing element is pressed against a seat by a spring and the hydraulic fluid These valves are also available in designs without springs Since there must be no leaks in the closed position these valves are generally of
32. 1E 06 1E 06 24 8588 mran Figure 9 6 Force profile of the cylinder Constant force If you want a constant force to be applied over the entire range of cylinder movement select this option and enter a force Apply force profile Select this option if you want the force to change depending on the cylinders position By clicking the mouse in the graph field you can interactively set reference points which will be interpolated to form a line Alternatively you can select an existing reference point 128 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM and numerically enter the two values in the input fields for the piston position and the corresponding force You can use the sliders to adjust the displayed value ranges for position and force As the force on the y axis covers an especially wide numerical range it is advisable to start by restricting that interval so that the shape of the curve can be seen clearly Retraction Extraction Select this option if you want to apply the same force profile for advancing and retraction Otherwise remove the checkmark and enter separate force profiles on the tabs Extraction and Retrac tion Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 129 9 2 4 Actuating labels Symbol Name CONFCYL Description Linear Drive Pneumatic wt 7 Display Part number Layer 1 Display in Parts Lists Identification User Defined Properties
33. 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 417 418 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Configurable 6 n way valve The configurable 6 n way valve is a way valve with two connec tions where both its body elements operation modes are user definable Additionally the pneumatic connections can be closed with either blind plugs or exhausts Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 10
34. Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 1 100s 3 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 50 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Time delay valve normally open fa After the pilot signal is applied at port 10 a preset time elapses before the pneumatic timer is actuated It returns to its initial position via a return spring once the signal is removed The time delay is infinitely adjustable by means of a regulating screw The time delay is reset automatically within 200 ms Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 1 100s 3 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 50 Ring sensor The ring sensor is a non contact pneumatic signal output module It is supplied with low pressure at connection 1 If due to an object the entering air flow is disturbed a low pressure signal will be put out by connection 2 To simulate an object in the air flow as pre sented above simply click on the component during FluidSIM Simulation Mode 21 2 7 Pressure Operated Switches 2 way pressure regulator valve The pressure regulator valve regulates the compressed air supply to the preset nominal pressure and equalizes pressure fluctuations The valve closes when the pressure at connection 2 exceeds the 1 nominal pressure The setting for the real components is compo nent dependent and cannot be changed Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 441
35. Externa contro the selection of the active setpoint is effected by gating the inputs 11 12 and I3 with at least 15 V The corresponding setpoint is selected by means of the specified bit table During the process the internal switching time is inactive 468 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Connection electrical An electric connection is a place where an electric line can be at tached to To simplify the line drawing process a connection ap pears aS a Small circle in Edit Mode Note that at each electric connection values for the voltage and current can be displayed Line electrical A electrical line links two electrical connections Note that a electri cal connection may be a simple electrical connection or a T junction A electrical line causes no voltage drop i e it has no electrical resistance T junction electrical A T junction joins up to four electrical lines thus having a single voltage potential Note that T junctions are introduced automatical ly by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another line in Edit Mode 21 3 2 Actuators Signal Devices DC motor The DC motor transforms electrical energy into mechanical energy DC motors produce the continual rotation through repeated chang es in the direction of current The characteristics of the 24 V DC motor relate to the motor used by the Festo Didactic conveyor belts Festo Didactic GmbH
36. If a unique assignment is not possible the relevant connector must be select ed manually via the list box The identification for the individual Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM wires can also be entered These are saved in the individual lines wires The wire identifications are displayed at the cable symbol using the Display button Reverse Direction The entries in the From and 7o column are automatically defined as the direction of the wires when creating the cable symbol Clicking the button reverses the directions of all of the wires Renumber From Clicking this button renumbers all of the wires defined by the cable symbol starting with the number entered in the list box Display Attributes E Supplier Curent value Festo E Cable Type E Cross Section Current value 1 mm E Length Current value 2 m E Part number Figure 16 7 Cable Symbol dialog window Display Attributes tab In the Display Attributes tab you can select the attributes of the associated cable object that are to be displayed at the cable sym bol Click the button to create a new cable symbol The following dialog window opens Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 267 Containing Page Identification Number of Wires 268 New Cable Containing Page 1 ET Identification Number of Wires 1 100 cancel He Figure 16 8 New Cable di
37. KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 569 570 57 Memory circuit 5 2 way bistable valve Signals initiated by the push button signaling devices can be of short or pulse duration due to the memory characteristics of the bistable valve Upon operation of push button 1S1 a 1 signal is generated at port 14 of the control valve 1V3 The 5 2 way memory valve switches and the cylinder 1A1 advances The circuit is shown at the first operation of the button 58 Memory circuit 5 2 way bistable valve When the push button 1S1 is released the signal at port 14 is exhausted The valve 1V3 remains in the current position The last position is retained until a new input signal is given Compare the sequence of operation 59 Memory circuit 5 2 way bistable valve The valve 1V3 remains in the current position until the push button 1S2 is operated The cylinder then retracts The cylinder remains retracted until a new signal is generated at port 14 by the valve 1S1 Compare the sequence of operation 60 Memory circuit 5 2 way bistable valve The flow control valves throttle the exhausting air in both directions of piston motion The cylinder remains retracted until a start signal is generated at port 14 by the valve 1S1 The 5 2 way valve re mains in the current position with air supplied continuously to the return side of the cylinder Discuss the situation when both 1S1 and 1S2 are operated together Fes
38. Mz Ball valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Switch Vary Q Ball valve with drive unit Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Switch Vary Q Ball valve with drive unit Cylinders with piston rod double acting Single ended pi Ball valve with drive unit Swivel dive double acting pneumatic Pneumatic symb Fiter with bypass valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Treat Fitter Separate Filter with bypass valve and digital indicator Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Tre Fiter with bypass valve with optical clogging indicator and electrical contact Poet Fow control valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Limit Cushioning Stabilise Non etum valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1215 1 Limit Cushioning Stabilise R Non etum valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Limit Cushioning Stabilise Ri Non etum valve piloted non tetum function Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Lir One way flow control valve Adjustable Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Limit C One way flow control valve Adjustable Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Limit C Quick exhaust valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Control Regulate K mh a eounling with nansetiim walee uinecimled Pre imatic cumbhnle ISi 4 TT Figure 3 4 Find Symbol dialog window You can see the symbols found in the two results lists The library hierarchy is displayed on the left hand side although only those branches appear which contain matching symbols An alphabetical list of
39. Redo Takes back the last undo action for the active circuit Cut Deletes the selected objects and adds them to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected objects to the clipboard Paste Pastes the objects from the clipboard into the active circuit Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Delete Select All Group Create Macro Object Create Cross reference Ungroup Break Off Enable Scale a D D o LA ce g z a D O D D O Oo Ta Ta Wn Wn Wn rt an fal fel 5 gt 3 gt o z je nn S 7 z E D sk i Rj 3 ap oO r gt oD a a 2 a O A ia fa Qa Q Q e si Z oy ua D O Oo N T oO a c a zh O T n O m be WN D Sa 3 a or cr pn O gt gt e a D 3 N ct 7 D a O D D a lt fat ro es D D a a 9 D O oO g2 Q 2 Q Q a ig N O e Q c v enable scaling mode which enables gt 9p lt fas rt oO oa O Q fe pe gp lt pe rt g2 oa om of a gt ca Enable Rotate om wt gt D Wn a jab oa A N lt 3 o Nn oma gt om a gt D gt D D S om a gt D 3 Nn D 5 o gt a D T enable rotate mode which enables gt OQ a lt fas ce Nn O Q oO se Q ER lt fas te Nn a gt fa Edit Poly Line Activates or deactivates the Edit Polyline mode that allows you
40. Rename the potentials L2 and L3 to L5 and L6 in the same way Then enter the corresponding markers for the predecessors or successors in the properties dialog windows for the potentials If the corresponding cross references have the same markers in the respective predecessor and successor pages the potential lines might look as follows Figure 16 4 Three horizontal potential lines with cross references 16 2 Cables and wiring 264 Cables and wiring are represented in the circuit diagram by a spe cial cable symbol All of the lines defined by the cable symbol are assigned to a cable or to wiring You can define for the symbol whether it is a cable or wiring Wiring only summarizes the defined lines wires graphically in the circuit diagram and is assigned the identification W by default Wiring is not listed in analyses such as cable maps and cable lists Unlike a cable wiring cannot be assigned to a product With wiring product information can only be saved in the lines Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM If the cable symbol represents a cable then a cable object must be assigned to the symbol Product properties can be saved in the cable object and are analyzed in cable maps and cable lists etc Several cable symbols can reference the same cable object This is the case if for example a cable has to be spread over several pages IN OD W2 Figure 16 5 Cable symbol Se
41. This is described under Potentials and conduction lines A line is drawn by defining two points In contrast to a conduction line this line is purely a drawing element As such it can be drawn with any desired angle but does not allow connections with pneu matic or electric connectors The line specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Proper ties tab of the Properties dialog window for the line Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Start Point End Point Scale Rotation Override Color Line Style Line Width Start Cap End Cap Background Start Point Color Line Style Line Width G Background Drawing Properties Scale x l 1 Rotation 355 6029464 Deg as Start Cap 0 1 End Cap Foreground Figure 7 9 Properties dialog window for a line Drawing Properties tab Defines the x y coordinate of the start point Defines the x y coordinate of the end point Defines the scaling in the x or y direction Defines the angle of rotation in degrees Defines the color of the drawing element Defines the line style Defines the line thickness Defines how the beginning of the line is displayed Defines how the end of the line is displayed Sets the location of the drawing element to the background This means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this For example symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements Festo Didactic GmbH amp C
42. amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM in a single technical system FluidSIM ensures that you can only join connections which are also physically possible A major feature of FluidSIM is its close linkage between CAD func tionality and simulation On the one hand FluidSIM allows DIN compliant drawing of fluidic and electronic circuit diagrams on the other hand it is capable of using physical component descriptions to carry out a realistic dynamic simulation of the drawn circuit This practically eliminates the separation between drawing creation and simulation When developing FluidSIM special emphasis was placed on mak ing operation intuitive and easy to learn This approach makes it possible for you to learn to design and simulate fluidic and elec tronic circuit diagrams in a very short time To provide access to professional functions not present in this simple operating inter face FluidSIM also has an Expert Mode which can be switched on as needed FluidSIM P was created by the Knowledge based Systems workgroup at the University of Paderborn FluidSIM H is the result of cooperative research between the Instrumentation and Control department at Gerhard Mercator University in Duisburg and Knowledge based Systems at the University of Paderborn On hand for mechanical engineering matters was Dr Ralf Lemmen FluidSIM E was developed as an entirely new module by Art Systems Soft ware GmbH Planning and developme
43. can be flipped into the low impedance state by using a positive and negative control pulse 21 5 4 Measuring instruments Sensors Ohmmeter An ohmmeter is an electrical test instrument which is used to measure the electrical resistance of components Adjustable parameters Voltage 0 1 9V 9 Series resistor 1 1000 kOhm 47 Oscilloscope ANV An oscilloscope is an electronic test instrument that allows visual observation of one or more electrical voltages and their change oo oO over time ona display device The oscilloscope displays a history OOO graph usually as a two dimensional graph where the horizontal x axis represents time and the vertical y axis the voltages that are to be displayed The resulting image is called an oscillogram Adjustable parameters Resistance 1E 3 10 MOhm 10 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 507 21 6 Digital Components 21 6 1 Constants and Terminals 508 Digital input Digital inputs are designated with an I In FluidSIM digital com ponents can be used inside and outside a digital module Ifa digital input is used inside a digital module you can determine the input connector of the digital module in question with which the digital input shall be linked by allocating a number 11 to 116 If there is an analog signal of more than 10V at the chosen input of the digital module the digital input is set to Hi If a digital input is
44. colored and the cylinder advances Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 105 Figure 8 11 Simulated circuit Once the cylinder has advanced the pressure in the cylinder supply line should increase This situation is detected by FluidSIM and the parameters are recalculated the pressure on the pump side in creases to the value predefined by the limit protection in the pump unit To limit the pressure to a lower value you have to safeguard the pump unit with a pressure relief valve Activate Edit Mode with W or with or with F5f 106 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Drag a pressure relief valve and a second tank onto the draw ing area If necessary drag the line segments until the drawing is ar ranged clearly The circuit should now look something like this Figure 8 12 Circuit with pressure relief valve Save this circuit with fj or with Save File J FluidSIM automatically opens the file selection box if the file did not al ready exist you can enter a file name here Start the simulation with p gt Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 107 The cylinder advances Once it reaches its stop a new situation is created This situation is detected by FluidSIM and the parameters are recalculated the pressure relief valve opens and the resulting distribution of pressure is shown Figure 8 13 Circui
45. electric current is flowing through the diode in forward direction it emits light with a wavelength that depends on the semiconductor material and doping To make the use of the LED as a simple signal indicator easier FluidSIM allows setting the color independent of the physical characteristics Adjustable parameters Reference voltage 0 1 100 V 4 Reference current 1 1000 mA 35 Resistance in series 0 001 1000 Ohm 12 5 Saturation current 1e 15 100 A 1e 12 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 501 502 By Light emitting diode LED green red Ay A light emitting diode LED is a semiconductor component that emits light and has the electrical characteristics of a diode If an electric current is flowing through the diode in forward direction it emits light with a wavelength that depends on the semiconductor material and doping In this component a green and a red LED with opposite polarity are connected in parallel Depending on the current direction either the green or red LED lights up Connected to alternating current with a frequency higher than about 30 Hz the human eye cannot recog nize the blinking and it seems as if both LEDs are lit simultaneously Adjustable parameters Reference voltage 0 1 100 V 2 Reference current 1 1000 mA 25 Resistance in series 0 001 1000 Ohm 12 5 Saturation current 1e 15 100 A 1e 12 Zener diode Because
46. is transmitted only after the required operation pressure has been reached If the signal pressure at port 12 exceeds that set on the spring the valve opens Outlet port 2 is opened only if a preset pressure has built up in pilot line 12 A pilot spool opens the pas sage between ports 1 to 2 Discuss the two elements in the control symbol Discuss the adjustment required to set the desired operation pressure A pressure gauge is required 582 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM j 100 Circuit Pressure sequence valve El A plastic component is embossed using a die powered by a double ke acting cylinder The die is to advance and emboss the plastic when Lite aa a push button is operated The return of the die is to be effected a when a preset pressure is reached The pressure is to be adjusta ble Refer to topic 99 for construction of the valve 101 Exercise Pressure dependent control embossing of plastic Problem A plastic component is embossed using a die and a double acting cylinder The die is to advance and emboss the plastic when a push button is operated The return of the die is to occur when the cylinder rod has fully advanced to the embossing position and a preset pressure is reached A roller limit valve is to be used to confirm full extension The embossing pressure is adjustable and is indicated on a pressure gauge 102 Exercise Pressure dependent cont
47. notches A triangular shaped notch results in a progressive flow behavior a rectangular shaped notch in a linear flow behavior The hydraulic resistance relates to a completely opened leading edge and the internal leakage relates to one leading edge as appropri ate The overlap of the leading edges can be specified relative to the maximal slide distance Adjustable parameters Control notch shape Rectangular Triangular Triangular Relative spool overlap 50 50 25 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 3 2 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 001 396 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Proportional throttle valve B In order to alter the flow rate through the valve the cross section of the throttle valve is electrically manipulated with the assistance of i a proportional amplifier The control voltage must be between 0 V and 10 V The deflection of the slide is proportional to the applied voltage At O V the valve is completely closed in relation to the null overlap The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve The overlap of the leading edges can be specified relative to the maximal slide distance Adjustable parameters Control notch shape Rectangular Triangular Triangular Relative spool overlap 50 50 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Proportional pressure relief valve The proportional pressure
48. on the other hand the advance stroke is half as fast and the force twice as great as in the other two switching positions The speed for the advance and return strokes can be adjusted by means of a flow control valve fitted upstream It Should also be noted that only half the force is available on the advance stroke at the mid position In the case of a tractive load the by pass position has the advantage that the piston is hydraulically clamped Differential circuits are used not only as synchronization circuits but also as rapid traverse circuits when for example different speeds are required in the same direction with constant pump delivery If it is desired to calcu late forces and piston speeds using concrete values the model values given in the TP 501 textbook can be used for this pur pose 173 Exercise Drilling machine pressure regulator The drill feed and clamping device of a drilling machine are hydrau lically actuated The hydraulic control system contains two cylin ders a clamping cylinder 1A and a feed cylinder 2A The clamping pressure at cylinder 1A must be adjustable since different workpiece clamping forces are required A pressure regulator is used for this The return stroke of the clamping cylinder must be at maximum speed The drilling feed must be adjustable for various feed speeds which must however remain constant under varying Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 643
49. requires a 360 turn The helix is however very costly to produce Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 142 Circuit diagram Flow division using restrictor Throttle and orifice valves control the volumetric flow rate in con junction with a pressure relief valve The PRV opens when the resistance of the flow control valve becomes greater than that of the opening pressure set on the PRV This produces a division of flow The volumetric flow to the load device varies i e the action of flow control valves is load dependent 143 Throttle valve Actual photograph of a flow control valve 144 One way flow control valve 1 The one way flow control valve is a combination of an orifice or throttle valve and a non return valve In the closed direction shown of the non return valve the volumetric flow passes via the variable throttle gap which creates a considerable resistance Speed reduction can be achieved by using a one way flow control valve in conjunction with a pressure relief valve or a variable delivery pump The pressure rises upstream of the flow control valve until the PRV opens and routes part of the flow to the tank 145 One way flow control valve 2 In the reverse direction from B to A flow is unrestricted since the ball in the one way flow control valve allows free flow non return function One way flow control valves are available with a fixed restri
50. thermore reduces wear resulting from cavitation in the valves 166 Exercise Embossing press activation of a single acting cylinder Additional hydraulic components are to be added to an embossing press to eject the finished workpieces A single acting cylinder 1A is to be fitted for this purpose A proposed solution in the form of a circuit diagram with a 2 2 way valve is to be examined to see if it is suitable for this control problem Following this a circuit diagram with a 3 2 way valve as final control element is to be developed Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 637 638 and a parts list prepared A comparison is to be made of the behav ior of these two circuits during the advance and return strokes When a 2 2 way valve is used to activate a single acting cylinder the final control element must be reversed and the hydraulic power unit switched off in order to retract the piston rod The load acting on the piston rod must be larger than the resistance of the direc tional control valve This solution cannot be used due to the pres ence of the second control chain embossing cylinder If a 3 2 way valve is used a direct switch over can be made from the advance stroke to the return stroke without switching off the hydraulic power unit Halting at overlap positions on the other hand which are not required here would be possible only by switching off the hydraulic power unit The
51. velocity acceleration force switching position pressure flow rate opening level revolutions rpm voltage current digital state etc You can use multiple state diagrams in one window and can also display multiple components in the same diagram You can add a component to a state diagram by dragging it onto the diagram A selection dialog box will open where you can select the quantity values to be logged and can assign different colors to them Drag ging onto the diagram again opens the dialog box again allowing you to change your selection In Edit Mode double click a state diagram or select the menu tem Edi Properties The following dialog box will open Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 137 State diagram Display interval Adjust automatically Scroll automatically 10 Seconds Fixed interval Start End 100 Diagram columns v Description Identification v Quantity value Log file Full file path Output interval resolution Display interval Diagram columns 138 0 01 LSJ Color a 0 Fives Layer 1 v Quantity values Seconds E 4 1 Double acting Cylinder Add Position x Seconds 7i Velocity v Acceleration a Force F Find Target as 04 I Y Browse Seconds ae rare Help Figure 9 10 Dialog box for the state diagram Here you can enter th
52. 01 10001 0 1 Friction 0 01 100 N m s rad 0 1 Moment of inertia 1e 005 1 kg m2 0 0001 External torque 1000 1000 N m 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 405 21 1 11 Measuring Devices Manometer The manometer measures the pressure at its connection Differential pressure gauge The differential pressure gauge displays the pressure difference between the adjacent pressures at the left and the right connection Pressure indicator An optical signal is activated when the pressure at the connection to the pressure display exceeds the preset switching pressure Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 0 1 40 MPa 3 Pressure sensor analog This symbol represents the hydraulic part of the analog pressure sensor The analog pressure sensor measures the adjacent pres sure and transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal In the process only pressures in the specified pressure ranges are considered Within this range the pressure in the voltage range from O V to 10 V is represented i e the minimum pressure delivers O V and the maximum pressure 10 V OPE Adjustable parameters 406 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Minimum pressure 40 40 MPa 0 Maximum pressure 40 40 MPa 10 Voltage at p1 100 100 V 0 Voltage at p2 100 100 V 10 A Flow meter The flow meter measures the flow rate Either
53. 1 Spring preload 0 10 MPa 0 45 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 05 Hydraulic resistance Flow control valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 4 Hydraulic resistance Non return valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 393 394 AS 0 08 3 way flow control valve With sufficient pressure the preset flow rate is kept constant in the direction of the arrow The surplus hydraulic fluid is drained at connection T using a pressure compensator The inlet pressure pA is load dependent i e it changes with the outlet pressure pB There fore a parallel circuit of several 3 way flow control valves is not possible In this case the inlet pressures would be defined by the valve with the lowest inlet pressure Compared to the 2 way flow control valve the 3 way flow control valve is admittedly more efficient in its energy consumption The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely closed pressure compensator Adjustable parameters Nominal flow 0 500 l min 4 Spring preload 0 10 MPa 0 5 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 05 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 4 Flow divider valve The flow divider valve divides the flow from P into two equal flows at A and B This is achieved using two measuring orifices and two variable control resistors The control resistors are unified in a pressure compensator The hydraulic re
54. 11 represent the digital outputs and the contacts on the left hand side 0 2 4 6 8 and 10 the digital inputs If the Priority for connected hardware switch is activated only the input signals from the external sensors are taken into consideration if an EasyPort has been connected Universal 1 O The universal input output unit is connected with the multi pin plug distributor by a label The component is a input if the label refers to a input channel of the multi pin plug distributor The component is an output if the label refers to an output channel of the multi pin plug distributor If used as an input the universal I O component is a voltage source If the correspondent input channel of the multi pin plug distributor on high level the universal I O Component delivers 24 V otherwise OV If used as an output chan nel the universal O component sets the correspondent output channel of the multi pin plug distributor on high level if there is a higher voltage than 20 V Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 4 Electrical Components American Standard 21 4 1 Power Supply Electrical connection OV ladder OV connection of the power supply Adjustable parameters Voltage 0 400 V 0 Electrical connection 24V ladder 24V connection of the power supply Adjustable parameters Voltage 0 400 V 24 21 4 2 General Switches gt Break switch ladder General break switc
55. 16 3 1 Set terminals 279 16 3 2 Set multiple terminals 281 16 3 3 Create terminal strips 283 16 3 4 Manage terminal strips 284 8 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 16 4 16 4 1 16 5 17 17 1 17 2 17 3 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 18 10 18 11 18 12 18 13 18 14 18 15 18 16 19 A yz 123 19 4 19 5 19 6 Terminal diagram Set links Contact images Circuit input and output Print circuit diagram and parts list Import DXF file Export circuit Options General Save Folder Locations Language Dimension Cross Reference Representation Connector Links Warnings Automatic Updates Simulation GRAFCET DDE Connection Environment parameters Fluid properties Sound Text Sizes Menu overview File Edit Insert Draw Page Execute Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 286 288 292 295 295 297 297 299 299 300 301 302 302 304 305 306 307 308 310 311 311 312 312 314 315 315 318 320 322 323 324 19 7 Didactics 325 19 8 Project 326 19 9 View 327 19 10 Library 331 19 11 Tools 332 19 12 Window 333 19 13 Help 334 20 Functional diagram 335 20 1 Edit Mode 336 20 1 1 Set diagram properties 336 20 1 2 Table textboxes 337 20 1 3 Adjust the presentation of the diagrams 340 20 2 Draw diagram curve 341 20 3 Insert signal elements 342 20 4 Insert text boxes 343 20 5 Draw signal
56. 37 Symbols for directional valves 2 Each valve position is shown as a separate square The designation of the ports is important when interpreting the circuit symbols and the valve as fitted to the physical system Compare the full range of symbols for directional control valves 38 Designation of connections The designations for directional control valves are in accordance with ISO 5599 3 edition 1990 Prior to this a lettering system was utilized Discuss the examples and emphasize the numbering systems Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 39 Methods of actuation 1 Rurkalirrh iiH Rachinieth eerlka Anh EL Fade niackgcest 4 wam Ps Puskas yc The methods of actuation of pneumatic directional control valves is mennat Fes dependent upon the application The methods of actuation include DO Pekar as manual mechanical pneumatic electrical and combined Discuss the actuation and return actuation methods moses 40 Methods of actuation 2 meuh oo When applied to a directional control valve consideration must be mene P Siven to the method of initial actuation of the valve and also the method of return actuation They are both shown on the symbol mapapa 1 L either side of the position boxes There may also be additional methods such as manual overrides separately indicated Discuss the actuation and return actuation methods os 41 3 2 way valve ball seat A spring
57. 4 4 1 Change window position The library window is anchored on the left hand side by default and the project window when a project is open is on the right hand side To separate the window from the anchor move the mouse pointer to the upper margin Click and hold the left mouse button Move the window a small distance towards the center of the screen Now release the left mouse button Now you need to move the library window to the lower right and the project window to the lower left Once a window has been separated from the anchor it can be moved freely To re anchor the window move the mouse pointer to the upper margin Click and hold the left mouse button Move the window as far as possible to the right or the left Now release the left mouse button This window snaps into place This enables you to anchor the library window to the right and the project window to the left for example You can also anchor both windows on the same side In this case you can move the desired window into the foreground by clicking the associated tab 4 2 Automatic show and hide The tabs offer an additional practical function Automatically showing and hiding the library or project window Click the associ ated vertical tab Library or Project at the edge of the window This causes the window to be hidden providing a larger area for the drawing In order to make the window visible again move the mouse pointer over the tab the window open
58. 5 6 Fi a Terminals x t Number of Terminals 8 Description Eetemal Target Intemal Target Find Target il oo J om om dime to Ra Figure 16 25 Terminal Strip dialog window If the target of a terminal ns de the control cabinet is unique due to the wiring FluidSIM automatically enters the identification for the connected component Otherwise the list contains the identifica tions of all objects that can be reached from the terminal The target search can be controlled by selecting a junction symbol asa T distributor The targets of the terminals outside the control cabinet are listed here As with the internal targets unique links are automatically entered Jumps to the associated terminal in the circuit diagram 16 3 4 Manage terminal strips 284 All terminal strips within a circuit can be listed and renamed using the Manage Terminal Strips menu item from the menu You open the properties dialog window for the relevant terminal strip using the Properties button Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM You can also call up the cables of all terminal strips belonging to the project using the Manage Terminal Strips menu item from the menu Manage Terminal Strips 1 ET Create New x Description a Page Find Target Figure 16 26 dialog window Containing Page Shows which circuit the terminal strip is assigned to You can edit this
59. 547 23 Didactics Material Survey Pneumatics 550 23 1 Basics 550 23 2 Supply elements 552 23 3 Actuators 557 23 4 Directional control valves 562 23 5 Shutoff valves 573 12 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 23 6 23r 23 8 23 9 23 10 23 10 1 eel 23A 24 24 1 24 2 24 3 24 4 24 5 24 6 24 7 24 8 24 9 24 10 24 11 24 12 24 13 24 14 Flow control valves Pressure control valves Time delay valve Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit Educational Films Educational Films Standard Presentations Presentations Didactics Material Survey Hydraulics Applications Components of a Hydraulic Plant Symbols Some Physical Fundamentals Components of a Power Unit Fundamentals of Valves Pressure Valves Way Valves Shutoff Valves Flow Valves Hydraulic Cylinders and Motors Gauges Exercises Educational Films 24 14 1 Educational Films 24 15 24 15 1 Standard Presentations Presentations index Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 580 582 584 587 589 589 590 590 592 592 593 595 599 602 606 608 615 624 628 631 634 635 645 645 645 646 647 13 Welcome Chapter 1 14 Welcome to FluidSIM Thank you for purchasing the FluidSIM training software This user s guide functions both as an introduction to FluidSIM and as a reference manual outlining the possibilities concepts and opera tion of the so
60. A transition with the value 1 is dis played in green in FluidSIM You can show a descriptive text in stead of the formula as with the actions A Boolean value is automatically generated for each step The name begins with an X followed by the name of the step In the example here the variables X1 and X2 are generated The value of a step variable is 1 if the step is active otherwise it is 0 Transition conditions can be time dependent These have the following form t1s term t2s Where t1 and t2 have to be replaced by numbers and term by a Boolean term s seconds ms milliseconds Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM The transition condition becomes true 1 t1 seconds after term has changed its value from 0 to 1 This is called a rising edge The transition condition becomes false again 0 t2 seconds after term has changed its value from 1 to O This is called a fall ing edge The short form t1 s term is also allowed The system then as sumes that t2 is O seconds Enter the transition conditions into the transitions properties dialogue as shown and then start the simulation Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 189 190 Name Condition Description E Display description instead of formula Connection D target inform
61. Adjustable parameters Ja ur motor Displacement 0 01 1000 Liter 0 1 Friction 0 01 100 N r svrad 3 Moment of inertia 0 00001 1 kgfm 0 0001 External torque 1000 1000 Nr i0 G gt Figure 22 3 Page component specific topics Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 531 Component library Componentlibrary Hydraulic Components Mechanically Actuated Directional Valves 4 2 way hand lever valve i A B 4 2 way hand lever valve i P T In normal position the connection P is open to B and Ato T When manually actuated the valve is set to parallel position This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Related Topics Configurable 4 n way valve 4 2 way hand lever valve fii 104 4 2 way valve two pistons 1 C gt Figure 22 4 Dialog box with component specific topics Please click the line with the relevant topic 35 Air motor hydraulics 104 4 2 way valve two pistons 1 The following picture appears 532 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Didactics material Didactics material Basics and working principles Actuators Air motor 35 Air motor Devices which transform pneumatic energy into mechanical rotary motion with the possibility of continuous motion They are categorized into the gr
62. Check for updates As soon as there is an Internet connection you can use this menu item to initiate the search for a new FluidSIM version About WwW a se lt W om wt gt ca a Q 2 lt 2 x O gq Q 3 O x 3 fat O Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Functional diagram Chapter 20 You can find the function diagram in the standard FluidSIM library You can apply the functions from the menu to the function diagram Double click the function diagram or open the Functional diagram using the menu item on the menu The buttons in the upper toolbar of the editor are for editing a function diagram The following six buttons determine the editing mode Edit Mode Draw diagram curves Insert signal elements Insert text boxes Draw signal lines and insert signal connections Eoeee Ee Insert additional signal lines The selected mode is highlighted in white or displayed as a pressed button z shows that signal lines can be drawn in the diagram area by clicking for example If you hover the mouse pointer over a button for a short period of time then a short description is displayed Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 335 20 1 Edit Mode Functional diagram gt njOl lig its ee 2 alae Draw signal lines and insert signal connections identification Figure 20 1 This mode serves to adj
63. Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 315 316 Add New Page Add New Parts List Add Existing Files Close gt O d d 5 O la o 2 a a an An o gt ga N N o ge 2 9 o 5 O Q w Y 5 lt O Ti J t a T D a 5 fat O a P u o D a a D T Q o rt oa O gt x ra y v fab amp a fel 3 a oq lt a T D 2 5 N oO na o D o O D o O oO or fa Q Q Q a O Closes the active window or project etc Close File Closes the active window Close Project Closes the active project Save File Save File As VN VN fas fas lt lt O oO Nn Wn fans fans a gt a gt ca ca ec G lt if a a a fas fat oq oq pe pe 3 5 5 gt gt ca ca se se Q Q r lt lt ca ca 5 5 Q Q O O roma roma O O a a Wn Wn a am 5 Q i pe 5 ig name Save Project Saves the active project Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Save Project As 7 se lt fa Wn rt gt ca je 9p lt ca T ig 9p rt gt Q i se gt ig gt Q 3 ca O gt rt gt ca Q Q om wt se 0 rt O Q ee ca medium Files that are within the project folder are duplicated while references to external files are left With e
64. Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Spacing Additional Line Spacing Additional Cell Spacing Column Header Background Color Lattice Show Lattice E Lines per Page Figure 13 9 dialog window Appearance tab You can customize the appearance of the tube list on the Appear ance tab You can see the effects of the settings straight away in the preview on the right hand side If the Lines per Page option is selected you can specify the number of lines to be displayed per page The relevant pages will also be printed in a printout of the circuit diagram Buttons for navigation are displayed underneath the page if the list is split across multiple pages Figure 13 10 Buttons for navigating through lists Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 249 Manage projects Chapter 14 FluidSIM supports the management of projects by compiling differ ent files under one name in a single project file This has the fol lowing benefits When opening a project all of the associated data is loaded It is possible to rapidly access files belonging to a project via the project window Parts lists whose elements are located in different circuit diagram files can be maintained in one project 14 1 Create new project 250 Select the New menu item from the menu and enter a file name for the new project Project files possess the prj file suffix By default they only cont
65. Displacement 0 10000 cm3 32 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Tank The tank is integrated into the pump unit and has a pressure of 0 MPa It can be inserted into the circuit diagram as an independent component Hose with quick action coupling The hose is available in 3 lengths 600 mm 1500 mm and 3000 mm The pressure loss in a hose is taken into account by specifying a hydraulic resistance In FluidSIM no pressure loss is simulated with simple connections between two components Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Hydraulic reservoir The reservoir enables the performance of a hydraulic system to be optimized For example it can be utilized as an energy reservoir and for the absorbance of pressure surges or flow fluctuations Reservoirs are capable of absorbing a defined volume of fluid under pressure and releasing it again with minimal losses The construc tion consists essentially of a pressure resistant container generally a gas charge of nitrogen and a separator e g a piston a membrane or a bubble elastomer Hydraulic fluid only starts to flow into the reservoir when the fluid pressure is greater than the gas preload pressure Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Volume 0 01 1001 0 32 Pre load pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Polytropic exponent 0 5 3 1 4 Hydraulic reservoir The reservoir enabl
66. Figure 13 5 Parts List Properties dialog window Listed Attributes tab List All Attributes Lists all of the component attributes within a parts list row List Selected Attributes Only lists selected component attributes within a parts list row Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 245 Parts List Properties 5 Accumulated Parts List E Sort as Number Single Position Parts List Included Pages Listed Attributes Print Options Language Spacing Additional Line Spacing Additional Cell Spacing x identification o Column Header 2 BAAR Background Color 178132 Lattice Show Lattice cal is Page Header Adopt Description Repeat Header On Each Page Figure 13 6 Parts List Properties dialog window Print Options tab In this tab you can adjust the appearance of the parts list printout In the preview on the right hand side you can immediately see the effects of the adjustments You can find information regarding printing a parts list in the Print circuit diagram and parts list section 13 4 Export parts list You can export the parts list as a text file Click the button in the parts list view 246 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM A dialog window for selecting a file or entering a new file name appears After you have entered a file and left the dialog field you can define the following format settings for the export in the Parts L
67. GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 281 Description Display Direction Layer Terminal Strip 282 terminal strip does not already exist then a prompt to create a new one will automatically appear Define Multiple Terminals Description Direction W Enumerate Manually wie Start number pt of Display E W Show Direction Layer 1 Teminal Strip Properties l Create New E Display Identification Finish with ESC Key Cancel l Help Figure 16 23 Define Multiple Terminals dialog window Defines how the new terminals are to be numbered The Enumerate Manually option allows you to specify a start number from which the numbering continues Otherwise a free terminal from the se lected terminal strip is automatically used The start number 2 was specified in the example shown If this box is checked then the description entered will be displayed beside the terminal Defines the direction of the new terminals The direction is indicat ed in the circuit by an arrow that shows which connector is inside the control cabinet and which is outside The tip of the arrow points into the control cabinet The direction can also be changed later using the properties dialog window for the individual terminals Defines the drawing layer for the line Defines the terminal strip containing the terminals in question The list contains the terminal strips already created You call
68. Select a cylinder type Set whether the cylinder should be single acting or double acting Specifies whether a spring for the return should be inserted into the right or left cylinder chamber Click the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol ele ment for the piston Set whether the cylinder should possess end position cushioning and whether this should be adjustable Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Piston Rod Piston Position 5 12 Group symbols Click the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol ele ment for the piston rod Using the slider you can specify the relative piston position in 25 steps 0 stands for the completely retracted and 100 extended piston If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a group select these and choose the menu item on the menu Groups can also be nested i e already grouped objects can be grouped again A group primarily serves as a drawing aid and does not represent any new components Every element in a group is included ina parts list in exactly the same way as without being grouped Dou ble clicking on a group element opens the dialog window Proper ties of group element clicked If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a new component with its own attributes create a macro object 5 13 Create macro objects If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a new component with its own attributes then highlight these a
69. V to 8 5 V can be specified The PID controller requires a power supply of 24 V Adjustable parameters Range selection 10 10V 0 10V 10 10 V Proportional gain 0 1000 1 Integral gain 0 10001 s 0 Derivation gain 0 1000 ms 0 Control quantity offset 7 7 V 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 485 486 Status controller The status controller is especially suitable for controlling pneumatic positioning circuits A pneumatic positioning circuit counts to the controlled systems that can only be unsatisfactorily controlled with a standard controller Three parameters can be attributed to the present status controller position speed and acceleration of the piston The controller is therefore referred to as a triple loop controller Speed and acceleration are not measured with sensors out of cost reasons They are calculated by the controller from the differences in position The adjustable parameters refer to the status controller in the Technology Package TP111 Closed loop pneumatics TP511 Closed loop hydraulics from Festo Didactic The output voltage restriction can be set within the range i 10 V to 10 V or ii O V to 10 V In the range i a manipulated variable offset from 7 V to 7 V can be specified and in the range ii a manipulated variable offset from 1 5 V to 8 5 V can be specified The status controller requires a power supply of 24 V Adjustable par
70. abruptly occurring air consumption Large time delays can be attained when used in conjunction with time delay und throttle valves Adjustable parameters Volume 0 001 10001 1 Filter The compressed air filter removes contamination from the com pressed air The size of the filterable particles is dependent upon the filter class Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 411 Filter manual condensate drain The compressed air filter removes contamination from the com pressed air The size of the filterable particles is dependent upon ZA the filter class Condensation which can occur through sinking temperatures or the expansion of the compressed air can be man ually drained off Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Filter automatic condensate drain aN The compressed air filter removes contamination from the com T pressed air The size of the filterable particles is dependent upon a the filter class Condensation which can occur through sinking temperatures or the expansion of the compressed air is automati cally drained off Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Water separator The water separator drains off accrued water Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 412 Festo Didactic GmbH
71. air forms a compound with the drying agent in the tank This causes the drying agent to break down it is then dis charged as a fluid at the base of the tank The drying agent must be replenished at a rate which is dependent on the compressed air temperature water content and flow rate Compare with adsorption drying Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 553 Fea cw it a eat wr Ahata i I mbiyen Tl ey 554 13 Air drying adsorption The lowest equivalent dew points down to 90 C can be achieved by means of adsorption drying In this process the com pressed air is passed through gel and the water is deposited on the surface i e it is adsorbed Compare with absorption drying 14 Air lubricator As a rule the compressed air which is generated should be dry and free of oil For some components lubricated air is damaging for others it is undesirable and for power components it may in certain cases be necessary Lubrication of the air should therefore be limited to the sections of the plant which require it Refer to picture of topic 9 for general arrangement 15 Air lubricator Air passing through the lubricator causes a pressure drop between the oil reservoir and the upper part of the lubricator This pressure difference forces the oil upwards through a tube and it then drips into a nozzle which can be seen through an inspection glass The oil is atomized and
72. amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 469 470 Adjustable parameters External torque 0 20 N m 0 Idle revolution 10 20000 1 min 75 Solenoid The solenoid converts electrical energy into mechanical energy An iron core is pulled when a current flows through a coil The iron core is returned to its neutral position by a spring after electrical current to the coil has been switched off The solenoid can be used as a gate or a stopper Adjustable parameters Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 20 Indicator light If current flows the indicator light is displayed in the user defined color Adjustable parameters Resistance 0 01 1E4 Ohm 193 5 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 5 Buzzer If current flows a flashing ring around the buzzer is shown Moreo ver if Buzzer is activated in the menu under Sound the buzzer is activated if a sound hardware is installed Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Resistance 0 01 1E4 Ohm 100 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 5 21 3 3 Measuring Instruments Sensors Voltmeter With a voltmeter the voltage between two positions in a circuit can be measured Adjustable parameters Measure mode Instantaneous value Effective RMS voltage Instantaneous value Time interval 0 001 100 s 0 1 Resistance 1E 3 10 MOhm 1 Ammeter With an ammeter the amperage current strength of the current betw
73. and the indicator light lights up gt gt GRAFCET PLC Exclusive access lt lt GRAFCET PLC ov foo jor joz fos os Emas jo7 Figure 10 17 GRAFCET simulation If a GRAFCET is connected to a GRAFCET PLC component the GRAFCET can only access the inputs and outputs of that related PLC component As the GRAFCET and PLC component may be on sepa rate pages a frame around the GRAFCET during simulation indi cates that it is in this restricted PLC mode As soon as the switch is opened again the following situation arises Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 195 perf ols fiz fis fia fis is 7 GRAFCET PLC ov fonfer ja2 as as asjas a7 Figure 10 18 GRAFCET simulation 10 4 Access to variables of circuit components If the set GRAFCET mode permits it GRAFCET elements can directly access the variables of circuit components with the GrafView mode allowing only read access and the GrafControl mode allow ing both read and write access to the circuit variables Also to permit this access every variable used in GRAFCET needs to be identifiable by a unique name You can see the predefined name for every variable in the component parameters dialog box Clicking the name of a variable opens another dialog box where you can specify a user defined alias This alias is used like a global variable and can be addressed directly in a GRAFCET 196 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art S
74. assignment within a project You can add a new terminal strip to the project using the button Each terminal strip must be assigned to a page Clicking the button first opens the following dialog window where you can define the assignment Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 285 Browse Pages Please select a page to assign the new terminal strip to Figure 16 27 Browse Pages dialog window After you click the button a dialog window opens where you can define the properties of the new terminal strip The dialog window is described under Create terminal strips 16 4 Terminal diagram 286 You can insert an associated terminal diagram for a terminal strip into the circuit diagram You do this by inserting a terminal diagram into a circuit diagram and then assigning a terminal strip to this diagram Select the Terminal diagram menu item from the Insert menu or click the button to insert a terminal diagram into the circuit diagram Alternatively you can click the 8 button Select Terminal diagram f in the selection dialog window that opens Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair Click the position in the circuit diagram where you want to insert the terminal diagram A dialog window then opens where you can assign the relevant terminal strip and customize the appearance Terminal diagram Properties
75. bar min2 l2 0 1 T Pressure sequence valve The valve connects port P and port T if the pressure at port X is greater than the total of the spring force and pressure in port T Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 7 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 381 382 Ay Shutoff counteracting valve If the opening pressure is reached at the control line connection the valve opens from P to T The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 7 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 1 Priority valve Load Sensing dynamic The priority valve assures that priority is given to outlet CF as opposed to outlet EF Adjustable parameters Spring preload 0 40 MPa 0 8 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 24 Hydraulic resistance P CF 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 9 Hydraulic resistance P EF 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 9 Hydraulic resistance CF 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 10 Hydraulic resistance LS EF 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 1450 Pressure relief valve with pilot control In normal position the valve is closed If the opening pressure is reached at P T opens When the pressure drops below the preset level the va
76. bols AND OR NOT falling edge rising edge Via you can select an existing GRAFCET variable from a list Alternatively to the formula you can show a descriptive text To do this you have to select the option Display description instead of formula For a compulsory command you can enter the name of the partial GRAFCET directly or select an existing partial GRAFCET from a list You can also enter the relevant steps directly or select them from a list of existing steps You have to separate the step names with commas You can select the special commands and INIT using the relevant buttons Synchronization You can connect synchronizations like other FluidSIM components However they do not initially have any connections You always have to draw connecting lines to a synchronization The corre sponding connections are then generated automatically Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 519 520 ol ca eG RAFCET PLC jw ou er oe calea oa ae for pete fe fee fete kk EHHE oar od ORAPCET PLG iN our OUT Partial GRAFCET If you want to allocate GRAFCET elements to a specific partial GRAFCET place the partial GRAFCET frame over the relevant GRAFCET part and give it aname The preceding G is not part of the name that you have to enter it is added automatically by FluidSIM and shown at the bottom left of the partial GRAFCET frame You can alter the
77. by FluidSIM The desired attribute is located under Attribute Tree Project1 Supplier Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Browse Attributes El Attribute Tree l Project 1 1 Circuit 1 Figure 12 15 Browse Attributes dialog window Select Supplier and then click the button The Project1 Supplier value is displayed in the input field and Festo in the preview The complete and unique name of the attribute contains all of the hierarchy levels beginning at the pro ject The individual layers in the name are separated by a full stop It is also possible to enter only the attribute name into the input field In this example Supplier The hierarchy is then searched from the bottom up for the attribute beginning with the text com ponents If the attribute searched for is not found in that compo nent then the circuit and then the project are searched for the attribute If the attribute is not found then the attribute name is displayed in the circuit diagram in angle brackets The missing attribute can be created at a later point in time The link is then created automatical ly The concept of linking text components with attributes is also utilized for labeling von drawing frames Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 233 12 9 Text components with specified links Alignment Scale Rotation Font 234 Text
78. by which the real length is multiplied for the displayed value This is necessary if you are creating a drawing with a scale other than 1 1 Defines the color for the dimension Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Line Style Defines the line style for the dimension Line Width Defines the line width for the dimension Dimensions like all other objects in FluidSIM can be moved rotat ed mirrored and scaled The display value of the dimension is automatically adapted during scaling if the Automatic Dimension ing option is activated Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 217 Component attributes Chapter 12 218 The FluidSIM circuit symbols largely correspond to the components in the equipment sets from Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG The parameters of the components are also entered accordingly in FluidSIM Open the Properties dialog window for a component by double clicking a symbol or by opening the menu and select ng Properes Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 12 1 Component attributes in the Properties dialog window Symbol 00991235 Description Part number 163205 Layer Display in Parts Lists Identification Mi Display User Defined Properties Drawing Properties Value Display Part number 163309 A Pegon CO As per 50 15552 with profile cylinder Other barrel for proximity sensing with adjustable
79. can be speci fied for both projects and circuits are described under Circuit and project properties 14 2 1 Project archiving Project files generally consist of links to the files contained therein However where desired FluidSIM can also save the project along with all of the associated files in one single file Among other things this makes it easier to pass on the project Activate the Save Projects as Single File option in the Archiving tab Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 251 Archiving Save Projects as Single File W Save Projects as Single File Please note Files that are stored within the project are deleted from your storage In order to restore the files please uncheck this option Afterwards the files can be found in the project folder Also files that are removed from the project list are restored in the same way Figure 14 1 Project dialog window Archiving tab If this option is activated all of the files belonging to the project are saved in a single file Please note the advice displayed under this option 14 3 Circuit and parts list nodes Open 252 A circuit node is created beneath the project node for every circuit file that belongs to the project This also applies to parts lists since they are saved as circuits These are just displayed differently in the window All of the circuit specific or parts list specific properties are saved with the circuit
80. can dis play the numerical values for all or some quantity values in the circuit even without measuring devices The simulation is based on physical models which were calibrated with the pneumatic hydraulic and electric components in the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG equipment sets The calculated values should therefore closely match the values recorded by your meas urements When comparing the two please bear in mind that in practice measurements can be subject to large fluctuations The reasons for differences range from component tolerances and tube length to air and oil temperatures The calculation of the quantity values also forms the basis for the exact real time proportionalanimation of the cylinders Real time proportional guarantees the following property If in reality a cylinder moves twice as fast as another one for example that will also occur in the animation In other words the real time ratio is retained in the simulation Manually operated valves and switches can be switched by clicking them with the mouse Move the mouse pointer onto the left hand switch The mouse pointer changes into a hand with pointing finger indicating that the switch beneath can be flipped Click the switch When you click a manually operated switch its real behavior is simulated In our example the clicked switch is closed and recalcu lation begins automatically Following the calculation the new pressure and flow
81. can find further information in the Circuit files section Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Create Backup Files Save New Projects as Single File Create Folder For New Pro jects The Create Backup Files option causes the previous versions of saved files are created with the bak file suffix This enables you to restore previous versions Project files generally consist of links to the files contained therein However where desired FluidSIM can also save the project along with all of the associated circuit files in one single file This serves to simplify passing on or archiving the project among other things You can set whether a project saves links or all of the associated files using the Project dialog window Properties of the project This option defines the default setting for new projects A folder with the project name where all project files are stored is automatically generated when a new project is created if this op tion is active 18 3 Folder Locations Folder Locations Page Files CAUsers Festo Documents Fluid SIM Browse Project Files C Users Festo Documents Auid SIM Browse Library Files CAUsers Festo Documents Fluid SIM Browse Drawing Frames CAUsers Festo Documents Fluid SIM Browse Page Files Project Files Library Files Figure 18 3 Options dialog window Folder Locations tab This is the default p
82. capable of exchanging data with other applications allowing it to work together with a PLC for example A prerequisite for this link is that the other application has an OPC interface ora DDE interface The link is established using the same interface components as for the use of FluidSIM with the EasyPort Drag an input or output component from the component library into a circuit window and open the properties dialog box by double clicking or via the menu item Properties The following dialog box will open Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 157 Component Parameters OPC server Festo Didactic EzOPC 2 tem EasyPot1 Analoglni Connector calor Voltage range Connection established lt n OV 10V ud No connection 1 m Figure 9 27 Dialog box for the OPC components In the Connect EasyPort via ist select the OPC connection option OPC server Enter the OPC server here or press the button and select it from the list Item Enter the data item here or press the button and select it from the list 1 In order to establish communication via a DDE interface first en sure that the DDE interface is active You can do this with the global option under DDE Connection Inthe Connect EasyPort via ist select the DDE connection option 158 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Component Parameters Connect E
83. carried along by the air stream Itis necessary to carefully adjust the oil discharge rate Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 16 Pressure regulator with vent hole The purpose of the regulator is to maintain the operating pressure secondary pressure virtually constant regardless of fluctuations in the line pressure primary pressure When air consumption in creases the operating pressure drops and the spring opens the valve If the pressure on the secondary side increases considerably the center piece of the diaphragm then opens and the compressed air can flow to atmosphere through the vent holes in the housing 17 Delivery Due to the pressure losses in the system the compressor should deliver between 650 and 700 kPa 6 5 and 7 bar The operating components of the system should be regulated to between 500 and 600 kPa 5 and 6 bar for economic use The receiver is used to even out fluctuations in pressure due to demand The drainage points are at the lowest points The gradient should be away from the compressor 18 Piston compressor YHA HN The piston compressor is widely used Multi stage compressors are required for compressing to high pressure The drawn in air is compressed by the first piston cooled and then compressed fur ther by the next stage Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 555 Discuss the advantages and disadvantages o
84. components are automatically generated for displayable component attributes and connector labels which are linked to the corresponding attributes Open the Display Attribute dialog window with which you can adjust how the text is displayed by double clicking on the text component or via the menu item on the menu Display Attribute Layer Alignment Horizontal Vertical Left Top Center Center Tare 2 nen Rotation O Deg Tet Attributes E Frame Text Figure 12 16 Display Attribute dialog window Defines the horizontal or the vertical alignment of the text within the text field Defines the scaling factor of the text in the x or y direction Note You can also change the text size by selecting another font size in the font type dialog window You open this dialog window using the Font button under Text Attributes Defines text s angle of rotation in degrees Defines the text font Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Color Frame Text Find Target Defines the text color Draws a frame around the text field The target of a linked text is the attribute which the text refers to This button opens the Properties dialog window of the object which contains this attribute 12 10 Change the properties of multiple objects simultaneously 12 10 1 If multiple objects are selected choosing the menu item on the menu opens a dialog window with a limited selection
85. connectors To switch back to an orthogonal line open the context menu again and select Orthogonal line segments 42 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 5 7 Define the characteristics of lines Lines like other symbols can be assigned an identification cata logue properties and user defined properties You can find further information on this under Component attributes in the Properties dialog window You can also define the style color and drawing layer of the lines by double clicking a line segment or highlighting the line segment and selecting the Properties menu item from the menu The Line Properties dialog window opens Select the Drawing Properties tab in this window The settings are applied to the entire line sec tion as far as the next connector or T distributor Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 43 Line pneumatic Description E Display Part number Identification 721907 E Display Reverse Direction E Display in Parts Lists E Display in Tube Lists o E Line Style Line Width 0i E Straight connection line Figure 5 14 Line Properties dialog window defining the properties of a pneumatic or electric line Layer Sets the drawing layer of the line Color Sets the color of the line Line Style Sets the line style of the line Line Width Sets the line thickness of the line Note Working lines are typically displa
86. control slide valve If the force of the proportional magnet is greater than the pressure exercised at connection P then the pilot stage remains closed A spring keeps the main stage poppet valve closed and the flow rate is null If the force that the pressure exer cises exceeds the closing force of the pilot poppet then this opens A lower flow rate develops from connection P to connection Y The flow of fluid causes a pressure loss at the throttle valve inside the control slide valve Thus the pressure at the spring side is lower than the pressure at connection P Due to the pressure difference the control slide valve opens so far until the spring force re establishes an equilibrium of forces and the valve is perfused from P to T The control voltage must be between 0 V and 10 V The minimum nominal pressure defines the opening pressure at the pilot stage via the spring force at O V The maximum nominal pres sure defines the opening pressure at 10 V The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened main stage leading edge Adjustable parameters Min Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 Max Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 10 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 05 Proportional pressure reducing valve piloted The pilot operated proportional pressure regulator valve consists of a pilot stage with poppet valve and a main stage with control slide valve The pressure at c
87. controller restricts with a switched relay contact the current flow to the preset value for the specified dura tion The starting current limiter is usually deployed in combination with the electric motor OUT Adjustable parameters Duration 1 10000 ms 0 05 Current limit 0 01 100 A 2 484 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 2S1 Controller Comparator The comparator is a discontinuous switching two step action controller with differential gap hysteresis When activated it delivers a predefined voltage signal The switch on value for the activation is defined by nominal value 1 2 hysteresis and the switch off value by nominal value 1 2 hysteresis The comparator requires a power supply of 24 V Adjustable parameters Set value voltage 300 300 V 5 Hysteresis 0 100 V 0 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 13 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 100 PID controller The PID Controller is a continuous controller consisting of three control elements Proportional Integral and Derivative The adjust able parameters refer to the PID Controller in the Technology Package TP111 pneumatic control TP511 hydraulic control from Festo Didactic The output voltage restriction can be set within the range i 10 V to 10 V or ii O V to 10 V In the range i a ma nipulated variable offset from 7 V to 7 V can be specified and in the range ii a manipulated variable offset from 1 5
88. dialog window Page Dividers tab Selecting this option only makes senses for pages that do not represent drawing frames This option must be deactivated if the current page represents a drawing frame that is to be inserted into other pages later If this option is activated then all settings that have been defined in the drawing frame will be adopted When this option is activated the page dividers are automatically derived from the current paths of the electrical circuit You can show or hide automatic current path numbering via the Display Current Path Numbering P menu Permits manual division of the rows and columns Defines the settings for the horizontal rows Defines the settings for the vertical columns Defines the number of page dividers Numbers lowercase letters or uppercase letters can be used for numbering Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 63 First Item Defines the first numbering item The numbering will be continued on analogously from this item Descending Order Changes the numbering order Reset Resets the page dividers to default values 64 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Additional tools for creating drawings Chapter 7 7 1 Drawing tools 7 1 1 Grid 7 1 2 Alignment lines For arranging the symbols and laying the lines it is often practical to show a point or line grid You can activate or deactivate the display of th
89. easily using an inexpensive USB to serial converter allowing the EasyPort to be connected and operat ed anyway The converter s software does this by setting up a virtual COM port which is assigned a number higher than the physically existing ports usually COM 5 The hardware can be addressed in the usual way via this virtual port Defines the color of the connection indicators for the input output component when the EasyPort connection is active and when the connection is not present or is disrupted With the analog interface components you can select the voltage range This can be either from OV to 10V or from 10V to 10V Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 1 If FluidSIM does not find any EasyPort hardware at the start of the simulation a corresponding warning is issued You can start the simulation anyway but if you do so FluidSIM will not make any further attempts to find EasyPorts until the simulation is closed and restarted If on the other hand the connection is terminated while the simulation is running e g by inadvertently pulling out the connecting cable the simulation will continue to run without the EasyPort link but FluidSIM will attempt to restore the connection As soon as the hardware is once again available at the set port the connection is restored and the simulation continues with EasyPort communication 9 12 OPC and DDE communication with other applications FluidSIM is
90. fails you can call our service staff on weekdays during standard office hours and they will provide you with your acti vation code 2 2 1 Important information about online activation During program activation the individual features of your PC s hardware are linked to the product ID and used to generate an activation code which is valid only for that PC If at some later time you intend to modify your PC substantially or want to use a new PC you can transfer the license To do so you first have to deactivate the license on the original PC by uninstalling the program You can find the deinstallation procedure in the Control Panel in Add or Remove Programs or Programs 18 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM If the PC on which you installed FluidSIM is no longer functional or deactivation fails for some other reason as an exception you can transfer the license without prior deactivation 1 Please note that this type of license transfer without prior deacti vation is only possible a few times Moreover when you transfer a license to a modified or new PC activation is no longer possible on the original PC Once the license is transferred you cannot activate FluidSIM on the original PC without a prior deactivation 2 3 Installation with a license connector Depending on whether you purchased a multiple or single user license this special connector is either connected directly to the lo
91. for drawing a conduction line You can start by choosing whether you would like to draw a pneumatic hydrau lic electric digital or GRAFCET conduction line Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Anfang Ende gt gt The graphical elements are drawn in the color shown The graphical elements are drawn in the line style shown The graphical elements are drawn in the line thickness shown The line beginnings are drawn with the symbol shown The line ends are drawn with the symbol shown 7 4 1 Interruption Potential If conduction lines extend over several pages then the line ends can be assigned interruptions Interruptions can be used to define that a conduction line is only interrupted in the drawing and is contin ued somewhere else An interruption can be assigned an identifica tion and linked with another interruption The location of the linked interruption can be displayed at the source interruption If an electric interruption is used with an electric line then this interruption is a potential The use of electric potentials is de scribed under Potentials and conduction lines You can insert an interruption into an existing line or position it freely in a circuit Select the Interruption Potential menu item from the Insert menu A dialog window opens where you can make various Settings for the interruption to be inserted Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG
92. forces a hemisphere against the valve seat preventing the compressed air from flowing from the air connection 1 to the work ing line 2 Initially port 1 is blocked and the output port 2 is ex hausted through the stem of the plunger Actuation of the valve plunger causes the sealing element to be forced away from the seat In doing this the opposing force of the reset spring and that generated from the compressed air must be overcome The air supply is then open to the output side of the valve and a signal is generated Compare the symbol and the valve construction Compare the construction of the disc seat valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 563 42 3 2 way valve ball seat a i E The ball seat valve is compact with the possibility of fitting various H 5 Eag T types of actuating heads The limitation for directly actuated valves is the force required to operate the stem If the flow rate required is very high the valve ball will have a large working area This re quires a large operating force This limits the size of valve for this design The load on the stem is dependent on the size of valve 43 3 2 way valve disc seat normally closed The valve is constructed on the disc seat principle The response time is short and a small movement results in a large area being i available for air flow Valves of the single disc seat type are non overlapping Using this topic discuss the t
93. from a list Alternatively to the formula you can show a descriptive text To do this you have to select the option Display description instead of formula In the Connection ID target in formation field you can enter a step that links to the transition s output without having to draw a connecting line You can select an existing step from a list Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Action There are three types of action assignations allocations and compulsory commands For assignations and allocations you can enter a variable or an output whose value is changed by the action The name of a variable may contain the following characters 0 9 a z A Z and the underscore _ For a conditional action or an Action on event you can enter a condition that has to be fulfilled before the action is executed Entering a condition is sup ported by buttons for special symbols AND OR NOT falling edge rising edge delay Via you can Select an existing GRAFCET variable from a list Alternatively to the formula you can show a descriptive text To do this you have to select the option Display description instead of formula For an allocation action on activation action on deactivation and action on event you can enter any term whose value is to be allocated to the action variable Entering a term is supported by buttons for special sym
94. gain of the PID controller to 3 and start the simulation 170 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Displacement mim Velocity mis Figure 9 39 Position displacement and change in velocity with amplified input signal You can see clearly that the cylinder now moves at a constant velocity for a long distance It then brakes sharply and comes finally to a stop 1 However you can see that the cylinder piston moves clearly beyond its target due to its inertia and the compressibility of the air and moves back and forth several times before finally coming to rest These oscillations around the setpoint position are typical for this kind of simple closed loop control In practice you would try to reduce these oscillations by tweaking the parameters of the PID or loop controller However at this stage we will stop at the simple Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 171 basic principles and refer you to the literature on proportional and closed loop systems for further reading 9 13 4 Closed loop control in hydraulics 172 Your task now is to set up a simple system of closed loop position control To do so modify the circuit as shown in the following figure Remember that you need to remove the blanking plugs on the valve ports before you can drag lines Instead of the function generator it is now the displacement encoder that supplies the input voltage for the
95. in the menu If the page dividers are visible you can customize them using the mouse so that they match the graphical representation of the drawing frame for example This customization can be done in different ways Click and hold the mouse buttons in a column or row to move the entire column or row 1 dp 2 3 Figure 6 3 Click and hold the mouse buttons at the outer margin of a column or row to move the margin of the column or row Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 61 62 Figure 6 4 The opposite margin is not moved and the columns or rows are resized proportionally Click and hold the mouse buttons at the margin of an inner division in a column or row to move the margin of the column or row Figure 6 5 In this case only the adjacent columns or rows are resized Columns and rows can be inserted and removed using the and buttons The label type and the number of rows and columns can be defined using the button The settings are saved as page properties The following dialog window is opened Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Page Dividers Adopt from drawing frame Adopt fram current paths Setup manualy AZ 1 99 A 1 Descending Order Descending Order Reset Adopt from drawing frame Adopt from current paths Setup manually Rows Columns Number Numbering Figure 6 6
96. into Edit Mode Start Starts the simulation animation in the currently active circuit Pause Pauses the simulation in the currently active circuit without exiting Simulation Mode If is clicked when in Edit Mode the currently active circuit switches to Simulation Mode without starting the simulation This allows you to set component states before starting the simulation Reset Resets a circuit to its initial state when a simulation is running or paused The simulation is then restarted immediately Single Step Stops the simulation after a small step In other words the simula tion is started for a short period of time before being switched back into pause mode 11 You can switch into single step mode directly from an actively running simulation Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Simulate until State Change Starts the simulation and runs it until a state change happens the simulation is then paused 11 A state change happens when a cylinder piston moves against a stop a valve switches over ora relay or a Switch is actuated You can switch into state change mode directly from an actively running simulation Next topic Switches to the next topic in a presentation 19 7 Didactics Component description Opens the help page for the selected component It contains the DIN symbol for the component a short description of the compo nent function the terminal designations and
97. ladder The switch closes when the preset switching pressure of the pneu matic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded Pressure switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 493 21 4 7 Relays 494 mi Relay The relay picks up immediately when current is supplied and drops out immediately when current is removed Adjustable parameters Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 550 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Relay with switch on delay ladder The relay picks up after a preset time when current is supplied and drops out immediately when current is removed Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 999s 5 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 550 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Relay with switch off delay ladder The relay picks up immediately when current is supplied and drops out after a preset time when current is removed Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 999s 5 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 550 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 5 Electronic components 21 5 1 Power supply e OM g Constant voltage source A constant voltage source is an ideal voltage source which can maintain a fixed voltage that does not depend on the output cur rent or load resistance Adjustable parameters Voltage 0 400 V 12 Potential A potential is an id
98. menu Click on Presentation Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 541 The following dialog box appears 542 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 00 All topics sorted by number 01 Basics Supply elements Actuators Directional control valves Shutoff valves Flow control valves Pressure control valves Time delay valve Sequential circuit and signal overap circuit Educational films 02 03 O4 05 06 0 08 oS 10 Figure 22 13 Dialog box for selecting and editing presentations Pneumatics Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 543 Serato Sex 01 Applications 02 Components of a hydraulic system 03 Graphic and circuit symbols 04 Fundamental physical principles 05 Components of the power supply section 06 Valves in general OF Pressure valves 08 Directional control valves 09 Non tetum valves 10 Flow control valves 11 Hydraulic cylinders and motors 12 Measuring devices 13 Exercises 14 Educational Films Edit presentation New presentation Figure 22 14 Dialog box for selecting and editing presentations Hydraulics Presentations This field contains a list of already created presentations New presentation Clicking on New presentation f opens a second dialog box for the creation of a new presentation Edit presentation Clicking on Edit presentation opens a second d
99. menu option Component Library f to open the help pages of the component library Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 537 E E Tutorial Component library S O E i S Pneumatic rat Component library Miscellaneous Didactics material Component library Pneumatic Components B Electrical Components B Electrical Components American Standard B Digital Components GRAFCET Elements Miscellaneous Figure 22 9 Component Library Pneumatics 538 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM B Component Library Component Library Component Library als T r a E H Tutorial 2 Component Library H Hydraulic Components H 5 Bectrical Components B Bectrical Components Americar H 5 Digital Components H GRAFCET Elements Miscellaneous H E Didactics Material I S Transparent Model Films m Component Library Hydraulic Components B Electrical Components B Electrical Components American Standard B Digital Components B GRAFCET Elements B Miscellaneous Figure 22 10 Component Library Hydraulics 22 2 3 Didactics Material FluidSIM alongside the tutorial and the component reference contains further didactics material particularly useful for group work Moreover here you will find educational films provided you hav
100. more conduction lines that are to be inserted in the circuit diagram after the dialog window is confirmed Interruption Potential Parts List 5 D gt n aQ Oo O ms N Ww fet o E D rh ec z E _ oO 5 O O R gt fet D 5 Q D ce D a c q o O x oq pa as fan D 5 3 rat rt O om ot gt D 2 a 2 rat oq o 3 Terminal Inserts a terminal into the circuit diagram Multiple Terminals Terminal diagram Cable Cable Map Cable List 5 5 5 5 5 N N N N N D D D D D x x m N N N N N fat fat fat fat 5 a an a Fr fel fel fel g2 o o o 5 a D D D gt jez ER D 7 3 D m w m D ae Oo O a gt om wt o 3 Comm gt D fas e O m Oo ua O a a v gt oO 3 2 a a Oo c a Q mn S D S gt o oq oO pp O a 2 o o 2 va om 3 a ran 3 n c 3 a me 3 2 S v aa a a fet 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 321 19 4 Draw 322 Wiring List Inserts a wiring list into the circuit diagram Tube List Inserts a tube list into the circuit diagram This menu contains functions for freely drawing graphical elements such as lines rectangles circles etc as well as for inserting texts and images Line Draws a line by defining two defined end points Poly Line Draws a polyline by defining the vertices with successi
101. notch results in a progressive flow behavior a rectangular shaped notch ina linear flow behavior The hydraulic resistance relates to a complete ly opened leading edge and the internal leakage relates to one Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 395 leading edge as appropriate The overlap of the leading edges can be specified relative to the maximal slide distance By the use of an integrated electronic position controller for the slide distance beneficial static and dynamic characteristics are achieved that are manifested in a minimal hysteresis less than 0 2 and a re sponse time of less than 12 ms at a signal change of 0 100 Adjustable parameters Control notch shape Rectangular Triangular Rectangular Relative spool overlap 50 50 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 1 4 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 00026 4 3 way proportional valve a By use of a twin channel proportional amplifier the proportional KENY valve transforms an analog electrical input signal into correspond oa ing Opening cross sections at the outputs The setpoint signal must be within the range 10 V to 10 V At 0 V the hydraulic mid position is adopted and the valve stops the flow in relation to the null overlap The cross section area of the flow opening widens by increasing slide distance How far the area and with it the flow at the valve changes depends on the shape and form of the control
102. of the drawing element to the background This means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this In particular this means that symbols are not covered by filled drawing ele ments for example Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Foreground Reset 12 10 2 Main Component Browse Link Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground This means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this In particu lar it means that symbols are covered by filled drawing elements for example Reset the settings to the default values Main Component Main Component Figure 12 18 Properties dialog window Drawing Properties tab several highlighted objects A compatible main component can be selected from a list The main component identification can also be entered directly as text Opens a dialog that shows all compatible main components as a tree in accordance with the object hierarchy If this box is checked then the secondary component is logically linked with the main component If the main component is then renamed the link is retained and the identification of the linked secondary component is adapted as appropriate to the main com ponent identification Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 237 Find Target If the secondary component is logically linked with a main compo nent a search can be performed for the associated
103. other To make it easier to create the draw ing it is enough to place actions next to each other without having to draw connecting lines If the connections for the elements over lap each other they are automatically connected Figure 10 5 Actions Actions can be defined by a textual description or by setting or changing variable values If you want to simulate a GRAFCET with FluidSIM the variable values are taken into account in the simula tion When displaying a GRAFCET graphically you can decide whether the variable name or the descriptive text is shown in an action If you want to display the description you can set the checkmark next to Display description instead of formula in the action s properties dialogue see example Grafcet Grafcet18 ct At GRAFCET you can specify whether the descriptions are displayed instead of the for mulae for all GRAFCET components There are two types of action continuously effective and stored effective actions For a continuously effective action its associated variable is set to the Boolean value logical value TRUE 1 provided that the step connected to the action is active If the step is inactive the value is set to FALSE 0 This way of setting a variable is referred to as assignation in the GRAFCET specifica tions For a stored effective action the set value of the variable remains unchanged until it is changed by another action This way o
104. outputs for measuring the flow rate a consumption switching pulse for output A Out A is possible for measuring the accumulated air consumption The flow rate value is output via the analogue output The flow rate or air consumption is shown on the display Adjustable parameters Output function Make switch Break switch Make switch Switching function Threshold value Window comparator Threshold value Switching point 1 Flow rate 5000 5000 l min 10 Switching point 2 Flow rate 5000 5000 l min 20 Hysteresis Flow rate 0 5000 l min 0 Switching point 1 Volume 0 1000001 100 Switching point 2 Volume 0 100000 200 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 465 Hysteresis Volume 0 10000 0 Min Flow rate 5000 5000 l min 0 Max Flow rate 5000 5000 l min 100 Voltage at q1 100 100 V 0 Voltage at q2 100 100 V 10 Minimum voltage 1 300 V 12 Idle current 24 V 1 10000 mA 32 21 3 Electrical Components 21 3 1 Power Supply 466 OV O 24V Electrical connection OV OV connection of the power supply Adjustable parameters Voltage 0 400V 0 Electrical connection 24V 24V connection of the power supply Adjustable parameters Voltage 0 400 V 24 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Function generator The function generator is a voltage source that can create constant rec
105. over when the preset switching pressure of the pneumatic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded Pressure switches are created by using a general changeover switch and setting a label Pressure switch The switch relays an electrical signal when the preset switching pressure at the pneumatic pressure switch is exceeded Pressure switch The switch relays an electrical signal when the preset switching pressure at the hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 481 21 3 9 Proximity Switches 482 Magnetic proximity switch Switch that closes when a solenoid is brought nearby In the Simu lation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by clicking On it Inductive proximity switch Switch that closes when the induced electro magnetic field is changed In the Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by clicking on it Capacitive proximity switch Switch that closes when its electrostatic field is changed In the Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by clicking on it Optical proximity switch Switch that closes when the light barrier is interrupted In the Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by clicking on it Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 3 10 Relay A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 Relay The relay picks up immediately when current is supplied a
106. passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label 21 4 5 Manually Operated Switches 492 e g Pushbutton break ladder Switch that opens when actuated and closes immediately when released In FluidSIM switches can be actuated permanently locked when continuing to hold down the mouse button and pushing the Shift key This permanent actuation is released by a simple click on the component Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Pushbutton make ladder Switch that closes when actuated and opens immediately when released In FluidSIM switches can be actuated permanently locked when continuing to hold down the mouse button and pushing the Shift key This permanent actuation is released by a simple click on the component Pushbutton changeover ladder Switch that changes over when actuated and changes back imme diately when released In FluidSIM switches can be actuated per manently locked when continuing to hold down the mouse button and pushing the Shift key This permanent actuation is released by a simple click on the component 21 4 6 Pressure Switches eyo e Pressure switch break ladder Switch that opens when the preset switching pressure of the pneumatic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded Pressure switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Pressure switch make
107. pointer by click ing The dialog window for selecting an existing image file then opens Large background images can massively decrease the processing speed as the screen has to be re drawn whenever symbols are moved or edited The image specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Prop erties and Picturetabs of the Properties dialog window for the image Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Drawing Properties Position Scale Left i mm x 7 Top l mm y 1 Rotation 0 E Overide Color Background Foreground Figure 7 14 Properties dialog window for an image Drawing Properties tab Scale Defines the scaling in the x or y direction Rotation Defines the angle of rotation in degrees Override Color Defines the color of the drawing element Background Sets the location of the drawing element to the background This means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this For example symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements Foreground Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground This means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this For ex ample symbols are covered by filled drawing elements File Defines the image file for the image External Link When this option is active FluidSIM only saves a link to the image file However if this option is deactivated then the image is embed ded in the circuit diagram This is the preferabl
108. poppet design 126 Non return valve 2 In the direction of flow shown the valve is opened by the hydraulic fluid which lifts the sealing element from the seat Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 127 Circuit diagram Pump protection In this circuit the non return valve is used to protect the pump This prevents a load pressure from driving the pump in reverse when the electric motor is switched off Pressure peaks do not affect the pump but are discharged via the pressure relief valve 128 Graetz block 1 In the Graetz rectifier circuit Graetz block four non return valves are combined to form a function unit The circuit diagram shows how this operates in conjunction with a flow control valve flow passes through this valve from left to right during both the advance and return strokes of the cylinder The situation during the advance stroke is shown During the advance stroke shown here flow control is carried out on the inlet side 129 Graetz block 2 The cylinder is on its return stroke The rectifier circuit means that flow once again passes through the flow control valve from left to right During the return stroke shown here flow control is carried out on the outlet side 130 Graetz block The animation shows the actuation and spring return of a 4 2 way valve and the flow through the Graetz block during the advance and return strokes Similar rectifie
109. proportional valve solenoid So you can apply the label to the cylinder open its properties dialog box go to the Configure Cylinder tab and set the Sensing option Figure 9 40 Simple closed loop position control Start the simulation and observe how the cylinder retracts and the valve moves further and further into its closed position This makes the cylinder slower and slower until it is fully retracted Strictly speaking this is not really position control because the cylinder would have stopped when it reached its physical stop anyway So now let s change the relationship in the displacement encoder between the piston position and the output voltage For example if we want the cylinder to stop in the middle the valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM must be in its closed position at the exact time when the cylinder reaches that position As the output voltage is proportional to the piston position it is easy to calculate how the voltages at the two limits cylinder retracted cylinder advanced need to be selected in order for the voltage to be O V halfway through the cylinder stroke Component Parameters E Show designation W Show variable W Show Unit Designation Value Range Unit Display Variable Voltage Cylinder retracted 10 10 10 v voo E niin Voltage Cylinder extracted 10 10 10 Lv vo T Pero U Simulated values Designation Value Range Unit Displa
110. roller limit valve 1S2 is deactivated and the pilot signal to the timer 1V5 is cut off removing the signal at port 12 of the 5 2 way valve 109 Exercise The time delay valve Note The memory valve must be positioned manually before air is supplied to the circuit to ensure that the cylinder will be re tracted initially 110 Exercise Memory circuit and speed control of a cylinder Problem A double acting cylinder is to fully advance when a push button is actuated and to retract after full extensions is reached confirmed by a roller lever valve The cylinder is to continue forward even if the push button is released Speed of the cylinder is to be adjusta ble 111 Exercise Memory circuit and speed control of a cylinder Solution Operating the push button 1S1 then advances the cylinder 1A1 Operation of valve 1V3 produces pressure at port 14 which switch es the air to port 4 Once the cylinder travels to the limit valve 182 a pilot signal is sent to port 12 of the control valve switching the control valve if the push button valve is released If the push button is held operated after the cylinder has fully advanced it will remain advanced until valve 1S1 is released The final control element 1V3 is a memory valve and the last position is retained until a unique opposing signal is received The speed of advance and retraction is controlled by the throttle valves 1V1 and 1V2 and in both cases the speed control is by ex
111. shown When you actuate the pushbutton you will see that the potential only reaches as far as the diode Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 113 114 Figure 8 19 Diode installed in reverse direction Remove the diode and install it the other way around In this case rotating or mirroring the diode is not enough because while that would turn the component around it would not change the line connections That means that the lines would run through the component and the drawing would look correct FluidSIM detects drawing errors of this kind highlights the critical sections and issues a warning Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Following drawing emors have been detected Superimposed lines Lines through connectors Figure 8 20 Warning of error in line layout Once the diode is installed correctly the current will flow through the diode and the light will light up Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 115 Figure 8 21 Diode installed in forward direction In practice it is important in electronics to pay attention to the exact currents and voltages Electronic components are very sensitive and can be destroyed quickly if subjected to excessive loads Next the pushbutton will be replaced by a potentiometer Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode Modify the circuit as shown 116 Festo Didactic GmbH a
112. shows all of the solenoid valve s connectors Connectors refer among other things to the logical connection options for the solenoid coils The input fields of the left hand electric connector are described below The descriptions apply analogously to the right hand connector and other types of logical connectors Electric Connector Left The identification for the left hand solenoid coil can be entered in this list box or selected from a list When you click in this field the corresponding connector is highlighted in the preview This helps to locate the connector particularly when dealing with turned or mirrored symbols Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 227 Browse Link Find Target Display 228 Opens a dialog that shows all compatible solenoid coils as a tree in accordance with the object hierarchy If this box is checked then the solenoid coil is logically linked with the connector at the solenoid valve If the solenoid coil is renamed the link is retained and the identifications of the coils at the sole noid valve are changed to match the coil identifications If the connector at the solenoid valve is logically linked with a coila search can be performed for the associated coil using this button If this box is checked the coil s identification is shown as the identi fication for the solenoid valve connector Figure 12 10 Left connector linked with coil K1 The
113. size If you wish to define the drawing size manually then deactivate the Adopt from drawing frame option and select the dimensions and orientation you require for the drawing If the drawing s dimensions are larger than your printer s printing area then you can distribute your drawing across several pages tile To retain a better overview you can create attributes for every circuit drawing Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 23 24 Click the Attributes tab W Inherit From Project Frame File C Festo Aluid Draw P Sirm Frame _As cire Figure 3 3 dialog window Attributes tab creating attrib utes The attribute table allows you to save any desired data in the form of attribute value pairs The associated placeholders attributes with the same name in the drawing frame are replaced by the values entered Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM You can also access this dialog window directly by using the menu and the Properties menu item 3 2 Organize symbols libraries and circuit diagrams In order to support the organization of the different document types in FluidSIM all of the circuit files are assigned to one of three groups Symbols Symbols are formal abstract models providi
114. size of the partial GRAFCET frame by drag ging its edges with the mouse For the partial GRAFCET to function correctly it is important that all its elements are completely within the frame and that the frame does not overlap with any foreign elements or other frames GRAFCET PLC Component The GRAFCET PLC component is similar to a SPS controller whose behavior is described by a GRAFCET For more information please read the section GRAFCET PLC Component GRAFCET PLC Component The GRAFCET PLC component is similar to a SPS controller whose behavior is described by a GRAFCET For more information please read the section GRAFCET PLC Component GRAFCET 1 0O The GRAFCET I O component is used to link the GRAFCET variables with the electrical part of a circuit You can enter eight GRAFCET input variables and eight GRAFCET output variables into the GRAFCET I O component The actions variables serve as outputs The inputs can be the allocations and conditions of actions and transitions If a potential is created as the input of the GRAFCET I O component the corresponding variable is set to 1 If an output Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM variable has a value other than 0 a potential of 24V is created at the corresponding output of the GRAFCET I O component 21 8 Miscellaneous 21 8 1 Miscellaneous Connection mechanical A mechanical connection constitutes a place holder for the lab
115. sounded when a moni toring condition fails The following example is designed to illustrate the use of GRAFCET monitoring Grafcet Grafcet21 Hyd circor Grafcet Grafcet2 1 Pneu circ Monitoring condition 1 3 v m s gt 0 001 Tolerance time 15 SO 25 1 li eee gt E uae a gt MB Cylinder is extracting Cylinderextracted 1 3 x gt 1 3 _max a i Figure 10 23 Circuit diagram with GRAFCET monitoring The single action in the GRAFCET activates the solenoid valve directly This should cause the cylinder piston to advance A moni toring condition in the action will be used to check if the cylinder actually did advance A small positive velocity indicates the advanc ing of the piston To formulate the monitoring condition open the properties dialog box for the action by double clicking Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM MB Cylinder is extracting Type Simple action Monitoring condition 1 3 v m s gt 0 001 Tolerance time Action Variable output MB Description MB Cylinder is extracting Display description instead of formula Figure 10 24 Specifying the monitoring condition Monitoring condition The monitoring condition is entered in this field Circuit variables can be assigned to a unit of measurement by writing the desired unit in square brackets after the variable This is 1 3 v m s in the example shown Toler
116. such a way that they remain connected If you move a line segment with is directly connected to a compo nent connector then FluidSIM may insert additional line segments in order to prevent gaps Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM If you move a line segment that is horizontally or vertically con nected with other line segments via T distributors then these line segments are moved together with the T distributors Figure 5 11 Moving multiple line segments If you only want to move the individual line segment in the case described above then release the mouse button after you highlight the line segment Click the segment again and move it while keep ing the mouse button pressed Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 41 a a P p p 18 La EJ Figure 5 12 Moving an individual line segment 5 6 Direct connection via straight connection line Normally connection lines in technical circuits are always drawn orthogonally However it can sometimes be desirable to create a direct connection between two connectors via a diagonal line To achieve this first connect the two connectors in the standard way Then select any segment on the line and right click to open the context menu Select Straight connection line to create a direct connection G e gt _ i 151 TE Ame AN _ Figure 5 13 Direct connections between two
117. surface roughness Adjustable parameters Physical model Ideal connection Simple resistance Pipe model Hagen Poiseuille Blasius Ideal connection Length 0 01 1000 m 1 Inner diameter 0 1 1000 mm 6 3 Surface roughness 0 100 mm 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 08 T junction hydraulic A T junction joins up to four hydraulic lines thus having a single pressure potential Note that T junctions are introduced automati cally by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another line in Edit Mode Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 357 21 1 2 Configurable Way Valves 358 Configurable 2 n way valve The configurable 2 n way valve is a way valve with two connec tions where both its body elements and its operation modes are user definable Additionally the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind plug Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 R
118. switches are not actuated until a defined time or number of pulses is reached With these relays too double clicking will open the corresponding dialog boxes for entering the values Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 151 9 8 3 Coupling mechanical switches The mechanical linkage of mechanical manually operated switch es is accomplished in FluidSIM by assigning a label If multiple mechanical switches have the same label actuating one of them will cause all the identically labeled switches to be actuated with it 9 8 4 Automatic switch altering FluidSIM identifies delay switches limit switches and pressure switches by their method of installation and by their labels and automatically adds the corresponding symbol to the switch in the electrical circuit _ for switch on delayed for off delayed for mechanical actuated switches and for pressure switches In the case of switches actuated by the cylinder piston you can choose how they are displayed in the properties dialog box for the closer opener and changeover 152 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Contact Description Make switch Contact number Triggered by Limit switch e Switch with roll E Reed contact E Display Predefined variable User defined alias ox ces J Ano J He Figure 9 23 Dialog box for general electrical switches This means that special sy
119. the dialog box The valve should now look like this 3 Figure 8 2 Manually operated 3 2 way valve Now try to simulate this circuit Start the simulation with p gt or with or with F9 Move the mouse pointer onto the valve and click the valve with the pointing finger Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 97 Figure 8 3 Simulated circuit Once the cylinder has advanced the pressure in the cylinder supply line must inevitably increase This situation is detected by FluidSIM and the parameters are recalculated the pressure at the com pressed air supply increases to the set operating pressure Click the valve to make the cylinder retract In complex circuits or for the transmission of high switching forces valves may also be activated indirectly In the following we will replace the direct manual activation of the valve with indirect pneumatic activation Activate Edit Mode with m or with or with F5f 98 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Select and delete the line that connects the cylinder and the valve Drag another 3 n way valve onto the drawing area and open the valve configuration dialog box by double clicking or by Properties f Construct a pneumatic valve normally closed close the dialog box put a silencer on port 3 again and arrange the components as follows Figure 8 4 Circuit
120. the current flow or the total quantity flowed can be displayed The component image is automatically adjusted accordingly Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 001 Flow meter The flow meter consists of a hydraulic motor connected to an RPM gauge z Adjustable parameters Displacement 0 1 5000 cm3 8 2 Friction 0 001 100 N m s rad 0 0108 Moment of inertia 0 0001 10 kg m2 0 0001 Leakage 0 10 l min bar 0 0126 Flow Direction Ignore Consider Ignore Flow rate min 500 500 l min 0 Flow rate max 500 500 l min 10 Voltage q1 100 100 V 0 Voltage q2 100 100 V 10 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 407 Flow meter analog This symbol represents the hydraulic part of the analog flow meter The analog flow meter measures the volumetric flow and trans forms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal In the process only flow rates in the specified pressure ranges are considered Within this range the flow rate in the voltage range from 0 V to 10 V is represented i e the minimum volumetric flow delivers O V and the maximum volumetric flow 10 V Adjustable parameters Flow Direction Ignore Consider Ignore Flow rate min 500 500 l min 0 Flow rate max 500 500 l min 10 Voltage q1 100 100 V 0 Voltage q2 100 100 V 10 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 10
121. the initial piston position and observe how the cylinder reaches its setpoint position every time without fail To study the closed loop control procedure more closely let s examine the cylinder s displacement and velocity up to its setpoint position You can do this by adding a state diagram adjusting it to a Suitable size and dragging the cylinder onto the diagram A dialog box will open where you should select the two quantity values Position and Velocity 1 Pneumatics are fast So you can more clearly observe the effects described below set the stroke of the cylinder to 5000 mm Set the y offset of the function generator to 5 and the start position of the cylinder to O and start the simulation The cylinder advances to the middle losing velocity continuously until it comes to a stop Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 169 Displacement mim Velocity miz Figure 9 38 Position displacement and change in velocity during closed loop control It is often desirable for the cylinder to move at maximum velocity until it reaches its setpoint position and then to stop as suddenly as possible You can do this by amplifying the position signal of the displacement encoder which will accelerate the switchover of the regulating valve This makes use of the fact that the PID controller limits the output voltage for the proportional valve solenoid to 10 Set the Proportional
122. the search hits is displayed on the right hand side The sym bol of the highlighted entry is shown in the preview Once you have found the symbol that you were looking for you can select it using the button or by double clicking on the appropriate row in the results list The symbol then hangs on the mouse pointer and is placed by left clicking on the drawing area Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 27 With the Fuzzy Search option you can activate a tolerance in order to achieve results despite minor typing errors or spelling variants 3 4 Symbol libraries Expand All Collapse All The standard library Symbol folders User libraries 28 FluidSIM is capable of managing multiple libraries each of which is displayed in a tab in the library window Libraries which cannot be modified in FluidSIM are labeled with a lock symbol in the tab This applies to standard library as well as to symbol folders which FluidSIM does not manage itself or for which the registered user does on possess write authorization Every library is displayed hierarchically Every hierarchy level can by shown or hidden by clicking on the group name Right clicking in a library opens a context menu offering the following menu items for editing the library Defines the size of the symbols displayed Small and are available Opens all of the hierarchy levels Closes all of the hierarchy levels There are three
123. the selected symbols from the library Edits the text which libraries display below the symbol Opens a dialog window for selecting symbol files to be copied into the library as new symbols Copies the selected symbols into another library The available libraries are listed in a submenu Only the currently open libraries are displayed here appearing as tabs in the library window which are not write protects recognizable as no lock symbol is dis played Creates a new hierarchy level below the active group The active group is the one belonging to the area below the mouse point and can be recognized by the dark blue coloring Removes the hierarchy level which the mouse pointer is located in Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 29 Rename Sub Folder Enables you to rename the hierarchy level which the mouse pointer is located in 3 5 Circuit files FluidSIM circuit files have the circ file suffix and are saved as compressed XML files An option in the Save tab under the menu item from the menu allows you to deactivate this compression so that the circuit files can be viewed as plain text This can be useful for version management software for example 1 However please note that editing a circ file outside FluidSIM can cause the file to become unreadable or corrupted upon re import 30 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Library and project window Chapter
124. the symbol with the valve construction Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 567 568 52 5 2 way valve longitudinal slide valve The valve can be mounted onto a common sub base for supply and exhaust air This compact arrangement also ensures adequate flow is available to the valve Discuss the DIN ISO 5599 1 standard for 5 port valves 53 5 2 way valve longitudinal slide valve The 5 2 way valve has five ports and two positions The 5 2 way valve is used for the control of cylinders primarily as a final control element In pneumatic valves the gap between spool and housing bore should not exceed 0 002 0 004 mm The valve is shown here with pilot pressure applied at port 12 To avoid damage to Seals the ports can be distributed around the circumference of the hous ing The actuation travel is considerably larger than with seat valves The valve is shown here with pilot pressure at 14 Discuss the load conditions on the O rings Compare the con struction with the disc seat valve 54 5 2 way valve suspended disc seat A method of sealing the 5 2 way valve is to use a suspended disc seat with a relatively small switching movement The disc seat seal connects the 1 port to either the 2 port or the 4 port The 5 2 way double air pilot valve has the characteristic of memory control The last switched position is retained until a new switching position is initiated by a unique pilot s
125. those parts of the didactics material in FluidSIM that are not covered by chapter The Component Library The Component Library Basically this mate rial consists of the components behavior illustrations the anima tions the exercises and the educational films which all can be activated under the menu The subsequent sections are arranged thematically The gt icon indicates that an animation exists for the related topic The last section gives an overview of the educational films 1 Pneumatic system structure and signal flow A pneumatic system can be broken down into a number of levels representing the hardware and signal flow from the energy source to the actuating devices The topic highlights the relationship between signals levels and elements in a pneumatic system 2 Circuit diagram and pneumatic elements Circuit diagrams are drawn in such a way that signals for instance energy or potential values are oriented downwards The number ing of the components is derived from their respective function in the diagram The topic highlights the various levels in a circuit Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 3 Designating the elements circuit diagram This topic shows the relationship between levels in a circuit 4 Designating the elements circuit diagram The figures contrasts the position of a roller lever valve initial position actuated by the
126. to delete a selected signal line If only a supporting point is selected then only this is removed from the line In Edit Mode the supporting points belonging to the signal lines can be moved If the Shift is held down while setting or moving Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 345 Display description Start with arrow End with arrow Color 346 supporting points then the supporting point is vertically or horizon tally aligned In the selection mode double clicking can change the way the line is displayed Signal line Display description Start with arrow End with arrow Cor a Line Style 9 __ Cancel Help Figure 20 9 A framed label on the line and a label next to the framed label is shown The framed label can be moved freely along the line The additional label can be moved freely An arrow is displayed at the beginning of the line The arrow can be moved freely along the line An arrow is displayed at the end of the line The arrow can be moved freely along the line Line color If you click a finished signal line to activate the Freely move signal lines mode z then a signal logic is inserted This logic point snap point can then be freely moved along the line 1 3 4 In the selection mode you can change how the signal logic is dis played by double clicking on it Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Sy
127. to port 2 This signal operates the control valve pilot signal 14 against the spring return and the cylinder advances If either of the two signals created by the 3 2 way valves is set to zero the two pressure valve will release the 14 signal back through the exhaust port of one of the 3 2 way valves The return 5 5 et tly i Lar Ea r T 1 pi eat F a n h hs Gi mj I i SENE 576 spring in the control valve then switches the control valve to the initial position The control valve outlet port 2 is active and with outlet port 4 exhausted to atmosphere the cylinder retracts The control valve can be a 4 2 or 5 2 way valve and can be sized to suit the flow rate required for the cylinder speed 77 Exercise The logic AND function the two pressure valve Note Discuss also the advantages of the shown solution against series connection 78 Shuttle valve This non return element has two inputs 1 and one output 2 If compressed air is applied to one input the valve seat seals off the opposing input and the air flows to the output 2 Note the similarity in construction to the two pressure valve Compare the two pressure valve construction topic 71 79 Circuit Shuttle valve If the condition states that either of two push buttons are to ad vance a cylinder the inexperienced designer may attempt to use a junction for the output signals of 1S1 and 1S2 The circuit is not functional due to the esc
128. types of library This library is delivered with FluidSIM and cannot be modified Circuit and symbol files saved on the disk can be used as libraries in FluidSIM The files from the selected folder are added as a library via the menu and the Add Existing Symbol Folder menu item The library hierarchy corresponds exactly to the folder hierarchy These libraries cannot be modified in FluidSIM The files must be modified directly You can create and subsequently edit new libraries via the menu and the Add New Library menu item See section Create Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM user library Using drag and drop you can move the symbols and groups within the library as desired 3 4 1 Create user library Copy Paste Delete Rename Add Existing Symbols Copy to Other Library New Sub Folder Remove Sub Folder In order to be able to access frequently used symbols or circuits more quickly multiple symbols can be compiled into libraries Libraries are saved as files with the 1ib file suffix You can create new libraries using the Library and the Add New Library menu item Right clicking in the new library opens a context menu with which you can modify the library The following options are available Copies the selected symbols to the clipboard Inserts the symbols into the library from the clipboard These symbols can also be partial circuits Removes
129. unex pectedly or files and windows have suddenly disappeared Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 19 12 Window New Window Opens a window with an additional view of the active window Navigation Pane O xe g gt 3 Nn se 3 O lt g gt ig Z mm O O y fas Nn a ig Q Q O 3 ig O a gt ca g gt 5 ca circuit diagram The currently visible area of the active window appears as a white area The non visible area of the drawing is shaded grey By drawing a rectangle in the overview window with the mouse pointer you can define the section of the circuit diagram displayed in the active window Simply left clicking on the overview window moves the visible area while retaining the zoom level Cascade Arranges the windows so that they overlap Tile Horizontally Arranges the windows into horizontal tiles Tile Vertically Arranges the windows next to each other Close All Closes all open windows Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 333 19 13 Help 334 Contents Displays the contents of the FluidSIM help pages ndex Displays the index of the FluidSIM help pages Search Displays the search dialog for the FluidSIM help pages Register as user Opens a dialog box via which you can register if you would like assistance and information about FluidSIM
130. utilize a special symbol in order to insert a T distributor FluidSIM automatically inserts a T distributor when you lay a component connection on a line or lay a line segment to a connection If you wish to connect two lines then you can also draw one line segment to another FluidSIM then inserts two T distribu tors and connects these with a new line Move the mouse points to a connector and press the left mouse button Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 37 38 As soon as you touch the line the mouse pointer transforms into a crosshair Release the mouse button once you have touched the desired point on the line FluidSIM inserts a T distributor and automatically lays a line fe 1 nonamel k e Figure 5 7 Line connection with inserted T distributor Every T distributor can connect up to 4 lines with each other The default representation for the T distributor can be selected via the corresponding drop down list t stick on the toolbar You can customize the representation of the T distributor by dou ble clicking the T distributor or highlighting the T distributor and selecting the menu item from the menu The Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Properties dialog window opens Select the Representation tab Symbol Description Part number Layer 1 Display in Parts Lists 753378 User Defined Properties Representat
131. valve The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 5 Area 0 1 100 cm2 6 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 05 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 01 21 1 7 Pressure Switches Analog pressure sensor The pressure switch takes the pressure and actuates the associat ed electrical pressure switch if the preset switching pressure is exceeded Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 0 1 40 MPa 3 Hysteresis 0 10 MPa 0 21 1 8 Flow Control Valves Nozzle The nozzle represents a hydraulic resistance Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 19 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 391 392 KK YK Throttle valve The setting of the throttle valve is set by means of a rotary knob Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute resistance value can be set This means that in reality different throttle valves can generate different resistance values despite identical settings Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 19 Orifice The orifice represents a hydraulic resistance Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 19 Orifice adjustable The orifice represents a variabl
132. valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way hand lever valve with shutoff position ii In normal position all connections are closed When manually actuated the valve is set to crossover or parallel position This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 10
133. way valve three pistons 2 The 4 2 way valve is actuated and there is flow from P to A and from B to T 108 4 2 way valve three pistons 3 The circuit shows the 4 2 way valve in functional representation as a final control element of a double acting cylinder The non return valve protects the pump in cases where the piston rod of the cylinder is subject to an external load 109 Circuit diagram 4 2 way valve The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the 4 2 way valve as a circuit symbol 110 4 3 way valve with pump bypass 1 From the logic point of view 4 3 way valves are 4 2 way valves with an additional mid position There are various versions of this mid position in the mid position in the example shown the supply Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM cra y M a y A WA va il ke Mi port P is directly connected to the tank T see next illustration In the switching position shown there is flow from P to B and from A toT 4 3 way valves are easy to construct as slide valves and of complex design as poppet valves 111 4 3 way valve with pump bypass 2 The 4 3 way valve is in its mid position there is flow from P to T while A and B are closed Since the output from the pump flows to the tank this switching position is called pump bypass or also pump recirculation Inthe case of pump bypass the pump needs
134. which are shown 5 Hydraulic power section The diagram of the hydraulic power section is complemented in this case by a circuit diagram to allow correlation of the various function groups the power supply section contains the hydraulic pump and drive motor and the components for the preparation of the hydrau lic fluid The energy control section consists of the various valves used to provide control and regulate the flow rate pressure and Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 593 direction of the hydraulic fluid This drive section consists of cylin ders or hydraulic motors depending on the application in question 6 Block diagram of a control system In analyzing and planning an actual control task it can be helpful to use a differentiated block diagram showing the actual levels to be found on the machine The light arrows show the signal flow while the solid dark arrows show the energy flow 7 Interaction of components The animations show the sequences in a basic hydraulic circuit in simplified form the actuation and spring return of the final control element 4 2 way valve the advance and return of the drive com ponent double acting cylinder and the opening and closing of the pressure relief valve The representations of the actuator and final control element are based on the relevant circuit symbols This can be used as a preparation for the introduction of cir
135. 0 2 MPa 0 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 108 Check valve with pilot control If the entering pressure at connection 1 is higher that the outgoing pressure at 2 the check valve allows the flow to pass freely Other wise the valve stops the flow Additionally the check valve can be 1 94 opened via the control line 12 This action allows the flow to pass freely in both directions Adjustable parameters Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 108 J Check valve with pilot control spring loaded If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2 and the nominal pressure then the check valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the flow Additionally the check valve can be 1 4 released using the pilot line 12 thus enabling the flow in both directions Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 2 MPa 0 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 437 438 ba 10 10 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 108 Pilot to close check valve If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2 then the non return valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the flow Additionally the non return valve can be closed using the pilot line 10 Ad
136. 0 40 MPa 0 Max Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 1 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 05 6 3 way proportional hand lever valve The valve is used to control volumetric flow Flow rate and direction of flow are controlled The mid position is spring centered The piston is pushed out of its mid position and against the spring with the hand lever Adjustable parameters Displacement 100 100 0 Hydraulic resistance P1 gt T1 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 045 Hydraulic resistance P2 gt A B 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 051 Hydraulic resistance T2 gt A B 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 0362 Leakage 0 101 min bar SE 06 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 399 21 1 10 LOONT ue 400 Mobile valve block Load sensing The valve block has two slices each with a proportional directional control valve for controlling speed and direction The directional control valve in each slice has an upstream pressure compensator As a result the slice functions like a proportional current regulator Adjustable parameters Displacement Left group 100 100 0 Displacement Right group 100 100 0 Actuators ji Configurable cylinder The configurable cylinder can be customized via its properties dialog Almost any combination of piston type single acting dou ble acting the specification of
137. 0 MPa 1 Damping length 0 100 mm 10 Double acting cylinder Double acting cylinder with piston rod on one side The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be used to operate a proximity switch Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 16 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 10 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Break away force O 10000 N 65 Coulomb friction force O 10000 N 55 Viscous friction 0 1 10000 N s m 215 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 10 l min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 40 MPa 0 4 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 40 MPa 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 401 402 Damping length 0 100 mm 10 Double acting cylinder with shock adsorber at stroke end The piston of the cylinder is controlled by the connected pressure loads The shock adsorber can be adjusted by means of two ad justment screws The piston contains a permanent solenoid which can be used to operate a proximity switch Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 16 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 10 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5
138. 0 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way hand lever valve with floating position i oa BIE _ In normal position the connections A and B are open to T When manually actuated the valve is set to parallel or crossover position P T This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems Gmb
139. 0 and 10 volts This varying voltage is converted by a proportional amplifier in the valve into a corresponding current that actuates the proportional Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 161 162 valve solenoid so that the valve connected to it is shifted to either side to the maximum extent according to the signal voltage applied To switch over the valve to a lesser extent the valve requires a lesser maximum voltage You can set that by opening the proper ties dialog box for the function generator by double clicking Component Parameters E Show designation Show varable Show Unit Designation Value Range il Display Variable Signal type Sine Frequency 1 0 01 1E 05 Amplitude D 400 LS a 5 y offset U offset Min Voltage 30 P U_cut_min Max Voltage 30 D U cut_max Simulated values Designation Value Voltage Figure 9 31 Properties dialog box for the function generator Enter 2 as the Amplitude close the dialog box and restart the simulation The voltage will now vary between 3 and 7 volts As a result the valve will still shift symmetrically but with less displacement from the mid position Open the function generator properties again and set 3 as the y offset The function generator now supplies a voltage between 1 and 5 volts with the valve moving further to the left than to the right Open the function generator properties again and set
140. 0 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 40 MPa 0 4 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 40 MPa 1 Damping length 0 100 mm 10 Single acting cylinder By connecting a sufficiently high pressure load the piston of the cylinder is extended to its stop To move the piston back an exter nal force must be applied Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 16 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 10 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Break away force 0 10000 N 65 Coulomb friction force 0 10000 N 55 Viscous friction 0 1 10000 N s m 215 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 40 MPa 0 4 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 40 MPa 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 403 404 Damping length 0 100 mm 10 Loading unit cylinder load simulator Two cylinders are positioned opposite each other Various cylinder types and loads can be combined using the four piston surfaces Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 16 Piston rod diameter 1 1000 mm 10 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 10000 mm
141. 00 bar min2 l2 0 001 21 2 Pneumatic Components 21 2 1 Supply Elements 408 Compressed air supply The compressed air supply provides the needed compressed air It contains a pressure control valve that can be adjusted to output the desired operating pressure Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Operating pressure 0 2 MPa 0 6 Max flow rate 0 5000 l min 1000 Volume 0 001 1000 l 0 1 Compressor The compressor provides the necessary compressed air The pres sure is restricted to the preset operating pressure Adjustable parameters Operating pressure 0 2 MPa 0 6 Max flow rate 0 5000 l min 1000 Volume 0 001 10001 0 1 Compressor adjustable The adjustable compressor provides the necessary compressed air whereby the maximum flow rate can be adjusted under actual operating conditions and in the simulation The pressure is restrict ed to the preset operating pressure Adjustable parameters Operating pressure 0 2 MPa 0 6 Max flow rate 0 5000 l min 1000 Volume 0 001 10001 0 1 Air service unit simplified representation The service unit is made up of a compressed air filter with water separator and a pressure control valve Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 409 Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Standard nominal flow rate Pressure regulator 0 1
142. 000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Break away force 0 10000 N 65 Coulomb friction force 0 10000 N 55 Viscous friction 0 1 10000 N s m 215 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 40 MPa 0 4 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 40 MPa 1 Damping length 0 100 mm 10 Double acting cylinder with in and out piston rod and shock adsorber at stroke end The piston of the cylinder is controlled by the connected pressure loads The shock adsorber can be adjusted by means of two ad justment screws The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be used to operate a proximity switch Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 16 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 10 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Break away force 0 10000N 65 Coulomb friction force 0 10000 N 55 Viscous friction 0 1 10000 N s m 215 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 100
143. 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way solenoid valve with floating position i In normal position the connections A and B are open to T When actuated by the control solenoids the valve is set to parallel or crossover position If no current is flowing through the control solenoids the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the com ponent library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2
144. 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 2 2 way stem Actuated valve ii If the cylinder piston actuate the stem the flow from P to Ais shut off This valve is derived from a configurable 2 n way valve You P find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 363 364 3 2 way hand lever valve In normal position the connection P is closed and Ato T opened When manually actuated T is shut off and P to A opened This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable
145. 0N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 369 21 1 4 Solenoid actuated Directional Valves 4 2 way solenoid valve i In normal position the connection P is open to B and Ato T When actuated by the control solenoid the valve is set to parallel posi tion If no current is flowing through the control solenoid the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Fre quently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 370 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 4 2
146. 0N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Configurable 8 n way valve The configurable 8 n way valve is a way valve with two connec tions where both its body elements operation modes are user definable Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Additionally the pneumatic connections can be closed with either blind plugs or exhausts Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 21 2 3 Mechanically Operated Directional Valves 3 2 way roller lever valve norm
147. 10 V Adjustable parameters Flow Direction Ignore Consider Ignore Flow rate min 500 500 l min 0 Flow rate max 500 500 l min 1000 Voltage q1 100 100 V 0 Voltage q2 100 100 V 10 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 463 464 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 2000 Pressure sensor with switching outputs and display The pressure sensor is a piezo resistive relative pressure transduc er with integrated amplifier and built in temperature compensation The pressure to be measured is transferred to a piezo resistive element via a silicone layer The signal change generated in the element is output as a switching signal at the connector plug via an integrated amplifier The pressure sensor has two compressed air connections each of which is assigned an independent sensor element The measured input values In A In B are output via two configurable switching outputs Out A Out B The measured pressure is shown numerical ly and graphically on the display Adjustable parameters Output function Make switch Break switch Make switch Switching function Threshold value Window comparator Threshold value Switching pressure 1 0 1 2 MPa 0 3 Switching pressure 2 0 1 2 MPa 1 Hysteresis 0 2 MPa 0 Minimum voltage 1 300V 13 Idle current 24 V 1 10000 mA 32 Pressure sensor with display The pressure sensor is a piezo
148. 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way hand lever valve with bypass position ii In normal position the connections A and B are closed and P to T opened When manually actuated the valve is set to crossover or PILT parallel position This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 10
149. 17 Rotate symbols The symbols can be rotated in 90 degree steps or with the help of the mouse pointer To rotate objects in 90 degree steps select the desired angle from the menu item on the menu or click the appropriate button on the toolbar If you select multiple objects at the same time then every object will be rotated separate ly If you wish the operation to use a common axis of rotation then group the objects before the operation You can also rotate symbols with the help of the mouse pointer by clicking and dragging the edge of the symbol In order to do this FluidSIM must be in Enable Rotate mode This mode can be activated or deactivated using the Enable Rotate menu item from the menu or by clicking the corresponding button on the toolbar Note Activating the Enable Scale mode deactivates the mode and vice versa In Enable Rotate mode click the edge of the symbol and hold down the mouse button 360 00 Figure 5 18 Rotate symbol The current angle of rotation and guides are displayed Hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer until the desired angle of rotation is achieved The angle changes in 15 degree steps Note If you also press the Shift key then you can rotate the symbol steplessly Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 53 5 18 Scale symbols 54 200 00 Figure 5 19 Rotate symbol The angle of rotation c
150. 2 9 14 Use of the oscilloscope in electronics 178 10 GRAFCET 181 10 1 The various GRAFCET modes 181 10 1 1 Drawing only GrafEdit 182 10 1 2 Observation GrafView 182 10 1 3 Control GrafControl 182 10 2 Setting the GRAFCET mode 183 10 3 GRAFCET elements 183 10 3 1 Steps 184 10 3 2 Actions 186 10 3 3 Transitions 188 10 3 4 Stored effective actions allocations 191 10 3 5 GRAFCET PLC component 192 10 4 Access to variables of circuit components 196 10 5 Monitoring with GRAFCET actions 199 10 6 Quick reference for the FluidSIM relevant GRAFCET concepts 205 10 6 1 Initialization 205 10 6 2 Sequence rules 206 10 6 3 Sequence selection 206 10 6 4 Synchronization 206 10 6 5 Transient sequence unstable step virtual triggering 207 6 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 10 6 6 10 6 7 10 6 8 10 6 9 Determining the values of GRAFCET variables Checking the entries Admissible characters for steps and variables Variable names 10 6 10 Functions and formula entry 10 6 11 Delays time limits 10 6 12 Boolean value of an assertion 10 6 13 Target information 10 6 14 Partial GRAFCETs 10 6 15 Macro steps 10 6 16 Compulsory commands 10 6 17 Enclosing step 10 6 18 Action when a transition is triggered 11 11 1 11 2 12 12 1 12 2 123 12 4 12 5 12 6 LZ 12 8 12 9 12 10 Dimension Draw dimension Settings for the dimension Component attributes Component attributes in the Prope
151. 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 6 Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 12 Break away force 0 10000N 65 Coulomb friction force 0 10000 N 55 Viscous friction 0 1 10000 N s m 215 Loading unit cylinder load simulator Two cylinders are positioned opposite each other Various cylinder types and loads can be combined using the four piston surfaces Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 16 Piston rod diameter 1 1000 mm 10 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 10000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 6 Break away force O 10000 N 65 Coulomb friction force O 10000 N 55 Viscous friction 0 1 10000 N s m 215 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM A Hydraulic motor The hydraulic motor transforms hydraulic energy into mechanical energy Adjustable parameters External torque 1000 1000 N m 0 Displacement 0 001 5 l 0 008 Friction 0 001 100 N m s rad 0 0108 Moment of inertia 0 0001 10 kg m2 0 0001 Leakage 0 10 l min bar 0 0126 Semi rotary actuator The semi rotary actuator is controlled by alternately switching the pressure In the end positions the swivel cylinder can activate switches or valves via labels Adjustable parameters Initial Position 0 360 deg 0 Rotation angle max 1 360 deg 180 Displacement 0
152. 442 Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 2 way pressure regulator valve adjustable The pressure regulator valve regulates the compressed air supply to the preset nominal pressure and equalizes pressure fluctuations The valve closes when the pressure at connection 2 exceeds the nominal pressure Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 Pressure regulator valve with manometer The pressure control valve regulates the supplied pressure based on the adjustable operating pressure and the variations in the pressure The manometer displays the pressure at connection 2 Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 3 way pressure regulator valve The pressure regulator valve regulates the compressed air supply to the preset nominal pressure and equalizes pressure fluctuations The compressed air is discharged via connection 3 when the pres sure at connection 2 exceeds the nominal pressure The setting for Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM the real components is component dependent and cannot be changed Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4
153. 45 59 Set the properties of the connectors 45 5 10 Configure a way valve 47 5 11 Configure cylinders 49 5 12 Group symbols 51 5 13 Create macro objects 51 5 14 Delete symbol groups and macro objects 52 5 15 Align symbols 52 5 16 Mirror symbols 32 5 17 Rotate symbols 53 5 18 Scale symbols 54 6 Drawing frame 56 6 1 Editable labels 56 6 2 Use a drawing frame 57 6 3 Page dividers 61 7 Additional tools for creating drawings 65 7 1 Drawing tools 65 7 1 1 Grid 65 7 1 2 Alignment lines 65 7 1 3 Object snap 66 7 1 4 Rulers 67 T2 Drawing levels 67 73 Cross references 69 7 3 1 Create cross references from symbols 71 7 3 2 Cross reference representation 71 7 3 3 Manage cross references 72 7 4 Drawing functions and graphical elements 74 7 4 1 Interruption Potential 75 7 4 2 Conduction line 78 7 4 3 Line 80 7 4 4 Polyline set of connected lines 82 7 4 5 Rectangle 83 7 4 6 Circle 85 7 4 7 Ellipse 86 4 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 7 4 8 7 4 9 ee 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 3 8 3 1 See 8 3 3 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 D2 a2 924 2 3 2 3 1 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 Ta Pad 2 6 aF a71 9 6 9 8 1 Text Image Check drawing Simulating with FluidSIM Simulation of existing circuits The different simulation modes Reset and restart of the simulation Single step mode Simulation to a state change Simulating circuits you create yourself Example with a pneumatic circuit Example with a hydr
154. 5000 l min 300 Standard nominal flow rate Filter 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Air service unit petet eeM The service unit is made up of a compressed air filter with water separator and a pressure control valve Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Standard nominal flow rate Pressure regulator 0 1 5000 l min 300 Standard nominal flow rate Filter 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Start up valve with filter control valve The filter with water separator cleans the compressed air of dirt pipe scale rust and condensate The pressure regulator adjusts the compressed air supplied to the set operating pressure and com pensates for pressure fluctuations The pressure gauge shows the preset pressure The on off valve exhausts the entire control Manifold The manifold enables a control system to be supplied with com pressed air eight individual connections 410 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Air pressure reservoir The air pressure reservoir serves as compensation for pressure fluctuations and is utilized as a reservoir for abruptly occurring air consumption Large time delays can be attained when used in conjunction with time delay and throttle valves Adjustable parameters Volume 0 001 10001 1 Air pressure reservoir 2 Connections The air pressure reservoir serves as compensation for pressure fluctuations and is utilized as a reservoir for
155. 64 Positioning time 1e 4 10s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 21 1 3 Mechanically Actuated Directional Valves 362 2 2 way stem Actuated valve i If the cylinder piston actuates the stem flow is enabled from P to A This valve is derived from a configurable 2 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0
156. 9 19 Examples of distance rule positions To modify the labels or positions or to add more you can either open the properties for the associated cylinder or enter these details directly on the distance rule Double click the distance rule The following dialog box appears Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 149 Label Position 150 Distance rule Range U 100 mm 10 mm mm mm 100mm mm mm mm 100 mm 100mm SS a Init i 100 mm m Figure 9 20 Dialog box for the distance rule The text fields in the left hand column are used to enter the label names of proximity switches or limit switches in the electrical circuit that you want the cylinder piston to actuate The text fields in the right hand columns define the exact start and end positions of the switches on the cylinder Enter Y1 as the label in the first row and enter 35 for both the start and end positions and close the dialog box by clicking A dash with the label name will appear immediately at the corre sponding position under the distance rule A Y1 Figure 9 21 Cylinder with distance rule This means that this cylinder will activate the switch or valve la beled Y1 once its piston has moved 35 mm assuming that the same label was entered on the switch in the electrical part of the circuit or on the mechanical connector of the
157. Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 183 10 3 1 Steps 184 Steps are either active or inactive and can be linked by actions The actions of active steps are executed The sequence of a GRAFCET is described by the transitions from a previous to a subsequent step Steps and transitions have to alternate in the plan The creation and simulation of GRAFCETs in FluidSIM is illustrated in the following using simple examples Drag a step into a newly created circuit diagram a Pe Figure 10 1 Simple step Each step has to be assigned a name All newly created steps are consecutively numbered automatically If a step is to be active at the start of the sequence control it is marked as the initial step Open the step s dialog box by double clicking it or via the menu item and select nitial step as the type Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM E 1 Name 1 E Activation link Type Simple step Figure 10 2 Step Figure 10 3 Initial step Start simulation with gt or via the menu Execute Start Figure 10 4 Active step Active steps are marked with a point Additionally active steps are framed in green Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 185 10 3 2 Actions 186 To execute commands you can link any number of actions to a step Actions do not have to be directly linked to a step you can also link them to each
158. Enable Encryption This option activates and deactivates encryption When encryption is activated the password to be used can be entered in the Pass word input field 260 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 15 5 Cross Reference Representation Cross Reference Representation El Inherit From Parent Node Page number Page Column Figure 15 5 Cross Reference Representation tab This tab is used to define the settings for the cross reference repre sentation You can find further information under Cross reference representation If the nherit From Parent Node option is active then the settings will be copied from the parent project node Example Illustrates the effects of the settings using an example Reset Resets the settings to the settings defined in FluidSIM Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 261 Special functions for electric circuits Chapter 16 16 1 Potentials and conduction lines 262 The creation of horizontal and vertical potential lines is supported by drawing conduction lines The end points of the conduction line consist of potentials that also serve as interruptions In the dialog window for drawing conduction lines you can specify whether the potentials should have an identification In this example we want to draw three horizontal potential lines where each line comes from a preceding sheet 1 and is continued on a sheet 3 Yo
159. FESTO FluidSIM 5 User s Guide 04 14 FluidSIM is a teaching tool for simulating pneumatics hydraulics electrics electronics and digital technique It can be used in combi nation with the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG training hardware but also independently FluidSIM was developed as a joint venture between the University of Paderborn Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Denkendorf and Art Systems Software GmbH Paderborn Contents 2 1 Za Zabel 2 3 2 4 ad 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 5 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 Welcome Installation Technical requirements Installation with program activation Important information about online activation Installation with a license connector Installing the full version from DVD ROM First steps Create a new circuit drawing Organize symbols libraries and circuit diagrams Insert symbol from menu Symbol libraries Create user library Circuit files Library and project window Change window position Automatic show and hide Edit circuit Insert and arrange symbols Connect connectors ports Automatically connect connectors Insert T distributor Move lines Direct connection via straight connection line Define the characteristics of lines Delete line Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 14 17 17 18 18 19 19 21 21 25 26 28 29 30 31 31 31 33 33 33 35 37 40 42 43
160. FluidSIM 343 Font size 344 In Edit Mode the size and position of a textbox can be changed using the mouse pointer Adjust size a 10 20 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 Text Double clicking on a textbox in the selection mode opens a dialog window in which you can modify how the textbox is shown Fort size 9 Coo i Frame K Width 20 Horizontal adjustment Left Height 10 Vertical adjustment Top ox Cancel Help Figure 20 8 The font size of the text to be shown Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Color Frame Width Height Horizontal adjustment Vertical adjustment A selection from sixteen standard colors for the text to be dis played If this field is selected then a frame is drawn around the textbox The width of the textbox The height of the textbox The following alignment options are available Le Center and Right The following alignment options are available 7op Center and Bottom Table textboxes 20 5 Draw signal lines and insert signal connections In this mode signal lines can be drawn freely or automatically laid from signaling elements 20 5 1 Free draw signal lines An additional supporting point is set with every left click The process ends when you click the current line while holding down the Ctrl key press the Esc key or switch the editing mode Use the Del key
161. Free nterrup tions Potentials option is active If the interruption is linked with another interruption then this button can be used to jump to the counterpart interruption If this option is activated and the interruption is linked with another interruption then the location of the counterpart interruption will be displayed as a page coordinate e g page number column A symbol that defines the representation of the interruption can be selected from a list To illustrate the representation the relevant symbol always additionally shows the intersection of two lines Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 7 7 4 2 Conduction line 78 A conduction line is drawn by defining two end points A pneumatic or electric line of this type consists of two connectors with a line between them Both connectors can be used as the starting point for further connections The conduction lines can only be drawn horizontally or vertically You open a dialog window where you can make various settings for the line to be dragged using the Conduction Line menu item or the button on the toolbar Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Conduction Line Type of connection line Pneumatic Hydraulic Hectic Define multiple lines Number of lines Distance mm Start Point Appearance End Point Appearance Display Identification E Display Identification Canc
162. GmbH e FluidSIM 641 642 must be added The circuit diagram must be modified to ensure that the flow control valve is not operative on the return stroke Finally the relationship must be investigated between Q of the PRV and the feed speed and between p_2 and the volumetric flow to the load device In order to prevent the flow control valve from acting as a re sistance on the return stroke a non return valve is installed parallel to this as a by pass The pressure at the PRV remains constant despite the effect of the load The outlet flow from this is therefore a constant 7 l min A constant volumetric flow Q at the PRV in turn means a constant volumetric flow to the load device and thus constant feed speed Regarding the last question No matter whether operation is with or without a load the pressure drop p_2 at the adjustable throttle remains constant A constant pressure drop means a constant volumetric flow Regarding the necessity for the non return valve in the by pass When flow passes through 2 way flow control valves in the re verse direction they act either as flow control valves if the reg ulating restrictor is fully open or non return valves if the regu lating restrictor is closed 172 Exercise Planing machine by pass circuit The sliding bed of a parallel planing machine is actuated with the aid of a hydraulic control system The power section of this hydrau lic control system consists of a double acting differe
163. H e FluidSIM 367 368 4 3 way hand lever valve with floating position ii In normal position the connections A and B are open to T When manually actuated the valve is set to crossover or parallel position This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way hand lever valve with bypass position i In normal position the connections A and B are closed and P to T opened When manually actuated the valve is set to parallel or crossover position This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6
164. If this kind of term does not match the specifications the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 207 term in question is displayed in red The simulation is only released once all the terms are valid 10 6 8 Admissible characters for steps and variables Steps and variables cannot contain any spaces Function names that can be used in a GRAFCET expression are not permitted There are no limitations for the descriptions that can be shown for conditions and actions because these are only displayed and are not used for simulation 10 6 9 Variable names Action Variables Step Variables 208 There are four different types of variables All variables can be used in conditions and assignations Action variables are available throughout GRAFCET and can be set in actions see example Grafcet Grafcet10 ct Step variables are inserted automatically for each step and have the value 1 when and only when the corresponding step is active Step variables have the form X step name If for example the step name is 12 then the associated variable is X12 Step names are only ever valid within a partial GRAFCET or within the global GRAFCET This means that the same step name can be used in different partial GRAFCETs In order to be able to address step variables across partial GRAFCETs in FluidSIM the step variable has to be preceded by the partial GRAFCET name Example Partial GRAFCET
165. KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Alert went Koodshzscrl l m E Engabizsan H d cd Les i C5 ey Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 53 Poppet valves In poppet valves a ball cone or occasionally a disk is pressed against a seat area to act as a Sealing element Valves of this type provide a very efficient seal 54 Piston overlap The switching characteristics of a valve are governed by among other things its piston overlap A distinction is made between positive negative and zero overlap In the case of positive overlap the port in question is completely covered by the piston while with negative overlap it is less than completely covered In the case of zero overlap the distances between the control edges of the piston and of the port are exactly the same eooccens The individual control edges of the pilot piston can have differ ent overlaps 55 Negative switching overlap In the case of negative overlap flow from A to T is not quite closed when the inlet P is opened This means that the pressure at port A rises Slowly and the piston starts gently In manufacturers data sheets overlap positions are shown within dotted lines between the switching positions or the overlap positions are shown in color or with a patterned back ground 56 Positive switching overlap In the case of positive overlap the left hand piston does not open the passage fr
166. LES S Pasa EOE s ingly supplemented by a symbol indicating the actuation methods shown such as pushbuttons and pedals a spring is always neces sary for resetting Resetting can however also be achieved by actuating the valve a second time for example in the case of valves with hand levers and detents The various actuating methods possible are listed in DIN ISO 1219 21 Circuit symbols for mechanical actuation This illustration shows the symbols for stem or push button spring and roller stem 22 Circuit symbol for pressure valves Pressure valves are represented using squares The flow direction is indicated by an arrow The valve ports can be designated as P supply port and T tank return port or as A and B The position of the arrow within the square indicates whether the valve is normally open or normally closed Adjustable pressure valves are indicated by a diagonal arrow through the spring Pressure valves are divided into pressure relief valves and pressure regulators 23 Circuit symbols for flow control valves A distinction is made in flow control valves between types which are affected by viscosity and those which are unaffected Flow control valves unaffected by viscosity are termed orifices A 2 way flow control valve consists of restrictors one adjustable restrictor which is unaffected by viscosity orifice and a regulating restrictor pressure compensator These valves are represented by a rectan gl
167. M Enable sound Switch Contact Cylinder Buzzer Figure 18 15 Options dialog window Sound tab Enable sound You can activate deactivate an audible signal for the components Switch Contact Relay Valve Cylinder and Buzzer Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 313 18 16 Text Sizes Text Sizes Default Settings Label Attribute Lst Table Identification Component Parts List Identification Line Terminal diagram Connector Description Cable Map Teminal Strip Identification Cable List Attribute Value Contact image Text Object Crossreference Dimension Figure 18 16 Options dialog window Text Sizes tab This tab defines the font sizes to be used for objects newly inserted into the circuit diagram Label Attribute This group lists the font sizes used for identifications and cross references etc List Table This group lists the font sizes used for analyses and tables 314 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Menu overview Chapter 19 19 1 File ew New File Opens a new window for creating a new circuit drawing New Project Opens the dialog window for creating a new project Open Open File Opens a new window for selecting an existing circuit drawing Open Project Opens the dialog window for selecting an existing project Add Adds files etc to the active project Festo Didactic GmbH amp
168. M Figure 9 17 Linking the displacement encoder to the cylinder The displacement encoder returns a voltage at its output which is proportional to the piston position of the linked cylinder When the cylinder is fully retracted this voltage will be the set minimum when the cylinder is fully advanced it will be set maximum 9 7 1 Display styles for labels As with component designations it is often desirable to surround labels with a rectangular frame You can select this in the basic settings for fluidic and electrical labels in the menu However you can also set the frame for specific texts to be differ ent from the standard frame To do so double click the specific text Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 147 Display Attribute Layer Alignment Horizontal Vertical E Left Top Center Center Righ Botton A i A iei Rotation 0 Deg Text Attributes Font Color Find Target W Frame Text Gate Gel Figure 9 18 Dialog box for setting the text frame Under 7ext Attributes you can set the option Frame Text FluidSIM automatically positions the labels so that they appear at an appropriate position near the component or connector Howev er you can also move the labels using the mouse or the keyboard To do so click the label and drag it to the desired position To modify the position with the keyboard select the label or the associated con
169. N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 2 way hand lever valve ii In normal position the connection P is open to A and B to T When manually actuated the valve is set to crossover position This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 365 366 4 3 way hand lever valve with shutoff position i In normal position all connections are closed When manually actuated the valve is set to parallel or crossover position This
170. Pa Pressure at X is added to spring force The valve opens as T soon as Opening pressure is greater than pX Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 15 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 058 Pilot valves 2x2 channel 2 channel hydraulic pilot control is used Each channel consists of two pressure regulators Depending on direction the hand lever actuates one of the two pressure regulators via a rocker Pressure is then regulated at the respective pilot port proportional to deflec tion Adjustable parameters Maximum pressure 0 40 MPa 1 5 Displacement Left group 100 100 0 Displacement Right group 100 100 0 Shock and anti cavitation valve The valve limits pressure from port A or B vis a vis pressure applied to T to the selected value Adjustable parameters Opening pressure Left group 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range Left group 0 01 10 MPa 3 8 Hydraulic resistance Left group 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 08 Opening pressure Right group 0 40 MPa 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 387 388 Pressure regulation range Right group 0 01 10 MPa 3 8 Hydraulic resistance Right group 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 08 Closing pressure compensator The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent hy draulic resistance The pressu
171. Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 3 way pressure regulator valve adjustable The pressure regulator valve regulates the compressed air supply to the preset nominal pressure and equalizes pressure fluctuations The compressed air is discharged via connection 3 when the pres sure at connection 2 exceeds the nominal pressure Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 Closing pressure compensator The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent pneumatic resistance The pressure compensator closes when the 3 4 Pressure difference p3 p4 exceeds the nominal pressure A pres 1 sure regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connec tions 2 and 3 The nominal pressure setting of the real components is component dependent and cannot be changed Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 443 444 Closing pressure compensator adjustable The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent pneumatic resistance The pressure compensator closes when the pressure difference p3 p4 exceeds the nominal pressure A pres sure regulating valv
172. Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 108 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 435 Quick exhaust valve The compressed air passes from connection 1 to connection 2 If the pressure should decrease at connection 1 then the com pressed air from connection 2 will escape to the outside via the installed silencer Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 1 2 0 1 5000 l min 300 Standard nominal flow rate 2 3 0 1 5000 l min 550 Two pressure valve The two pressure valve is switched based on the compressed air entering into both input connections 1 and leaving via an output connection 2 Should both input connections begin receiving com pressed air the connection with the lower pressure takes prece dence and is put out AND function Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 550 Check valve If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2 then the check valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the gt flow Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 108 436 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Check valve spring loaded 2 1 If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2 and the nominal pressure then the check valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the flow Adjustable parameters Opening pressure
173. The piston rod now travels under load just as fast as previously without load 24 11 Hydraulic Cylinders and Motors i 151 Single acting cylinder In the case of a single acting cylinder only the piston side is pres m surized with hydraulic fluid The cylinder can thus carry out work i only in one direction The fluid which flows into the piston chamber causes a pressure to build up the surface of the piston The piston travels into its forward end position The return stroke is effected by a spring the dead weight of the piston rod or an external load Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 631 632 152 Plunger cylinder In the case of plunger cylinders the piston and rod form a single component Due to the design of the cylinder the return stroke can only be effected by external forces The cylinders can therefore generally be installed only vertically 153 Double acting cylinder In the case of double acting cylinders both piston surfaces can be pressurized A working movement can thus be performed in both directions With double acting cylinders with a single sided piston rod different forces and speeds are obtained on the advance and return strokes due to the difference in area between the piston surface and annular piston surface 154 Double acting cylinder with end position cushioning Cylinder with end position cushioning are used to brake high stroke speeds sm
174. The roller lever valve is operated by pressing on the lever for example through the use of a switching cam of a cylinder Connec tion 1 is shut After releasing the lever the valve returns to its initial position through the use of a return spring The flow may pass through freely from 1 to 2 In the Simulation Mode the valve can be switched manually by clicking on the component thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the valve This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 3 2 way idle return roller valve normally closed a The idle return roll
175. The valve is used as a downstream pressure compensator for flow control in combination with a pump controlled by means of load sensing variable volume LS pump Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 02 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 018 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 058 Pressure compensator downstream The valve is used as a downstream pressure compensator for flow control in combination with a pump controlled by means of load sensing variable volume LS pump Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 02 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 018 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 058 Pressure compensator for open centre load sensing P gt T pX O MPa Pressure at P pushes the piston against the spring As of adjusted pressure the valve opens P gt T P gt T pX 0 MPa Pressure at X is added to spring force The valve opens as soon as Opening pressure plus spring pressure is greater than pX Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 15 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 058 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM ee iris Pressure compensator for open centre load sensing P gt T pX O MPa Pressure at P pushes the piston against the _ spring As of adjusted pressure the valve opens P gt T P gt T pX gt 0 M
176. a list of any adjusta ble parameters with value ranges for those parameters Tutorial Simulating with FluidSIM Opens the tutorial Simulating with FluidSIM Component Library Opens the reference containing information about the components in the component library Didactics Material Opens an overview of the didactics material If you copied the film files onto your hard disk during installation the list of training film chapters will also appear here Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 325 19 8 Project 326 Circuits for exercises TP Opens a dialog box with exercise circuits for the Festo technology packages Opens a dialog box that you can use to retrieve and create presen tations Presentations allow you to combine separate training topics into a cohesive teaching unit Extended Presentation Opens a dialog box that you can use to retrieve existing presenta tions in Microsoft PowerPoint format The presentation files of the extended presentations are located in the ppx subfolder of your FluidSIM installation You can create your own PowerPoint presen tations and add them by saving them in ppt or pps format to the ppx folder Add Current Window Adds the active window to the file list of the open project Remove Current Window Removes the active window from the file list of the open project Manage Terminal Strips Opens a dialog window enab
177. a passive electrical component which is able to 6222 create induction voltage An inductor also called an inductance in its basic configuration consists of wire coils The inductor provides two terminals If an inductor is connected to a DC voltage then an exponentially increasing current will flow Adjustable parameters Inductance 1E 3 1E4 mH 100 Transformer p1 en2 The transformer consists of two transformer coils If an alternating voltage is applied to one transformer coil an alternating voltage is induced in the second coil In the no load case the value of the new nie P2 voltage when compared to the originally supplied voltage follows the ratio of the number of windings of the corresponding coils to each other Adjustable parameters Inductance 1 1E 3 1E4 mH 595 Inductance 2 1E 3 1E4 mH 66 Coupling coefficient 0 1 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 499 21 5 3 Semiconductor 500 Diode A diode allows an electric current to pass in only one direction while in the opposite direction it acts as an insulator Therefore diodes have a forward direction and a reverse direction Adjustable parameters Reference voltage 0 1 100V 0 7 Reference current 1 1000 mA 12 6 Resistance in series 0 001 1000 Ohm 0 0341512 Saturation current 1e 15 100 A 7 02767e 9 Light emitting diode LED red A light emitting diode LED is a semiconductor compone
178. abels and Superimposed objects All of the circuits will be checked during editing if this option is active Only the criteria that would lead to the warnings specified under Show Warnings are checked Objects that caused an error are highlighted in red in the circuit If this option is not active then the check must be initiated manually using the Page Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 18 9 Automatic Updates Automatic Updates Check for updates at start up Disable automatic updates Notify about updates only Notify about updates and download automatically Check for updates now Figure 18 9 Options dialog window Automatic Updates tab Check for updates at startup FluidSIM can search on the Internet for a new version when the program starts You can activate or deactivate the automatic search here Check for updates now As soon as there is an Internet connection you can use this button to initiate the search for a new FluidSIM version Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 307 18 10 Simulation Output interval resolution 0 001 Detect automatically Slow motion factor 1 1 W Syne screen Line colors Pneumatic Hydraulic Blectric Digital Pressureless Under pressure Vacuum E Treat connection lines as ideal no restistance etc Figure 18 10 Options dialog window Simulation ta
179. able parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 093 Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Pilot to close check valve If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B then the check valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the flow Additionally the check valve can be closed using the pilot line X Adjustable parameters Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 093 Pilot to close check valve spring loaded If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B and the nominal pressure then the check valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the flow Additionally the check valve can be closed using the pilot line X Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 2 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 864 Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 093 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Shuttle valve i If one of the two input pressures is larger than zero the shuttle valve opens OR function and the higher input pressure becomes the output pressure Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 09 Two pressure valve If both input pressures are larger than zero the two pressure valve opens AND function and the higher input pressure becomes the output pressure Adj
180. able volumetric flow rate de pendent upon the variable revolutions and the displacement vol ume Adjustable parameters Mode of control Displacement control Speed control Displace ment control Displacement 0 1 5000 cm3 1 6 Revolution min O 5000 1 min 0 Revolution max O 5000 1 min 1320 Flow rate ratio min 0 1 0 Flow rate ratio max 0 1 1 Maximum pressure 0 01 40 MPa 6 Internal leakage 0O 10 l min bar 0 Power pack with LS variable and fixed displacement pump combi nation on a single motor The hydraulic power pack is suitable for all basic tests of mobile hydraulics The two pumps are both driven by one electric motor The vane pump with adjustable delivery rate has a load sensing pump controller The fixed displacement pump is secured by a pressure relief valve The pump motor unit sits on the tank The return into the tank passes through a return flow filter The ventila tion of the tank is also filtered The oil level can be seen on the sight glass with temperature display The motor is switched on and off from a control console and is safeguarded against overloading Adjustable parameters Revolution 0 5000 1 min 910 Displacement Variable displacement pump 0 10000 cm3 5 6044 Opening pressure Variable displacement pump 0 40 MPa 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Spring preload 0 1 10 MPa 1 17 Displaceme
181. achine hydraulic crane ladle planing machine roller conveyor F function illustration general sectional view G GRAFCET Elements L ladder diagram Limit Switches M measuring devices measuring instruments menu context sensitive context sensitive _ 510 508 512 508 527 _ 587 480 489 489 _ 466 _ 495 __ 636 ___ 640 __ 644 640 __ 638 642 _ 635 641 639 643 637 537 518 489 _ 477 491 406 461 526 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Miscellaneous 521 N non return valve 574 Numbering 550 O one way flow control valve 580 581 p Pneumatic Components 408 presentation creation i i i i i iU 54 edit 544 pressure absolute pressure atmospheric 557 pressure control valve 555 pressure switches 391 Pressure Switches 493 Proximity Switches 482 Q quick exhaust valve 578 579 S semi rotary actuator 561 sequence valve 582 Service Components __ 350 shuttle valve 576 signal flow 550 signal flow component _ 550 supply air throttling exhaust air throttling 581 supply elements 408 switch pressure operated _ 441 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 651 T Throttle valve 581 time delay valve delay valve 584 585 two pressure valve _ 574 V valves configurable _ 358 415 directional 362 directional valves _ 419 flow control 391 flow control valves 435 groups 449 pr
182. actic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM opie 119 Idle return roller valve solution a W iF A i JE EPEN a auk The idle return roller limit switch can be used to remove the signal Pla overlap points i e replace the roller lever limit switches identified Wb Ms ip With an idle return roller lever valve Valves 1S2 and 2S1 generated ME e the signal overlap and therefore these valves should be idle return roller valves Idle return roller valves are not a recommended solution ay am s 120 Reversing valve solution aon N mF Hedik An alternative method of shortening the duration of signals is to l remove the air supply to the two signal valves except at the steps i Ca required Using the reversing valve 1V2 lines S1 and S2 can be Spee Tse activated consecutively and the signals are prevented from over lapping at the memory valves 1V1 and 2V1 Emphasize the increased reliability of the circuit 23 10 Educational Films 23 10 1 Educational Films fof o e Neth Introduction Fundamentals Structure of hybrid systems Fundamentals Fundamentals of electricity 10 26 Sensors and relays Signals Sensors and relays Sensors Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 589 e Sensors and relays Pressure switches 24 fa soenoavns Ppa 9 f Solenoid valves Dousiesolenoid aves 147 10 Solenoid valves Pilot control 11 Pilot control Circuit diagram conv
183. addition al input variables using a calculation rule A classic example is position control where a cylinder needs to move to a certain posi Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM tion The valve is activated electrically so that the cylinder moves The cylinder s position resulting from the movement caused by the valve setting is used in turn as an input variable to determine the deviation between the cylinder s position and its setpoint position Once the cylinder has reached its target position the deviation is 0 and the valve returns to its mid position closed position The cylinder thus comes to a halt If inertia or external disruption caus es the cylinder to move past its target the valve switches over to the other side reversing the flow direction and the cylinder moves back This is the simplest form of closed loop control known as P control proportional control 9 13 1 Open loop control in pneumatics In order to understand how the continuous components function please construct the following circuit power supply function generator voltmeter proportional valve solenoid regulating valve Figure 9 30 Simple open loop control of the regulating valve Do not forget to fit silencers on the valve s five pneumatic ports in order to prevent warnings from FluidSIM Start the simulation and observe the regulating valve The function generator generates a signal between
184. agram shows a delockable double non return valve used in conjunction with a 4 3 way valve to allow the vertical positioning of a load In the mid position of the final control ele ment shown ports A and B are connected to the tank This means 627 m w 24 10 Flow Valves 628 that the inlets A_1 and A_2 of the double non return valve are pressure less and both cylinder supply lines are closed 139 Circuit diagram Delockable double non return valve The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the delockable double non return valve as a circuit sym bol 140 Needle restrictor Throttle and orifice valves are used to achieve a certain pressure drop This is done by creating a specific flow resistance The needle flow control valve shown generates considerable friction due to its long narrowing This means that the action of the flow control valve is difficult to adjust due to the fact that a small adjustment produc es a large change in cross section One advantage is the simple and inexpensive design Needle flow control valves can be used if the above mentioned nega tive properties can be ignored for the purposes of a given con trol task 141 Gap restrictor with helix Its short narrowing means that the action of this gap flow control valve is virtually independent of viscosity The helix provides pre cise adjustability since adjustment from fully open to fully closed
185. ain links to files contained in the project If you wish to pass ona project then you must either pass on all of the associated files along with the project file or activate the Save Projects as Single File option When creating a new project a project folder is automatically created to store the project file and all other files belonging to the project This automatically created project folder has the same name as the project file If you create the project file in an empty folder this will be used for the project i e another new folder will not be created underneath it The automatic creation of project directories can be activated and deactivated in the options under Save In the project window a project is represented hierarchically as a list The top element is the project node Below this are the associ ated circuit nodes and parts list nodes which can be differentiated from each other via the symbol in front of the name Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 14 2 Project nodes Every project possesses one project node as the uppermost ele ment All of the project specific properties are saved with the pro ject node Right clicking on a project node opens a context menu You can also find the menu items on the menu Here you can find the functions for adding and removing files among other things Under the menu item from the menu you can define properties for the project Properties that
186. ally closed The roller lever valve is operated by pressing on the lever for example through the use of a switching cam of a cylinder The flow passes through from 1 to 2 After releasing the lever the valve returns to its initial position through the use of a return spring Connection 1 is shut In the Simulation Mode the valve can be switched manually by clicking on the component thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the valve This valve is derived from a config Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 419 420 urable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 3 2 way roller lever valve normally open
187. alog window Indicates the page where the cable object will be saved This is important if various cable symbols on different pages reference the same cable object The cable object is only saved with one page Enter the identification for the cable here Enter the number of lines wires in the cable here The number can be higher than the underlying lines if for example a concrete cable has unconnected wires If the associated cable symbols overscore more lines than are defined in the cable object a warning is output when the page is checked and the corresponding entries are high lighted in color in the cable lists After you specify the identification for the cable and confirm the dialog the cable object is generated and the cable symbol is as signed to it Click the Properties button to edit the properties of the cable object Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Number of Wires Cable Number of Wires 4 1 100 Identification Number of Wires Find Target Figure 16 9 Properties dialog window Cab etab Defines the number of lines wires in the cable The number can be higher than the lines overscored by the associated cable symbols if for example a concrete cable has unconnected wires If the associ ated cable symbols overscore more lines than are defined in the cable object a warning is output when the page is checked and the corresponding entries are high
188. alve is actuated the pump no longer needs to operate against the preset system pressure One application of this circuit is with 4 3 way valves which are closed in their mid position in cases where with the installa tion operational it is desired to switch to pump recirculation see also topic 116 95 Circuit diagram Pressure stage circuit The part circuit diagram shows a 2 2 way valve used as a selector switch for one of two preset system pressures pressure levels if the 2 2 way valve is actuated flow is enabled to a second sys tem pressure limiter 96 3 2 way valve poppet principle 1 The 3 2 way valve has working port A a supply port P and a tank port T Volumetric flow can be routed from the supply port to the working port or from the working port to the tank port The third port in each case is closed In the normal position shown P is closed and flow released from A to T See also topic 101 slide principle 97 3 2 way valve poppet principle 2 The 3 2 way valve is actuated flow is released from P to A the outlet T is closed 3 2 way valves which are normally open from P to A and T closed are also available Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 617 vi 98 3 2 way valve as final control element The circuit shows the 3 2 way valve in a functional representation as a final control element of a single acting cylinder The non return valve prote
189. ameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 2 4 Solenoid Operated Directional Valves 3 2 way solenoid valve normally closed The solenoid valve is controlled by applying a voltage signal at the solenoid coil The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 By stopping the 1 3 signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring Connection 1 is shut If no signal is applied to the valve it can be manually operated This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning
190. ameters Range selection 10 10V 0 10V 10 10 V Deviation gain 0 10 1 Velocity damping 0 100 ms 0 Acceleration damping 0 10 ms2 0 Total gain 0 1000 1 Control quantity offset 7 7 V 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM EasyPort OPC DDE Components fofif2 a efs feliz FluidSIM Out hdodule 1 Portd Auto FluidSiM In hdodule 7 fo fit fates ys s COM 4 tAutoy Analog Out Module 1 Analog Autos ag In ule d Analog oji j z gt jes Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM FluidSIM Output Port Communication with the EasyPort Hardware and other applications is implemented with the FluidSIM Output FluidSIM Input Port Communication with the EasyPort Hardware and other applications is implemented with the FluidSIM Input FluidSIM Output Port analog Communication with the EasyPort Hardware and other applications is implemented with the analog FluidSIM Output FluidSIM Input Port analog Communication with the EasyPort Hardware and other applications is implemented with the analog FluidSIM Input 487 488 o DESIDI YC CP aiaia ia ih iy i l I CIEI ELELE D oa _ Multi pin plug distributor Communication with EasyPort hardware as well as with other applications is carried out with the multi pin plug distributor The contacts on the right hand side 1 3 5 7 9 and
191. amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM Water separator automatic condensate drain The water separator drains off accrued water and is automatically emptied Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Lubricator The lubricator enriches the compressed air with oil Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Cooler The cooler cools the compressed air Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Adsorption dryer The adsorption dryer reduces the humidity in the compressed air PP Oo Q Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 1000 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 413 414 Connection pneumatic A pneumatic connection is a place where a pneumatic line can be attached to To simplify the line drawing process a connection appears as a Small circle in Edit Mode Pneumatic connections can be shut by means of a blind plug An open pneumatic connection may result in leaking air FluidSIM thus pops up a warning mes sage if some pneumatic connection was left open Note that at each pneumatic connection values for the flow and pressure can be displayed Line pneumatic A pneumatic line is used to connect two pneumatic connectors These may be either a simple pneumatic connection or a T junction A pneumatic line is normally treated as an ideal connection wit
192. an define the different settings for the export The settings depend on the format selected Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 297 Export Page Format Target Size gt BMP Percent Scale Scale 100 Absolute Size mm Width 294 PNG ae Height 196 Properties Absolute Size Pixel Resolution 300 dpi Width 3471 Color depth Height 2316 Figure 17 2 Export Page dialog window You are then prompted to select a file name or enter a new one Select a suitable resolution for the image file 1 Please note that a high resolution generates extremely large files which mean the export may take longer However you can cancel the image export at any time 298 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Options Chapter 18 You can access the various program settings in the Options dialog window via the menu item on the menu 18 1 General General View W Display Snap Radius Product Catalog Insert Symbols With Type Attribute Text fields for accessories Products Limit max count to Festo worldwide Grid W Snap to Grd Grid Width Style Figure 18 1 Options dialog window Genera tab View In order to simplify connection of connectors FluidSIM draws a small circle around the connectors on the circuit symbols Deacti vate the Display Snap Radius option in order to disable the display of the snap in circles Frame fl
193. an gt a ca my D a gt oO 5 ie Q O 3 the left mouse button Zoom In Zooms the view of the circuit diagram in by one step Three steps correspond approximately to doubling the zoom factor Zoom Out Zooms the view of the circuit diagram out by one step Three steps correspond approximately to halving the zoom factor Show Page Borders Shows or hides the page borders in the form of a red rectangle This rectangle displays the borders of the paper format defined on the Paper Size menu Using the print preview you can decide whether and how the drawing is distributed among multiple sheets when printing Show Grid Shows a background grid in the active circuit window The grid settings can be made in the Generaltab under the menu item from the menu Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Show Rulers Shows or hides the rulers in the active circuit window Show Page Dividers Shows or hides the page dividers in columns and rows Cross tively defined via the page dividers shown Quantity Values O ge ce 5 Wn se O ie ion O x lt o a Wn ge as lt O n r a3 m lt lt a ia U I i ca lt O Q Q gt 99 66 define how each quantity value listed velocity pressure current is to be displayed None Individual All Show Flow Dire
194. an additional control but can also initiate user actions For example pressing a pushbutton or switching over a manually operated valve can be simulated This opens up a wide range of control possibilities because the GRAFCET can query all component parameters and also modify them when required This includes the initiation of switching operations the adjustment of flow control valves and the modification of electrical resistances 10 2 Setting the GRAFCET mode Like the other simulation settings the GRAFCET mode can be set for a single page for an entire project node and also in the global settings For example you can set the global GRAFCET settings under Options GRAFCETtab and you can set the page specific GRAFCET settings under Properties GRAFCET tab So it is always clear which GRAFCET mode is active FluidSIM in Simulation Mode applies a colored border to pages containing a GRAFCET A gray frame shows that the GRAFCET is not simulated i e that GrafEdit mode is active A blue frame indicates the GrafView mode in which the GRAFCET can read simulation parame ters Finally the red frame shows that the GRAFCET is in GrafControl mode meaning that it has both readand write access to the com ponent parameters 10 3 GRAFCET elements The following sections describe the individual elements offered by FluidSIM to allow creation of GRAFCET plans that comply with the GRAFCET standard Festo Didactic GmbH amp
195. an also be entered directly in the properties dialog window in the Drawing Properties tab Note that the rotation of the drawing has no effect on the simula tion If you want a load to be raised for example you need to enter the desired angle under Mounting angle in the component pa rameters The component symbols can be scaled with the help of the mouse pointer In order to do this FluidSIM must be in Enable Scale mode This mode can be activated or deactivated using the menu item from the menu or by clicking the corre sponding button on the toolbar Note Activating the Enable Scale mode deactivates the mode and vice versa In Enable Scale mode click the edge or corner of the symbol and hold down the mouse button Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 0051 05 t Figure 5 20 Scale symbol The current scaling relationship to the current original size is dis played Hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer until the desired size is reached The scaling relationship is changed in 0 25 steps Note If you also press the Shift key then you can scale the symbol steplessly lt 3 Figure 5 21 Scale symbol You can simultaneously mirror the symbol by moving the mouse pointer over the middle of the symbol to the opposite side lt ts Figure 5 22 Mirror symbol The scaling factor can also be entered directly in the Propertie
196. an be used to both create and simulate GRAFCET plans The term GRAFCET is also used as a Synonym for a GRAFCET plan It should be obvious from the context whether the word GRAFCET refers to the plan or the language A GRAFCET essentially describes two aspects of a control system according to specified rules the actions commands to be carried out and the sequence of execution The elementary components of a GRAFCET are steps actions and transitions and can be used in the same way as pneumatic or electrical components To achieve a uniform operating concept the GRAFCET elements feature connec tions that can be used to link them to each other as with all other FluidSIM components 10 1 The various GRAFCET modes FluidSIM accommodates various GRAFCET training aims by means of three modes which differ in terms of the degree of interaction they provide between GRAFCET on the one hand and the pneumat ic hydraulic and or electrical circuits on the other hand Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 181 10 1 1 Drawing only GrafEdit The simplest mode also referred to as GrafEdit in the following sections allows you to draw GRAFCET diagrams Simulation or animation of a GRAFCET is not possible in this mode You can draw a GRAFCET together with a fluidic or electrical circuit on one page or on a separate page within a project However in this mode the GRAFCET has no effect on circuit function and the c
197. ance time In this field you enter the time period after which a violated condi tion is categorized as failed The Templates button opens a dialog box where a condition can be compiled interactively Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 201 Monitoring condition Component Variables Units Parameter 202 Monitoring condition is extracting ka Component Variables Units Parameter Condition formula 1 3 m s gt 0 001 ok Cancel Hep Figure 10 25 Template of a monitoring condition You can use the two drop down lists to select a template of a moni toring condition Here you can specify the identification of the component to which the monitoring condition will refer You can use the Browse button to select the component from an additional selection dialog box Here the variables and units are listed which are used in the select ed template Parameters can be adjusted in some templates For example in the template Cylinder is in interval you can specify the limits x1 and x2 of the interval Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Condition formula The condition generated from the template is shown as a formula in this field This formula is transferred into the input field for the monitoring condition Start the simulation and observe how the GRAFCET controls the circuit and advances and retracts the cyl
198. ape of air through the exhaust ports of the valves Discuss the sequence of circuits for the shuttle valve 80 Circuit Shuttle valve Il If push button 1S1 is operated the air escapes to atmosphere through the exhaust port of 1S2 The air takes the easiest path and the pressure will be very low and inadequate to operate the valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM i A l 4 h m eT a m rary 1V1 This is an inadequate solution to the problem A shuttle valve is required Compare the topic with the previous one 81 Circuit Shuttle valve III The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when either of two 3 2 way push buttons are actuated If both push buttons are then released the cylinder is to retract The shuttle valve is incorporated at the junction and the circuit now functions correctly Note the function of the ball in the shuttle valve acting asa non return valve 82 Circuit Shuttle valve IV The shuttle valve is connected to the junction between the two 3 2 way push button valves Upon operation of one of the push buttons a signal is generated at the X or Y port of the shuttle valve and an output signal is emitted at port 2 The cylinder advances Compare the topic with the previous one 83 Exercise The logic OR function the shuttle valve Problem A cylinder is used to transfer parts from a magazine If either a push button
199. ary vane The range of angular movement is adjustable with end stops The angle can be adjusted between 0 and 180 The adjustable stop system is separate to the rotary vanes This allows force to be absorbed by the stop blocks At the end positions impacts are cushioned by elastic cushioning rings Discuss the mounting arrangements for the actuator Discuss applications for the rotary actuator 35 Air motor Devices which transform pneumatic energy into mechanical rotary motion with the possibility of continuous motion They are catego rized into the groups of piston motors sliding vane motors gear motors and turbines Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 561 Discuss applications for the air motor 23 4 Directional control valves Anzahl der Arachiisse Anzahl der Sshaketelonger cet Wrepeventil a js Riihesteling otan E d Mrpewanlil hy Ruhesldlurg esger Jis H2 Mregpewenlil y Ruhestelluro oten L Hi Anzai Cer Arsccilees Somali ier Roballscs linge od Magati j E y 5 Wagevecil 562 36 Symbols for directional control valves 1 The directional control valve is represented by the number of ports and the number of switching positions Additional information is required to fully describe the symbol function including the meth ods of actuation and special flow path characteristics Compare the full range of symbols for directional control valves
200. asyPort via DDE connection OPC FLUIDSIM Global DDE server name Poa 2 Pon 3 For Connector color O Panel set_0 Voltage range Connection established m OV 10V ka No connection Server Topic Label 9 13 Open loop and valves as Figure 9 28 Dialog box for the DDE components This is the server name that FluidSIM uses when it registers in the system as a DDE server As the server name is a global setting it cannot be changed directly in this dialog box Pressing the Global button takes you to the options dialog box where you can change the server name for the entire system Here enter the topic via which you would like to address the components Here enter the label or the item via which you would like to address the components closed loop control by using continuous In addition to simple directional control valves which only have discrete switching positions FluidSIM also offers some continuous valves These are characterized by their ability to adopt a continu ous range of intermediate positions Like electrically actuated Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 159 160 directional control valves these components are controlled via a proportional amplifier or via a valve solenoid These valves howev er are represented by special symbols PED H Figure 9 29 Proportional valve solenoid and amplifier The separate proportio
201. ath for opening and saving circuits This is the default path for opening and saving projects This is the default path for opening and saving libraries Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 301 Drawing Frames This is the default path for opening and saving drawing frames 18 4 Language English US Figure 18 4 Options dialog window Language tab Program Defines the languages for the program interface including dialog windows and messages 18 5 Dimension This tab is used to define the default settings for the dimensions You can find further information under Dimension 302 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Dimension Default Settings Layer Default Layer me Automatic Dimensioning 3 Decimals Seale Factor 1 Figure 18 5 Options dialog window Dimension tab All of the settings are only applied to newly generated dimensions They have no effect on existing dimensions in the circuit Layer Defines the drawing layer where the newly generated dimensions are placed Automatic Dimensioning Activates and deactivates automatic dimensioning If this option is activated then the displayed dimension value is automatically adapted if the dimension is scaled Unit Defines the unit to be used for the dimension Show Unit Defines whether the unit should be displayed Decimals Defines the number of decimal places Scale Factor Determines the facto
202. ation Figure 10 9 Transition dialog window Figure 10 10 GRAFCET The following cycle runs through Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Figure 10 11 GRAFCET cycle 10 3 4 Stored effective actions allocations In the next example a counter is to be implemented This works using a stored effective action allocation and an action on an event To do this add the following information to GRAFCET Select Action on activation for the action of the second step C as the variable and C 1 as the allocation C will work as a counter For the second action of the first step select Ac tion on event B as the variable with the allocation 1 and C gt 2 as the condition event Then start the simulation Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 191 Figure 10 12 GRAFCET Each time step 2 is activated C is raised by one As soon as C has the value 3 and step 1 is activated B receives value 1 Figure 10 13 GRAFCET simulation 10 3 5 GRAFCET PLC component The GRAFCET PLC component is a control device based on a PLC the characteristics of which are described by a related GRAFCET The GRAFCET is simulated in isolation regardless of the set GRAFCET mode meaning that it has no direct access to the varia bles of other circuit components The GRAFCET can only access
203. aulic circuit Example with an electronic circuit Advanced concepts in simulating and creating circuits Adjusting the component parameters Special settings for cylinders Cylinder friction and cylinder mass External load and friction Force profile Actuating labels Special settings for directional control valves Hydraulic resistance Additional simulation functions Simultaneous actuation of several components Simulation of individual pages and entire projects Displaying quantity values Display of direction of quantity values in FluidSIM Displaying state diagrams 88 88 90 91 91 93 94 94 94 95 95 103 120 120 124 124 125 128 130 131 131 132 133 133 134 136 137 Coupling hydraulics pneumatics electrics and mechanics Display styles for labels Operating switches Switches at cylinders Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 139 147 148 149 9 8 2 Relays 151 9 8 3 Coupling mechanical switches 152 9 8 4 Automatic switch altering 152 9 9 Adjusting component parameters during the simulation 153 9 10 Settings for simulation 155 9 11 Use of the EasyPort hardware 155 9 12 OPC and DDE communication with other applications 157 9 13 Open loop and closed loop control by using continuous valves 159 9 13 1 Open loop control in pneumatics 161 9 13 2 Open loop control in hydraulics 163 9 13 3 Closed loop control in pneumatics 166 9 13 4 Closed loop control in hydraulics 17
204. b Display interval Normally FluidSIM calculates all data required for the simulation automatically without bothering the user with mathematical de tails However in some cases it can be useful to specify a certain increment for example in order to achieve a more accurate display of high frequencies in electronics For instance if you want a reso lution in the microsecond range enter an increment of at least 0 000001 or in scientific notation 1e 6 Note that simulation in real time is no longer possible if the incre ments are very small Slow motion factor You can use this factor to set the ratio of time in which the simulat 308 ed processes should take place A value of 1 1 means simulation in real time 1 10 would mean that the simulation takes place in slow motion in this case ten times slower than in reality A ratio of 1 0 1 for example would mean the simulation is accelerated ten times Specifications for real time or accelerated processes can only be fulfilled if the computer has sufficient processing power Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Line colors During the simulation the pneumatic hydraulic electrical and digital lines will be colored according to their state You can cus tomize the colors for each state Digital Technique Compati In digital technology it is useful if unused inputs on AND NAND bility with Siemens and NOT components are automatical
205. bH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 135 Delockable non return valve The 4 2 way valve is actuated the hydraulic fluid passes through the non return valve against the force of the return spring and the piston rod advances When the 4 2 way valve is reset the outlet on the piston side is closed by the non return valve and the cylinder remains advanced The 3 2 way valve is now actuated the pilot piston is reversed and the outlet flow released the piston rod begins to retract During the return stroke the 3 2 way valve is brought temporarily into its normal position This causes the outlet to be closed again and the piston rod and load remain in their current position When the 3 2 way valve is actuated again the piston rod travels to its retracted end position 136 Delockable double non return valve 1 Delockable double non return valves allow a load to be positioned reliably with the cylinder at a standstill even if eternal leaks exist around the cylinder piston When as in the case neither of the inlets A_1 or A_2 is pressurized B_1 and B_2 are closed 137 Delockable double non return valve 2 When A_1 is pressurized the left hand sealing element is lifted from its seat enabling flow to B_1 At the same time the pilot piston is displaced to the right releasing flow from B_2 to A_2 The opposite is true when inlet A_2 is pressurized 138 Delockable double non return valve 3 The model circuit di
206. bH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 73 7 4 Drawing functions and graphical elements 74 Graphical elements can be inserted into a circuit using the menu or by activating the drawing function on the toolbar In order to prevent you from unintentionally moving other symbols when drawing you enter a special mode for the drawing function in which you can only perform the selected drawing functions After every drawing operation FluidSIM returns to the normal editing mode To insert another drawing element you must select the associated menu item or the corresponding drawing function on the toolbar again Note If you wish to draw several elements in a row without leaving the special drawing mode then you can select the menu item or the corresponding drawing function on the toolbar while holding down the Shift key The drawing mode then remains active until the menu item or the drawing function is deactivated by selecting it again or another drawing function is selected without the Shift key being pressed The drawing functions toolbar contains the following buttons Switches to the normal editing mode Switches to the mode for drawing a line Switches to the mode for drawing a polyline Switches to the mode for drawing a rectangle Switches to the mode for drawing a circle Switches to the mode for drawing a ellipse Switches to the mode for drawing a text Switches to the mode for drawing an image Switches to the mode
207. bar can be moved using the arrow keys Maybe it will be necessary to click and select the list you want to work with After creating a new presentation and clos ing the dialog box by clicking on ok FluidSIM asks you to name the presentation file Presentation files have the extension shw and are located in the subdirectory shw under the installa tion directory 22 4 Extended Presentations in the Microsoft PowerPoint Format The hydraulics version of FluidSIM contains an additional large set of presentations written in the Microsoft PowerPoint Format To use these presentations PowerPoint must not be installed on your PC since FluidSIM installs the necessary viewer at its installation time Click on Extended Presentation to open the dialog box of a presentation Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 547 00 Demonstration Animation 10 20 Pump Menu 21 Hydraulic Pump Overview 22 Fed and Variable Pumps 23 Vane Pumps 24 Piston Pumps Pump Selection Factors Pump Installation Industral Controls roportional Valves roportional Valves Basic Principles roportional Valves Basic Principles with Notes roportional Products roportional Products with Notes roportional Valve Selection Factors roportional Valve Selection Factors with Notes Figure 22 17 Selection of an extended presentation Select the item Actuators to open the related presentation in
208. ble 348 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 20 9 Additional editing functions 20 9 1 Zoom Using the e button the view is reset to the standard zoom level Using the e button increases the zoom level Using the e button decreases the zoom level 20 9 2 Undo editing steps Using the button you can undo the last 50 editing steps Using the button you can redo the previously undone editing steps Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 349 The Component Library Chapter 21 In FluidSIM each component in the component library is assigned a physical model Using these models FluidSIM first creates a global behavior model of the circuit which is then processed during simu lation This chapter provides for a short description of the components in FluidSIM s component library If the component has adjustable parameters their value ranges are given Anumber in brackets after the value range indicates the default setting for the parame ter 21 1 Hydraulic Components 21 1 1 Service Components 350 Pump unit The pump unit supplies a constant volumetric flow The operating pressure is limited by the internal pressure relief valve The pump unit has two tank connections Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 6 Revolution 0 5000 1 min 1450 Displacement 0 1 5000 cm3 1 6 Internal leakage 0 10 l min bar 0 002 F
209. cal user s computer or is on a icense serverat a central location in your network In the case of network licensing the connector defines how many instances of FluidSIM can run simultaneously on the network If you try to start more instances of FluidSIM than are permitted you will see a corresponding error message If the license server is down or the license connector is no longer present you will be able to save any circuits you are working on before FluidSIM terminates As soon as the license server becomes available again you can re sume your work 1 Detailed information on network installation of FluidSIM can be found in the installation guide included as a booklet in the product packaging and also in electronic form as a PDF file in the Doc folder on the installation DVD 2 4 Installing the full version from DVD ROM If you are using the software with a license connector do not plug it in until you are prompted to do so by the installation program Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 19 20 Switch on your computer and log on with administrator rights Insert the DVD ROM Usually the installation program starts automatically If it doesn t please start it manually After a few seconds the start screen of the installation program appears Here you can select whether you have received the ver sion for online activation or a license connector with the FluidSIM package Note
210. ccordingly In particular ensure that the DDE connection is activated because it is switched off by default for security reasons 18 13 Environment parameters Ambient temperature 20 10 100 l Atmospheric pressure 1000 500 2000 Figure 18 13 Options dialog window Environment parameters tab Here you can Set the default values for the environment parame ters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 311 1 Note that these values are only used if no others are defined in the page or project properties 18 14 Fluid properties ilipe HLP 22 Initial fluid temperature 20 10 100 Density at 40 C 104 F 965 100 3000 Kinematic viscosity at 40 C 104 F 22 0 1 1000 Density at 100 C 212 F 965 100 3000 kg m3 Kinematic viscosity at 100 C 121 F 44 0 1 1000 mm s Specific heat 2100000 1E 04 5E 06 kuka Max bulk modulus 18000000 1E 04 3E 07 hPa ka i Reset Figure 18 14 Options dialog window Fluid properties tab Fluid type This list contains typical oils and other fluids If you select a prede fined fluid the listed values will be set accordingly 1 Note that these values are only used if no others are defined in the page or project properties 18 15 Sound When you click the Sound tab in the menu a dialog box appears with parameters for the sound settings 312 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSI
211. ce rule The distance rule is a device for attaching switches at the cylinder The labels at the distance rule define links to the actual proximity switches or limit switches in the electrical circuit Status indicator In Edit Mode the status indicator is automatically displayed at those components that are actuated in the circuit s initial position Cam switch In Edit Mode the cam switch is automatically displayed at those mechanically operated way valves that are actuated in the circuit s initial position Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 523 524 Text ewe Seeley J 1 Ki Oe md arnir m J Text The concept of text components in FluidSIM gives the user a way in which to describe components in diagrams assign identification texts or to provide commentary on the diagram The text and the appearance of text components can be customized to the users liking State diagram The state diagram records the state quantities of important compo nents and depicts them graphically Terminal assignment diagram The terminal assignment diagram list automatically creates termi nals in the electrical circuit and displays the allocation in a table Functional diagram With the functional diagram editor functional diagrams e g dis placement step diagrams can be created Parts list The parts list component creates from the components of a c
212. ched manually by clicking on the component thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the valve This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 3 2 way valve with pushbutton normally closed 2 Pressing the pushbutton operates the valve The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 Releasing the pushbutton allows the valve to return to 1 3 its starting position through the use of a return spring Connection 1 is shut By holding down the Shift key and simultaneously clicking on the component with the mouse cursor FluidSIM keeps the valve in permanent operating position Simply clicking on the Festo Didactic G
213. ciated terminal diagram A link plug is to be placed at level 1 between terminals 7 and 8 and at level 2 between terminals 8 and 9 and a wire link is to be placed between terminals 9 and 10 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM X1 Olt S1 H Q1 x1 ote 42 Q1 K1 yt H 4 K1 K1 K2 Y1 G 1 Y2 SEO COP O ees S OE Terminal Strip x1 Terminal Link Plug Wire Link identification ee S S ee es y ss y e Ca p po o es J y y e Oe Jo Jo ee E Oe e CE E E C A Figure 16 29 Double click the electric line between terminals 7 and 8 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 289 Figure 16 30 The properties dialog window for the electric line opens The op tions for setting the links are in the top right Link Link Plug Level 1 ka Wire Link Figure 16 31 Detail of the Line electric dialog window Link Defines that this line is to be treated as a link Link Plug Defines that the link is a link plug Level Specifies the level if a link plug was selected Wire Link Defines that the link is a wire link wt Set Link Link Plug and Leve 3 FluidSIM tracks the line across one distributor point at most This means that the specified link will find the contacts 7 and 8 This link will be represented in the terminal diagra
214. control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 5 3 way solenoid valve mid Position closed The solenoid valve is controlled by applying a voltage signal at the solenoid coil flow passes from 1 to 4 or from 1 to 2 By stopping the signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring Connections 1 2 and 4 are shut If no signal is applied to the valve it can be manually operated This valve is derived from a configurable 5 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Pilot control left 0 01
215. created by using a general changeo ver switch and setting a label Switch with roll changeover Switch that is changed over by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch changes back immediately when the cam has passed the switch Switches with roll are created by using a general changeover switch setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component s properties dialog Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM OX Reed contact changeover Switch that is changed over by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch changes back immediately when the cam has passed the switch Reed contacts are created by using a general changeo ver switch setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component s properties dialog 21 3 7 Manually Operated Switches 1 2 3 Eo 4 2 ai 1 Pushbutton break Switch that opens when actuated and closes immediately when released In FluidSIM switches can be actuated permanently locked when continuing to hold down the mouse button and pushing the Shift key This permanent actuation is released by a simple click on the component Pushbutton make Switch that closes when actuated and opens immediately when released In FluidSIM switches can be actuated permanently locked when continuing to hold down the mouse button and pushing the Shift key This permanent actuation is released by a simple click on the component P
216. ction TST gt g9 gt rt Wn O O 5 T fas Q ms lt io Wn fan x x O Wn se ca D a oO Q O gt ma i 3 fas T a TST TO and hydraulic lines as a visual indication of the flow direction Show Flow Animation When this option is active the flow in pneumatic and hydraulic lines is made visible by animating the lines like conveyor belts GRAFCET O ge ce 5 Wn se O gq ion O x lt o 2 a se lt O n G Z gt m1 YM m 4 Q ia WN O O O n I i ca lt O can set whether to display the descriptions or the formulas of GRAFCET elements Note that this option may overwrite the specific settings of individual elements Display Current Path Numbering When this option is active the current path designations are shown in the electrical circuits The division of the page or circuit diagram can be defined using the page dividers Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 329 330 Show Connector Descriptions Shows or hides the connector descriptions The Display option can be selected in the properties dialog window for the connectors This option is only evaluated if Individual was Selected Show Connector Descriptions All Shows all connector descriptions regardless of the settings at the connectors Show Connector Descriptions Individual Shows only the c
217. ction of the cylinder velocity 124 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Reference pressure Break away force at dp_ret 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 0 Reference velocity Friction at dp_ret Figure 9 4 Friction curve of a pneumatic cylinder 9 2 2 External load and friction Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 125 Moving mass Friction 126 Symbol Name CONFCYL Description Linear Drive Pneumatic wit O Display Part number lse Display in Parts Lists Identification E Display Component Parameters User Defined Properties Drawing Properties Configure Cylinder Actuating labels Force profile Extemal load Moving mass Friction Select material Enter manually 0 2 0 2 Pease note Calculation of friction force also depends on cylinder s mounting angle Show all settings Figure 9 5 External load on the cylinder Enter here the mass of the load that you want the cylinder to move The mass of the cylinder piston and piston rod is calculated auto matically by FluidSIM from the entered cylinder dimensions so the mass entered here refers only to the external load In particular an entry of 0 does not mean that the moving parts in the cylinder have no mass The static friction and sliding friction define the friction of the moving load on a surface The internal friction i
218. ctor and with variable flow control Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 629 630 146 2 way flow control valve 1 Flow control valves have the task of providing constant volumetric flow independently of pressure changes at the inlet or outlet of the valve This is achieved firstly by means of an adjustable restrictor which is set to the desired volumetric flow In order to keep the pressure drop across the throttle point constant a second regulat ing restrictor pressure compensator is also required The illustra tion shows the valve in its normal position 2 way flow control valves always operate in conjunction with a pressure relief valve The part of the flow which is not required is discharged via the PRV 147 2 way flow control valve 2 When fluid flows through the valve the pressure drop across the adjustable restrictor is kept constant by the pressure compensator which varies the resistance at the upper throttle point in accord ance with the load at the inlet or outlet See also the animation 150 for this topic 148 2 way flow control valve 3 In the case of this flow control valve the pressure difference is kept constant by a adjustable restrictor i e between p_1 and p_2 If the pressure p_3 rises as the result of an external load the overall resistance of the valve is reduced by opening the regulating restric tor 149 Circuit diagram 2 way flow control val
219. cts the pump in cases where the 3 2 way valve is actuated and the piston rod is subject to an external load 99 Circuit diagram 3 2 way valve as final control element The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the circuit symbol for the 3 2 way valve 100 3 2 way valve The animations show the actuation and release of the manual pushbutton for a 3 2 way valve which causes the piston rod of the cylinder to advance and retract 101 3 2 way valve slide principle 1 The 3 2 way valve has a working port A a Supply port P and a tank port T The volumetric flow can be routed from the supply port to the working port or from the working port to the tank port The third port in each case is closed In the normal position shown P is closed and flow is released from A to T See also the 3 2 way valve designed on the poppet principle Topic 96 618 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM hs is e a rae 102 3 2 way valve slide principle 2 The 3 2 way valve is actuated flow is released from P to A and the outlet T is closed 3 2 way valves which are normally closed from P to A and T are also available 103 3 2 way valves as diverter In addition to their application as final control elements 3 2 way valves can also be used as diverters In this case port T is connect ed to a further device to which a switch over can then be made Th
220. cuit symbols 8 Action related numbering First of all the control chain is numbered sequentially according to the principle The first actuator is given the supplementary num ber 0 and the associated final control element the supplementary number 1 The remaining elements get even numbers if they influ ence the advance stroke and uneven numbers if they influence the return stroke The numbering should always be entered in the circuit diagram and also on the machine to enable systematic fault finding Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM rtie eon feat 24 3 Symbols Dupak oih _ Due Arcache Ekain Hs elung bluss Leckie lucg Letuncsecrbind ng L Liuaki aes Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM cas H HH ideas e 1 a E al TREY Tf a a 9 Numbering in accordance with DIN ISO 1219 2 The DIN ISO Standard 1219 2 defines the code structure of the components as a string consisting of the following four parts number of the plant number of the circuit component designation and component number If the entire system consists of a single plant only the plant number may be dropped 10 Numbering in accordance with parts list Another method used in practice is to number all the components in a hydraulic system consecutively The numbers then correspond to the numbers in the parts list This method is used particula
221. cushioning at both end positions tS Figure 12 1 Properties dialog window for a component The properties of a component are saved in attribute value pairs The attributes are divided into different groups The first group contains the general properties Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 219 Symbol Name Description Part number Layer Identification Display in Parts Lists 220 Symbol CONFCYL Description Twin piston cylinder E Display Part number Find Layer l1 F Display in Parts Lists Identification A3 W Display Figure 12 2 Detail from the Properties dialog window for a compo nent General properties Displays the name of the circuit symbol The symbol name is mapped to appropriate products in the Festo product catalogue Users cannot edit the symbol name Contains a more detailed description or the complete name of the circuit symbol where applicable Users can edit this The identifica tion is shown as text in the circuit drawing if the Display option is selected The part number uniquely identifies a product within parts lists In this selection list you define the drawing layer for the symbol Depending on the setting for the drawing layer it may not be possi ble to display or edit the symbol In order to make the symbol visible or change the settings you have to temporarily activate the drawing layer on the Drawing Layers menu item f
222. cylinder in a circuit diagram and its physical setup in a plant 5 Designating the elements circuit diagram The figures contrasts the position of a roller lever valve initial position not actuated in a circuit diagram and its physical setup in a plant 6 Designating the elements circuit diagram All elements should be shown in the circuit diagram in the initial position If valves have been drawn with an actuated initial posi tion this fact is indicated for example by an arrow or for a limit switch by drawing the cam Explain the differences between the following terms initial position and starting position Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 551 23 2 Supply elements aeerie Tee chy De chepaither j Remposascr hg T varhdd ont T Aindherating Filer se sarcerrabechckig The _ o Dki De shreagisr a Druckguelle i Wartungselntelt Ti 1 i 552 7 Symbols of energy and supply components supply and ser vice equipment The Symbols are from the DIN ISO 1219 Circuit symbols for fluidic power components and systems The symbols for the energy supply system can be represented as individual components or as combined elements Compare the symbols with the combined symbols topic 8 8 Symbols of energy and supply components combined sym bols In general where specific technical details are to be given such as requirements for non lubricat
223. d 1 This pressure relief valve controls the flow in accordance with an external pressure setting This pressure acts against an adjustable Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM spring force The passage from the supply port P to the tank port T remains closed as long as no load acts on the pilot piston 69 PRV externally controlled 2 Pressure can be fed to the pilot piston via the pilot port X As soon as the pressure force at the pilot piston exceeds the preset spring force the pilot piston is displaced allowing free flow 70 Sequence valve The example shows a circuit with a pressure relief valve used as a pressure sequence valve The pressure at the pilot piston of the PRV rises via the pressure regulator The PRV opens and the high pressure pump delivers directly to the tank As soon as the 2 2 way valve opens the pressure drops The pressure relief valve closes and the high pressure pump is connected to the system 71 Circuit diagram Sequence valve This illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the cut away view of the sequence valve replaced by the appropriate circuit symbol 72 Pressure relief valve Actual photograph of a pressure relief valve 73 2 way pressure regulator 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 611 612 This valve is normally open The outlet pressure A acts via a pilo
224. d an OR component a viewable announcement and an auxiliary manual operation Adjustable parameters Initial Position Left Right Right Desired position 0 2 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Quickstepper The Quickstepper is a ready to be fitted mechanical pneumatic control device with 12 in and outputs The outputs are successive ly synchronized with the input signals Control block for two hand start ZSB The control block for two hand start ZSB is a pneumatic AND ele ment If the inputs 11 and 12 are pressurized within max 0 5 s one after the other the ZSB will switch through an output signal is present at port 2 Control takes place via two external 3 2 way pushbutton valves As long as both pushbutton valves are activat ed outlet port 2 is pressurized If one or both pushbuttons are released outlet port 2 is unpressurized The system exhausts from 2 to 3 Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 451 21 2 11 Continuous valves 5 3 way proportional valve The proportional valve transforms an analog electrical input signal into corresponding opening cross sections at the outputs At half nominal voltage i e 5 V the pneumatic mid position is taken Here all leading edges are closed so that no air flows through the valve Beneficial static and dy
225. d be fitted as near as possible to aL the connection of the cylinder to reduce resistance to flow 23 6 Flow control valves 92 Flow control valves One way How conolvalve ILY Most flow control valves are adjustable If the non return valve is fitted then the element is a one way flow control valve Flow coniro vahaa adjustable f Discuss the flow in both directions in both cases 93 One way flow control valve The valve is generally mounted as close to the cylinder as possible The valve is usually provided with a locking nut to allow finite adjustments to be regulated and then set 94 One way flow control valve One way flow control valves influence the volumetric flow of the compressed air One way flow control valves are normally adjusta ble and the setting can be locked in position The influence of speed control is in one direction only The first sequence of the animation shows the total cross section of the one way flow control valve The animation will be shown in detail by zooming into the air pasSage area Refer to topic 96 for the circuit example 580 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM E Alin bal a P HAT fh 95 Throttle valve Throttle valves are normally adjustable and the setting can be locked in position These valves are used to regulate the speed regulation of actuators and if possible should be mounted directly on the cylinder Compare the flo
226. d into the digital module of the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit Inside the digital module only digital components can be inserted Furthermore an encapsulating of additional digital modules inside a module is not possible However you can use several digital modules in one electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit Please note that the digital circuit inside a digital module only works correctly if corre Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM sponding potentials are set at the electrical power supply units of the module 424 V and 0 V On delay An output with on delay is not switched on until a specified time has expired When the status of input Trg changes from Lo to Hi the on delay time starts If the status of input Trg is Hi at least for the duration of the configured time the output Q is set to Hi on expiration of this time The output follows the input with on delay The time is reset when the status of the input changes again to Lo before the time has expired The output is reset to Lo when the status at the input is Lo Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 100s 3 Off delay The output is not reset until a configured time has expired When the input status turns to Hi the output Q is switched instantane ously to Hi If the status at input Trg changes from Hi to Lo the off delay starts After e
227. d nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 One way flow control valve The one way flow control valve is made up of a throttle valve and a check valve The check valve stops the flow from passing in a cer tain direction The flow then passes though the throttle valve The Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 439 440 D 12 10 Ol Fe cross section of the throttle is adjustable via a regular screw In the opposite direction the flow can pass through the check valve Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Standard nominal flow rate Flow control valve 0 1 5000 l min 45 Standard nominal flow rate Non return valve 0 1 5000 l min 65 Pneumatic counter The counter registers pneumatic signals starting at a predeter mined number and counting backwards If zero is reached then the counter releases an output signal This output signal continues until the counter is reset either by hand or from at signal at connec tion 10 Adjustable parameters Counter 0 9999 3 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Time delay valve normally closed The time delay valve is actuated by a pneumatic signal at port 1 after a preset time delay has elapsed It is returned to the normal position via return spring when the signal is removed The time delay is infinitely adjustable by means of a regulating screw The time delay is reset automatically within 200 ms
228. e unstable step virtual triggering As described in Sequence rules triggering a transition does not take any time As a consequence of this multiple consecutive steps can be activated at the same point in time one after the other This sequence is called transient continuous The intermediate steps in the sequence chain are referred to as unstable The continuously effective actions connected to them are not displayed in the simulation The allocations in the stored effec tive actions are carried out Triggering the intermediate steps and their associated transitions is called virtual triggering see example Grafcet Grafcet06 ct 10 6 6 Determining the values of GRAFCET variables Variables of continuously effective actions allocations receive the value 1 if the corresponding action is linked to an active step and any action condition present has the value 1 Variables of stored effective actions assignation are changed if the corresponding action is linked to an active step and the rele vant action event occurs e g action on event or on activation FluidSIM does not check whether the two types of variable identifi cation contradict each other for a variable If this case occurs the variable value is determined by an internal calculation which the user cannot predict see example Grafcet Grafcet09 ct 10 6 7 Checking the entries FluidSIM checks the validity of entries for conditions and assigna tions
229. e diagram from the component library and move it into the circuit window The state diagram records the quantity values for the most im portant components and displays them in graph form Move the state diagram to a free space in the circuit drawing and drag and drop the cylinder onto the diagram A dialog box opens where you can select the quantity values you are interested in In this instance only the position is of interest so you can remove the check marks for the other values velocity acceleration Start the simulation and observe the diagram Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 101 E1 nonamel rc C fem Wl gt Description Qusntityvsiue __ 0 5 145 JU Figure 8 7 Circuit with state diagram for the cylinder Set the simulation to Pause and move the mouse pointer onto the curve on the diagram If the mouse pointer rests on the diagram for a second a box ap pears showing the exact values for time and the relevant quantity value If you move the mouse along the curve the display alters accordingly updating the values as the mouse pointer moves 102 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Quantity value Time 0 509 s x 45 326 mm Single acting cylinder Figure 8 8 Display of the exact values in the state diagram You can use multiple state diagrams in one window and can also display multiple components in
230. e relief valve PRV is installed as a safety valve Measurements of the volumetric flow Q as a function of pressure p are available for this valve A characteristic curve can then be used to determine whether the loss of speed in the bending process is due to the PRV The volumetric flow which is discharged to the tank when the PRV opens is entered on the horizontal axis The characteristic curve shows that the opening point of the PRV is 44 bar although it is set to 50 bar This means that part of the pump delivery is diverted at pressures greater than 44 bar Pressures of more than 44 bar are achieved during the bending process Since however the flow is divided from 44 bar onwards the volumetric flow to the cylinder is reduced from this point and the bending process slows down Measure to be taken The PRTV can be set to 60 bar if the overall installation has been designed for this higher pressure Flow diver sion will then take place from a pressure of 54 bar onwards An alternative solution would be to use a valve with a different response pressure 165 Exercise Roller conveyor flow resistance Steel blocks are transported on a roller conveyor A hydraulic transfer station makes it possible to transfer blocks from one track 636 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM to another A pressure of at least 30 bar is required for the transfer of blocks by means of hydraulic cylinders Every compon
231. e containing the symbol for the adjustable restrictor and an arrow to represent the pressure compensator The diagonal arrow through the rectangle indicates that the valve is adjustable Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Fuickertoageeod olka le Piika ayeni Sserbybesia aperia wY enepantame Riirkazh ajsan Emapoethats Coppan pesch ageenti Pardee Line giga hermione flows erie filing lewed indicator 24 Circuit symbols for non return valves The symbol for non return valves is a ball which is pressed against a seat Delockable non return valves are shown by a square con taining the symbol for a non return valve The pilot control for unlocking the non return valve is indicated by a broken line at the pilot port The pilot port is designated by the letter X 25 Circuit symbols for measuring devices The illustration shows the symbols for measuring devices used in hydraulics 24 4 Some Physical Fundamentals 26 Hydrostatic pressure Hydrostatic pressure is the pressure created above a certain level within a liquid as a result of the weight of the liquid mass Hydro static pressure is not dependent on the shape of the vessel con cerned but only on the height and density of the column of liquid Hydrostatic pressure can generally be ignored for the purpose of studying hydraulics exception see topic 2 27 Pressure propagation If a force F acts on an area A of an enc
232. e copied them onto the hard disk during the installation If you haven t installed the film files you may choose a chapter via the menu option Educational Film to view the applicable film from the included video CD Click the menu option Didactics Material to open the overview of the didactics material Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 539 Didactics material Didactics material B E Basics and working principles B j Basics E Supply elements Actuators E Directional control valves E Shutoff valves E Flow control valves gt Pressure control valves E Time delay valve E Sequential circuit and signal ove B Basics and working principles eH Educational films fF FE Didactics material F Fe B Educational films no 3 Fundamentals Fundamentals 4 Sensors and relays Signals P 5 Sensors and relays Sensors 6 Sensors and relays Pressure 7 Sensors and relays Relays 8 Solenoid valves 9 Solenoid valves Double soler 10 Solenoid valves Pilot control i 11 Pilot control Circuit diagram 12 Pilot control Hard wired cont 13 Pilot control Programmable L Figure 22 11 Didactics Material Pneumatics 540 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM B Didactics Mat
233. e entered in the empty cells at the end of the table The use of attributes is described in the section Attributes of the nodes in a project The attributes of a project node are automatically copied to all circuit and parts list nodes inherited and are thus available in all of the circuit drawings This concept is particularly useful for the drawing frames if project attributes are to be displayed in the circuit diagram for example You can find further information in the section Link text components with attributes Circuit attributes copied from a project cannot be edited initially The corresponding row in the Aftributes tab of the dialog window is grayed out and the nherit From Project option in the column is activated However it is possible to overwrite a copied attribute in a circuit The option in the nherit From Project column must be deactivat ed for this The value of the attribute can then be edited This function can be used to assign individual page numbers in the drawing frame for example If the nherit From Project option is reactivated then the attribute value is copied from the project again Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 255 Attributes Translation Table Attribute Inherit From Comment Value Action aT p32 Additional text Delete Revision 1 Text Delete Attribute Value Action Inherit From Project Comment 256 Company L
234. e grid using the Show Grid menu item from the menu You can also define further grid settings in the Genera tab under the Options menu item from the menu In order to simplify handling the connectors snap into place when they are close to a grid line This makes it easier to find the precise position when moving the connectors Note The grid snap function may not be desired as it prevents free positioning In this case you can hold down the Ctrl key during the moving operation this temporarily deactivates the grid snap function Connectors between symbols should be exactly horizontal or verti cal wherever possible Then they can be connected with a straight line FluidSIM supports the exact positions firstly via the grid snap and secondly via automatically displaying red alignment lines while moving the selected objects Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 65 7 1 3 Object snap 66 ry Open a circuit file which contains multiple objects Select one of these and slowly move it back and forth above and next to other objects Observe the dashed red lines which appear when two or more connectors lie above each other Figure 7 1 Automatically display the alignment lines In order to simplify handling the connectors snap into place when they are close to an alignment line This makes it easier to find the precise position when moving the connectors Note The g
235. e held down until the cylinder moves fully forward 66 Exercise Indirect control of a double acting cylinder Prob lem A double acting cylinder is to advance when a push button is oper ated Upon release of the push button the cylinder is to retract The cylinder is 250 mm diameter and consumes a large volume of air For controlling cylinders at high speed or of large diameter large size control valves should be used The operating force to actuate the valve may be relatively large and in this case indirect control is preferable H 67 Exercise Indirect control of a double acting cylinder Solu tion Operating valve 1S1 supplies a pilot signal to port 14 of control valve 1V1 This generates a 1 signal at the outlet 4 and the cylinder advances If the push button is released the return signal is sup plied via port 2 of valve 1V1 and the return air is vented via exhaust port 5 If the push button is released before the cylinder fully ad 572 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM vances the cylinder immediately returns to the initial position The control valve requires a sustained signal for it to remain operated Explain the benefits of indirect control The required actuating force is reduced the working lines can be kept short since the actuator can be mounted close to the cylinder and the signal ing element can be small since it has to generate only the sig nal for actuating the con
236. e hydraulic resistance Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 19 One way flow control valve The setting of the One way flow control valve is set by means of a rotary knob A check valve see check valve is located parallel to the throttle valve Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM resistance value can be set This means that in reality different throttle valves can generate different resistance values despite identical settings Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Hydraulic resistance Flow control valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 07 Hydraulic resistance Non return valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 05 2 way flow control valve F a Ifthe pressure is sufficient the preset flow is maintained to a constant level in the direction of the arrow The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Nominal flow 0 500 l min 1 Spring preload 0 10 MPa 0 6 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 05 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 3 B 2 way flow control valve If the pressure is sufficient the preset flow is maintained to a constant level in the direction of the arrow The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Nominal flow O 500 l min
237. e is implemented by the combination of connec tions 2 and 3 Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 Opening pressure compensator The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent pneumatic resistance The pressure compensator opens when the pressure difference p3 p4 exceeds the nominal pressure A se quence valve is implemented by the combination of connections 1 and 3 The nominal pressure setting of the real components is component dependent and cannot be changed Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 Opening pressure compensator adjustable The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent pneumatic resistance The pressure compensator opens when the pressure difference p3 p4 exceeds the nominal pressure A se quence valve is implemented by the combination of connections 1 and 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 2 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 300 21 2 8 Pressure Operated Switches Analog pressure sensor The pressure sensor measures the pressure and operates the pressure switch when the adjustable switching pr
238. e part circuit diagrams show the facility to switch between the flow control valves with different settings and between heating and cooling The circuit symbol is drawn reversed to simplify the representa tion of the circuit diagram 104 4 2 way valve two pistons 1 The 4 2 way valve has two working ports A and B a supply port P and a tank port T The supply port is always connected to one of the working ports while the second working port is routed to the tank In the normal position there is flow from P to B and from A to T In contrast to valves with three pistons 4 2 way valves with two pistons do not require a leakage oil port see topic 106 105 4 2 way valve two pistons 2 The 4 2 way valve is actuated and there is flow from P to A and from B to T 4 2 way valves are also available which are normally open from P to A and from B to T Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 619 H Il Tae AF E 620 106 4 2 way valve three pistons 1 This 4 2 way valve has two working ports A and B a supply port P and a tank port T The supply port is always connected to one of the working ports while the second working port is routed to the tank In the neutral position there is flow from P to B and from A to T 4 2 way valves with three pistons require a leakage oil port since hydraulic fluid would otherwise be trapped within the valve 107 4 2
239. e pressure upstream of the filter increases The pressure acts on a Spring loaded piston As the pressure increases the piston is pushed against a spring Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM a 4 There are a number of different display methods Either the piston movement is directly visible or it is converted into an electrical or visual indication by electrical contacts 46 Water cooler With this design of cooler hydraulic fluid is fed through tubes over which coolant water flows The heat which is discharged can be re used The operating temperature in hydraulic installations should not exceed 50 60 C since this would cause an unacceptable re duction in viscosity leading to premature aging of the fluid In comparison with air cooling operating costs a higher due to the required coolant and the susceptibility to corrosion Tem perature difference of up to approx 35 C can be handled 47 Air cooler Hydraulic fluid from the return line flows through a coiled pipe which is cooled by a fan The advantages here are simplicity of installation and low operating costs The noise of the fan may be a nuisance see also topic 46 48 Heating element Heaters are often required to ensure that the optimum operating temperature is reached quickly Heating elements or flow preheat ers are used for heating and pre heating hydraulic fluid Ifthe viscosity is to high t
240. e pressure balance is also a component of 3 way flow control valves The nominal pressure setting of the real compo nents is component dependent and cannot be changed The hy draulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Opening pressure compensator adjustable The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent hy draulic resistance The pressure compensator opens when the pressure difference X Y exceeds the nominal pressure A pressure relief valve is implemented by the combination of connections P and X The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 x Opening cartridge valve The 2 2 way cartridge valve is a 2 2 way valve It is fitted with two B working ports and the two switch positions closed and open Whether or not the cartridge valve is open or closed depends on Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 389 390 A the effective areas A B and X the adjacent pressures pA pB and pX as well as the spring force A B X is valid If pA A pB B gt pX X F then the valve opens otherwise it is closed The valve therefore operat
241. e start and end times of the interval during which you want the quantity values to be logged You do not nec essarily need to know before starting the simulation the times at which the important events will occur you can always change the display interval as desired after the simulation because FluidSIM always logs all values internally for the entire simulation period If you select the Adjust automatically field the entered limits are ignored and the time axis is scaled so that the entire simulation time is displayed Activate the Scroll automatically field if you want the diagram to display the last n seconds In this case the time axis will be displaced toward the left hand side once the simulation period exceeds the defined time window In the input field you can specify the number of seconds to be displayed in the time window Here you can select which columns you want to be displayed at the left hand side of the diagram You can choose the columns De scription Identification and Quantity value in any combina tion Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Log file Color Fill Area Layer Quantity values If you wish FluidSIM can create a log file of the quantity values Activate this option by entering the full path for the file in the input field and select a suitable time increment Please note that entering very small increments may result in a very large volume
242. e the presentation dialog box is opened Available topics This field contains a list of all available topics dealing with Pneu 546 matics basics Hydraulics basics Working principle and Exercise Moreover there exist two pictures that can be used to announce a refreshment and a lunch break respectively A double click on a line in the Available Topics list inserts this line in the Selected topics list above the highlighted bar In this way a presentation can be created or altered Moreover a user can inte grate his own circuit diagrams DXF files BMP and WMF picture files or even multimedia files such as sounds or video clips To do Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Selected topics Add Delete Preview so click on User file A dialog box opens that allows for the selection of the desired data source on the file system This field contains a list of topics chosen for the current presenta tion Clicking on is the same as double clicking a line in the Available topics list The selected line in Available topics will be inserted in the Se ected topics ist Clicking on deletes the selected line of the Se ected topics list When the Preview setting is activated the picture that pertains to the selected topic appears underneath the respective list Within both topics lists the highlighted
243. e variant if you wish to pass on or archive the circuit diagram Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 89 7 5 Check drawing 90 You can use Check Drawing in the menu to have FluidSIM check your drawing for possible drawing errors FluidSIM displays the following messages where necessary Duplicated identification labels Unresolved link targets Superimposed objects Lines through connectors Open connectors Duplicated cross reference labels Superimposed lines Cyclic object references Objects outside the drawing area Missing translations Ambiguous terminal strip references Unassigned cables Unassigned terminals Duplicated terminal references Two digital outputs are connected to each other Digital loop detected Connection errors found in the GRAFCET diagram If messages are displayed then the corresponding objects are selected after confirmation in the dialog window Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Simulating with FluidSIM Chapter 8 8 1 Simulation of existing circuits FluidSIM comes supplied with a series of functional circuits These include circuits used in training material which are discussed in more detail in the various basic and advanced level workbooks from Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG You can find these sample circuits under TP in the menu The names of the folders match those of the corresponding workbooks from Festo D
244. eal voltage source with a reference point of sround Adjustable parameters Voltage 400 400 V 5 Ground The ground symbol defines the O V reference potential for all signal and operating voltages Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 495 Three phase alternator A three phase alternator supplies a combined set of three sinusoi dal alternating electric voltages The voltages are phase shifted to One another There are three inductors inside the alternator spatially off set by 120 The magnetic field of an evenly rotating permanent magnet induces three alternating voltages phase shifted to one another by 120 Adjustable parameters Frequency 0 01 1000 Hz 50 String voltage 0 400V 7 21 5 2 Passive components 496 Ay Resistor A resistor represents an ideal ohmic resistor Adjustable parameters Resistance 1e 6 1E8 Ohm 100 Resistor temperature dependent NTC In a temperature dependent resistor of type NTC the resistance value falls as the temperature rises Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Adjustable parameters Reference Resistance 1 1E6 Ohm 5208 Reference temperature 0 100 C 23 Resistor voltage dependent varistor VDR CZ A varistor is a voltage dependent resistor Resistance decreases abruptly once a particular voltage threshold is exceeded Resistor light dependent LDR v A light depe
245. ect Files When you work in a project you can select which circuits and parts lists are to be printed Copies 296 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Select the number of copies If the printout consists of multiple pages you can cause FluidSIM to print a correspondingly sorted sequence Scale You can increase or decrease the output size by entering a scaling factor If the dimensions of the area to be printed are larger than the printable area on the paper then the printout is spread across multiple pages tiled You can see the page divisions in the print preview Note Please note that it may not always be possible to precisely comply with the page margins Therefore you should plan a certain amount of leeway for the page margin Page Here you can specify additional margins in order to manually cus tomize the print area Margins You can select which page the print preview displays 17 2 Import DXF file Files saved in the DXF format can be imported and retain most of their element attributes If several special points were taken into account when creating the drawing using a CAD program then FluidSIM can easily expand the symbol library 17 3 Export circuit The FluidSIM circuits can be saved as a file with a variety of differ ent formats The BMP JPG GIF WMF PNG DXF TIF and PDF for mats are available Once you have selected the menu item from the menu a dialog window opens where you c
246. ed air or micro filtering the complete detailed symbol should be used If a standard and common air supply is used for all components the simplified symbols can be used Compare the symbols with the previous topic 9 Air service unit The filter is normally combined with the pressure regulator and lubricator to form a compressed air service unit The selection of the correct filter plays an important role in determining the quality and performance of the control system which is to be supplied with compressed air Refer to topic 10 for construction of the filter Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 10 Compressed air filter The compressed air passes through a baffle plate in the filter bowl The air is rotated and the heavier dust particles and water droplets are spun by centrifugal force against the inner wall of the filter bowl and run down the wall of the housing The air which has been precleaned then passes through the filter element The bowl must be emptied daily to prevent overflow 11 Air drying low temperature The lower the dew point the more the water will condense and reduce the amount entrapped in the air Using refrigeration meth ods it is possible to achieve dew points of between 2 C and 5 C Compare with absorption and adsorption drying 12 Air drying absorption Absorption drying is a purely chemical process The moisture in the compressed
247. ee the effects of the settings straight away in the preview on the right hand side If the Lines per Page option is selected you can specify the num ber of lines to be displayed per page The relevant pages will also be output when the circuit diagram is printed Buttons for naviga tion are displayed underneath the page if the list is split across multiple pages lists Tables 2 4 lt lt First lt Previous Next gt last Figure 16 13 Buttons for navigating through lists 16 2 3 Insert cable list You can insert a cable list into a circuit diagram To insert a cable list into the circuit diagram select the Cable menu item from the menu Alternatively you can click the button Select Cable List Jin the selection dialog window that opens The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair Click the position in the circuit diagram where you want to insert the cable list A dialog window then opens where you can select the associated cable and customize the appearance Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 273 Included Pages Drawing Properties A Include This Page s Components Only Include All Project Files Include Selected Files Project 1 ET Project 1 ET F Project 1 PNEU Project 1 PNEU Figure 16 14 dialog window ncluded Pages tab Include This Page s Compo Lists only the cables in the associated circuit nents Only Include All Project Files Lists all cabl
248. een two positions in a circuit can be measured Adjustable parameters Measure mode Instantaneous value Effective RMS current Instantaneous value Time interval 0 001 100 s 0 1 Resistance 1e 006 1 Ohm 1E 6 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 471 472 ae ey ey iS Displacement encoder The displacement encoder is a slide potentiometer with longitudi nal contact and no connecting rods It delivers a voltage signal that is proportional to the pick up position The pick up position is determined by the piston stroke The voltage range which will depict the minimal and maximal piston position can be defined within the range 10 V to 10 V by the user The displacement encoder requires a power supply of at least 13 V Adjustable parameters Voltage Cylinder retracted 10 10V 0 Voltage Cylinder extracted 10 10 V 10 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 13 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 100 Pressure sensor analog This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog pressure sensor Pressure sensor analog This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog pressure sensor Flow meter analog This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog flow meter Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Flow meter analog q This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog flow meter Pressure sensor with switching outputs a
249. eference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120 Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Double acting cylinder with two in and out piston rods and double trestle This twin cylinder has two in and out piston rods that move in parallel and that are coupled by a double trestle The construction guarantees minimum torsion when positioning and moving tools or assemblies Moreover coming along with the same construction height the double piston rod conveys the double force as com pared to standard cylinders Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120 Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spri
250. el Help Figure 7 8 Conduction Line dialog window Type of connection line Selects the conduction line type The following are available Pneumatic and Electric Define multiple lines Multiple conduction lines can be set one after the other if this option is active You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc key If multiple conduction lines with the same distance between them are to be drawn horizontally or vertically then change the number in the Number of lines field You specify the distance to be main tained between the lines using Distance Under Start Point Appearance and End Point Appearance you can define the representation of the respective end point If the Display Identification option is selected then the identification for Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 79 7 4 3 Line 80 the start point is displayed In order to guarantee that the same identification is displayed for the start point and the end point a text reference for the start point is displayed for the end point instead of its identification Interruptions are used as end points for conduction lines After confirming the dialog window you switch to a special mode where you define the end points of the line with two consecutive mouse clicks Alternatively you can also draw a line by clicking and dragging An electric conduction line can constitute a potential line
251. el of a valve solenoid To simplify clicking a mechanical connection appears as a Small circle in Edit Mode Valve solenoid _ The valve solenoid switches the valve By means of a label the valve solenoid can be linked to a valve that is solenoid operated Adjustable parameters Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 90 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Proportional valve solenoid position controlled In FluidSIM the proportional valve solenoid is coupled to the re spective continuous directional valve with the help of a label The required slide position is predetermined via a voltage signal The valve slide distance is position controlled The control and amplifier component is integrated in the valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 521 522 ie Adjustable parameters Current max 0 01 10 A 0 1 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 128 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Proportional amplifier 1 channel The amplifier is used to control proportional valves For this pur pose nominal values voltage signals from O V to 10 V are trans formed into the necessary magnetic current for the proportional valves In FluidSIM the amplifier is coupled to the respective valve with the help of a label The maximum current at the amplifier output is hereby automatically adjusted in relation to the coupled valve A step current relative to the maximum current can be speci fied in order to compensate the
252. eld in the symbol list with the connector terminators The alignment of the connector terminator can be set via the radio buttons 5 10 Configure a way valve If you require a certain valve which you cannot find in the standard FluidSIM library you can create your own valve symbol with the help of the valve editor Insert a 5 n way valve into a circuit window from the Stand ard Symbols Pneumatic Symbols Valves Configurable Way Valves library insert a hydraulic valve in case of FluidSIM H To set the valve body and the actuation types of the way valves double click the valve The dialog window Properties then opens Click the Configure Valve tab to access the valve editor Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 47 Component Parameters Connector Labels Left Actuation Manually Y Pneumaticalhy Electrically E Springtetumed E Filoted E Pneumatic Spring Extemal Supphy E Show all settings Left Actuation Right Actua tion Valve Body 48 Mechanically Symbol Name CONFDV Description 5 n Way Valve E Display Part number Display in Parts Lists Identification V2 Display Drawing Properties Configure Valve Right Actuation Valve Body BA LA Initial Position Y Manually Mechanically Pneumatically Electrically Dominant Signal Springtetumed E Piloted E Pneumatic Spring Extemal Supply Right Figure 5 16 Pr
253. electric current and is used for switching and amplifying signals without using mechanically moving parts There are two types of BJTs NPN and PNP The letters indicate the order and doping type of the layers Essentially a BJT constitutes two p n junctions connected together in series like that of a p n diode The three terminals are called collector C base B and emitter E Adjustable parameters Forward current gain 0 1 1000 230 Reverse current gain 0 1 1000 1 Saturation current 1e 16 1e 3 A 8 81138e 14 Forward early voltage 1 1000 V 64 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 503 504 N channel JFET A junction gate field effect transistor FET controls the electrical current that flows through the channel between the source and drain terminals by using a junction between the gate connector and the channel Depending on doping type JFETs are classified in two types n channel and p channel JFETs Adjustable parameters Threshold voltage 20 0 V 3 Transconductance parameter 1e 6 1e 1 A V2 1 304e 3 Channel length modulation parameter 1e 6 1e 11 V 2 25e 3 P channel JFET A junction gate field effect transistor FET controls the electrical current that flows through the channel between the source and drain terminals by using a junction between the gate terminal and the channel Depending on doping type JFETs are classified in two types n cha
254. ent through which the hydraulic fluid flows represents a resistance and causes a constant pressure loss The question is what pressure is to be set at the pressure relief valve The total resistance is the sum of all the individual resistances The resistance must be determined separately for the advance and return strokes The overall balances do not include data for the pressure losses at the 4 2 way valve These can be determined from the flow characteristic for the 4 2 way valve based ona volumetric flow of 8 l min In the calculation allowance must be made for the resistance of the directional control valve on the inlet and outlet sides respectively Allowance must also be made for the pressure intensification factor of 2 1 in the case of the differential cylinder This enables values to be calculated as shown in the solution figure In the case of the advance stroke 6 bar hysteresis for the PRV See exercise 164 must be added to the calculated 42 5 bar in order to ensure that the opening pressure is higher than the required operating pressure The value finally chosen is 50 bar in order to make allowance for unknown variables such as pipe el bows and the static friction in the cylinder In order to keep pressure losses in large installations to a minimum it is advisable to select valves on the basis of their flow characteristics It is better to select a valve which is one size too large than to accept large pressure losses This fur
255. entions 12 Pilot control Hard wired controllers 13 Pilot control Programmable Logic Control lers 23 11 Standard Presentations For several topics useful presentations have been provided within FluidSIM The following table lists the titles of the predefined presentations 23 11 1 Presentations Directional control valves 590 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit Educational films Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 591 Didactics Material Survey Hydraulics Chapter 24 This chapter provides a comprehensive listing of those parts of the didactics material in FluidSIM that are not covered by chapter The Component Library The Component Library Basically this mate rial consists of the components behavior illustrations the anima tions the exercises and the educational films which all can be activated under the menu The subsequent sections are arranged thematically The gt icon indicates that an animation exists for the related topic The last section gives an overview of the educational films 24 1 Applications 1 Lathe Machine tool construction is a typical area of application of hydrau lics With modern CNC machine tools the tools and workpieces are clamped by hydraulic means Feed motions and the spindle drive can also be hydraulically powered This can also serve as an e
256. ently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 371 372 Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way solenoid valve with shutoff position ii In normal position all connections are closed When actuated by the control solenoids the valve is set to crossover or parallel position If no current is flowing through the control solenoids the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0
257. er Problem A double acting cylinder is to advance when a push button is oper ated Upon release of the push button the cylinder is to retract The cylinder is of small bore 25 mm diameter requiring a small flow rate to operate at the correct speed 64 Exercise Direct control of a double acting cylinder Solution The control valve for a double acting cylinder can be selected as a 4 2 way or a 5 2 way valve In this case since the cylinder has a Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 571 small capacity the operation can be directly controlled by a push button control valve with spring return On operating the push button the air passes through the valve from port 1 to the port 4 and advances the piston rod On release of the push button the valve spring returns the control valve to its initial position and the cylinder retracts Air escapes from the cylinder via the exhaust port Since the cylinder is the only working element or actuator in the circuit it is designated 1A1 The final control element that advances the cylinder is designated 1S1 m 65 Exercise Direct control of a double acting cylinder Note m Ifthe push button is pressed for a very short period the cylin SANITAT der only partially advances and then retracts since the spring E resets the control valve as soon as the push button is released m In order to achieve full extension in this case the push button must b
258. er valve is operated when the roller is drivenina ot oh specific direction by the switching cam of a cylinder After releasing 1 7 the roller the valve returns to its initial position through the use of a return spring Connection 1 is shut When the roller is driven in the opposite direction the valve is not operated In the Simulation Mode the valve can be switched manually by clicking on the com ponent thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the valve This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 421 422 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Pressurizing valve The pre
259. erial Didactics Material Didactics Material Didactics Material A m k lajes E E Tutorial A H Component Library a 4 Basics and working principle E Applications E Components of a Hydrau S Symbols Some Physical Fundame E Components of a Power Fundamentals of Valves l Pressure Valves E Way Valves E Shutoff Valves EE ED H E B Fow Valves m B Basics and working principles E Hydraulic Cylinders and E Gauges Exercises ducational films 1 Introduction 2 Fundamentals Pressur 3 Fundamentals Pressur 4 Fundamentals Transm 5 Fundamentals Pressur 6 Fundamentals Types c 7 Basic Design of Hydrat 8 The Hydraulic Power L _ 9 Hydraulic Drives 10 Valves 11 Valves Directional Cc E E B Educational films i YYYY ee ee el el F T r Figure 22 12 Didactics Material Hydraulics 22 3 Presentations Combining Instructional Material Sometimes you may want to examine a topic from different angles or combine individual topics into a lesson For this purpose FluidSIM offers the concept entitled Presentation There are a number of already prepared presentations which can be found on the FluidSIM installation disks However editing presentations or creating new presentations is also possible with FluidSIM All presentations can be found under in the
260. erm blocked normal position When operated slowly there is no loss of air A 3 2 way valve with flow blocked between ports 1 and 2 in the normal condi tion is referred to as a normally closed valve The valves are insen sitive to dirt and thus have a long service life Explain the term non overlapping with this figure and the animation The animation sequence shows the operation of the 3 2 way valve The first sequence describes the actuation and the sup ply of a signal from 1 to 2 The second sequence shows the closing of the disc seat and the release of air from 2 to 3 which exhausts to atmosphere 564 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 44 3 2 way valve disc seat normally open A 3 2 way valve with free flow between ports 1 and 2 in the normal condition is referred to as normally open Valves can be operated manually mechanically electrically or pneumatically The configu ration of the valve head is changed to meet the actuation method Upon operation of the actuating stem the disc seat is sealed and air Supply port 1 is blocked The air at port 2 is exhausted to at mosphere via port 3 Note the change of construction compared to the normally closed valve topic 43 45 3 2 way valve single pilot normally closed The pneumatically operated 3 2 way valve is operated by a directly acting signal at port 12 This is referred to as a single pilot valve since there is o
261. es 21 3 6 Limit Switches 21 3 7 Manually Operated Switches 21 3 8 Pressure Switches 21 3 9 Proximity Switches 21 3 10 Relay 21 3 11 Controller 21 3 12 EasyPort OPC DDE Components 21 4 Electrical Components American Standard 21 4 1 Power Supply 21 4 2 General Switches 21 4 3 Delay Switches 21 4 4 Limit Switches Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 391 391 395 400 406 408 408 415 419 427 431 435 441 445 446 449 452 452 461 466 466 469 471 474 475 477 479 480 482 483 485 487 489 489 489 490 491 11 21 4 5 Manually Operated Switches 492 21 4 6 Pressure Switches 493 21 4 7 Relays 494 21 5 Electronic components 495 21 5 1 Power supply 495 21 5 2 Passive components 496 21 5 3 Semiconductor 500 21 5 4 Measuring instruments Sensors 507 21 6 Digital Components 508 21 6 1 Constants and Terminals 508 21 6 2 Basic Functions 510 21 6 3 Special Functions 512 21 7 GRAFCET Elements 518 21 7 1 GRAFCET 518 21 8 Miscellaneous 521 21 8 1 Miscellaneous 521 22 Learning Teaching and Visualizing Technologies 526 22 1 Information about Single Components 526 22 1 1 Component Descriptions 527 22 1 2 Component Illustrations 529 22 2 Selecting Didactics Material from a List 535 22 2 1 Tutorial 535 22 2 2 Component Library eld 22 2 3 Didactics Material 539 22 3 Presentations Combining Instructional Material 541 22 4 Extended Presentations in the Microsoft PowerPoint Format
262. es from damaging the tube 162 Flow meter The flow of oil to be measured passes through a movable orifice The orifice consists of a fixed cone and a hollow piston mounted on a spring The piston is pressed against the spring in proportion to the flow rate concerned The measuring error of this type of flow meter is approx 4 Measuring turbines oval disk meters or toothed wheel gauges are used when higher accuracy is required Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 24 13 Exercises 163 Exercise Horizontal grinding machine pump delivery The slide on a horizontal grinding machine is hydraulically actuat ed A machine operator determines that the reciprocating move ment of the machine is no longer reaching the desired speed A possible cause of this is reduced pump delivery To investigate this it is necessary to plot a characteristic curve for the pump and com pare this with the values achieved during initial commissioning As an additional exercise the circuit diagram and parts list for the necessary test assembly should be prepared In order to draw the characteristic curve for the pump the volu metric flow of hydraulic fluid delivered by the pump Q is plotted against the operating pressure achieved p The manufacturer s characteristic curve exhibits a slight downward gradient since the new pump manifests increasing internal leakage losses as neces sary to provide internal lubrica
263. es in the active project Include Selected Files Lists all cables in the selected circuit in the active project 274 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Spacing Additional Line Spacing Additional Cell Spacing x Supplier Column Header Background Color l z ate ee Color a ne E Lines per Page Figure 16 15 Cable List dialog window Appearance tab You can customize the appearance of the cable map in the Ap pearance tab You can see the effects of the settings straight away in the preview on the right hand side If the cable symbols of a cable object overscore more lines than are defined in the cable object a warning is output when the page is checked and the corresponding entries are highlighted in color in the cable list If the Lines per Page option is selected you can specify the num ber of lines to be displayed per page The relevant pages will also be output when the circuit diagram is printed Buttons for naviga tion are displayed underneath the page if the list is split across multiple pages Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 275 Lists Tables 2 4 Figure 16 16 Buttons for navigating through lists 16 2 4 Insert wiring list You can insert a wiring list into a circuit diagram To insert a wiring list into the circuit diagram select the menu item from the menu Alternatively you can click the i button Select Wiri
264. es purely pressure dependent and can with the appropriate control assume directional flow and pressure func tions The spring force is specified by means of the nominal pres sure This is the minimum pressure with pressureless connections at B and X necessary at connection A to open the valve Whether the valve has one A B or two A B effective areas can be speci fied in the properties window The relevant symbol is automatically depicted The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 5 Area A 0 1 100 cm2 6 Area B 0 1 100 cm2 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 05 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 01 Closing cartridge valve The 2 2 way cartridge valve is a 2 2 way valve It is fitted with two working ports and the two switch positions closed and open Whether or not the cartridge valve is open or closed depends on the effective areas A and X the adjacent pressures pA and pX as well as the spring force A X is valid If pA A gt pX X F then the valve closes otherwise it is open The valve therefore operates purely pressure dependent and can with the appropriate control assume directional flow and pressure functions The spring force is specified by means of the nominal pressure This is the minimum pressure with pressureless connections at B and X necessary at connection A to open the
265. es the performance of a hydraulic system to be optimized For example it can be utilized as an energy reservoir and for the absorbance of pressure surges or flow fluctuations Reservoirs are capable of absorbing a defined volume of fluid under pressure and releasing it again with minimal losses The construc tion consists essentially of a pressure resistant container generally a gas charge of nitrogen and a separator e g a piston a membrane or a bubble elastomer Hydraulic fluid only starts to flow into the reservoir when the fluid pressure is greater than the gas preload pressure Adjustable parameters Volume 0 01 1001 0 32 Pre load pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Polytropic exponent 0 5 3 1 4 Diaphragm accumulator with shutoff block Stores the pressure and is equipped with a pressure relief valve to prevent overpressure Adjustable parameters Pre load pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Volume 0 01 1001 0 32 Opening pressure 0 35 MPa 8 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 355 356 Filter The filter limits the contamination of the fluid respecting a certain tolerance value in order to reduce the risk of damage at the com ponents Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 001 Cooler An unacceptable fall in the hydraulic fluid s viscosity can be avoid ed through the use of a cooler Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar
266. essure 379 shutoff 376 shutoff valves 435 way valves 358 415 652 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM
267. essure has been exceeded AN Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 0 1 2 MPa 0 3 Hysteresis 0 1 MPa 0 Vacuum switch The vacuum switch operates the linked pressure switch when the pressure falls below the adjustable switching pressure If the sym bol is used as a pressure switch the respective switch is operated when the pressure exceeds the switching pressure N Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 0 1 2 MPa 0 3 Hysteresis 0 1 MPa 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 445 Differential pressure switch The differential pressure switch can be employed as a pressure switch connection P1 a vacuum switch connection P2 or asa differential pressure switch P1 P2 The respective pneumatic to electric converter is operated when the difference in pressure between P1 P2 exceeds the adjustable switching pressure p1 p2 X Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 2 2 MPa 0 3 Hysteresis 0 1 MPa 0 21 2 9 Vacuum Technique Vacuum suction nozzle l The vacuum suction nozzle creates its vacuum based on the ejector e principle In this case compressed air flows from connection 1 to 3 creating a vacuum at connection 1v A sucker can be connected to the vacuum connection 1v Stopping the input of compressed air at connection 1 stops any suction also Adjustable parameters Maximum vacuum 0 999 O bar 0 85 Operating pressure for max vacuu
268. essure regulator provides a pressure limiter function Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM n 86 3 way pressure regulator 6 ae ee The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the functional representation of the 3 way pressure regu p lator replaced by a detailed circuit symbol e eooccens 3 way pressure regulators are available with both positive and negative piston overlap If a 3 way pressure regulator is creat ed by combining a 2 way pressure regulator and a pressure re lief valve the overlap is adjustable i m 87 Circuit diagram 3 way pressure regulator int The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the standard circuit symbol for a 3 way pressure regulator i 24 8 Way Valves th 88 2 2 way valve 1 The 2 2 way valve has a working port A a supply port Panda leakage oil port L In the case of the valve shown here of slide design flow from P to A is closed in the normal position o e eeccoevo A relief line leading to the leakage oil port is provided to pre vent a build up of pressure in the spring and piston chambers att 89 2 2 way valve 2 The 2 2 way valve is actuated and the passage from P to Ais open o eocccene 2 2 way valves are also available which are normally open from P to A Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e Flu
269. esto Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Pump unit simplified Simplified representation of the detailed pump unit The compo nent does not have tank connections in the circuit diagram Adjustable parameters Delivery rate 0 500 l min 2 Maximum pressure 0 40 MPa 6 Internal leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Fixed displacement pump The fixed displacement pump delivers a constant volumetric flow rate dependent upon the revolutions and the displacement volume Adjustable parameters Revolution 0 5000 1 min 1320 Displacement 0 1 10000 cm3 1 6 Maximum pressure 0 1 40 MPa 6 Internal leakage 0O 10 l min bar 0 Variable displacement pump The revolutions of the variable displacement pump can be changed under operating conditions The pump delivers a variable volumet ric flow rate dependent upon the variable revolutions and the displacement volume Adjustable parameters Revolution 0 5000 1 min 1320 Displacement 0 1 10000 cm3 1 6 Flow rate ratio 0 100 100 Maximum pressure 0 01 40 MPa 6 Internal leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 351 352 Proportional pump The revolutions of the variable displacement pump can be changed proportionally from zero to maximum through a voltage signal between 0 V and 10 V and the assistance of a proportional amplifier The pump delivers a vari
270. f a component You can use the properties dialog box to customize the compo nent s parameters size characteristic curves etc l In Expert Mode there are sometimes many more parameters available depending on the component These allow you to modify for example spring forces friction or effective area These parame ters are hidden in the standard mode To avoid having to switch Expert Mode on and off continuously you can use the Show all settings option to temporarily display all parameters or to hide the advanced settings Drag a one way flow control valve throttle check valve onto the drawing area and open the properties dialog box by double clicking You can access the adjustable parameters on the Component Parameters tab 120 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Symbol Name Description Throttle check valve E Display Part number Display in Parts Lists 24 Identification 74 E Display Component Parameters User Defined Properties Drawing Properties E Show designation Show varable Show Unit Fow control valve Designation Value Range Unit Display Variable Opening level 100 0 100 O lieve Standard nominal flow rate 85 0 1 5000 Hao Non tetum valve Designation Value Range Un Display Variable iit Standard nominal flow rate 110 0 1 5000 Fl as Figure 9 1 Adjustable parameters of the one way flow control valve Show designation Shows the desi
271. f automatically connecting con nectors The first is to drop a symbol on an existing line To be able to use this method the symbol must have at least two connectors that precisely fit onto one or more existing lines and the lines that Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 35 36 will be produced must not cross the symbol The following two illustrations show this function Figure 5 3 Circuit before the connectors are automatically con nected a fh Figure 5 4 Circuit after the connectors are automatically connected Another method of automatically connecting connectors is to position symbols so that their connectors can be horizontally or vertically connected with free connectors from other symbols After the symbol has been dropped the corresponding lines are automat ically drawn if they do not cross any symbols The free connectors can also be T distributors You can define how different objects connectors are automatically connected in the Connector Links tab under the menu Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM item from the menu The following two illustrations show this function rr ns a KY ESA a h Figure 5 5 Circuit before the connectors are automatically con nected e a UUU kK 3 4 aa m M l P Figure 5 6 Circuit after the connectors are automatically connected 5 4 Insert T distributor You do not need to
272. f load and adjustable Due to the tractive load of the attached spindle however an additional PRV must be fitted as a back pressure valve The non return valves 2V2 and 2V5 provide a by pass during the return stroke and allow maximum speed to be achieved during this A parts list can be specified to help in the drafting of this cir cuit 644 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 24 14 Educational Films 24 14 1 Educational Films m me fe 3 Displacement V V V alves Pressure Control Valves alves Flow Control Valves Representation of Hydraulic Systems in 2 58 Circuit Diagrams 24 15 Standard Presentations 10 11 12 13 14 15 For several topics useful presentations have been provided within FluidSIM The following table lists the titles of the predefined presentations Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 645 24 15 1 Presentations Presentation Title All topics sorted by number Applications Components of a hydraulic system Graphic and circuit symbols Fundamental physical principles Components of the power supply section Valves in general Pressure valves Directional control valves Non return valves Flow control valves Hydraulic cylinders and motors Measuring devices Exercises 646 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Index 3 3 2 way valve ball seat 563 564 disc seat 564 565 pne
273. f piston compres sors 19 Axial flow compressor Flow compressors produce large volumes of air at small increases in stage pressure The air is accelerated by the blades of the com pressor but there is only a small increase in pressure The kinetic energy is converted to pressure energy H 20 Distribution iy For ease of maintenance repair or extension of the air network it is a 8 advisable to sub divide the network into individual sections by means of shut off valves Branches with T pieces and manifolds y 3 5 with plug in couplings make it possible to supply additional con suming devices as the need arises To discharge condensate the pipes should be inclined 1 2 and include water separators at low points 21 Absolute pressure and atmospheric pressure Absolute pressure is calculated from the absolute zero mark Below atmospheric pressure the pressure is in the vacuum range The 556 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 23 3 Actuators Etactenitee dcr Zp aes FA Copra render PAn Er ra erty har chr Dip ni Dt che gc Ka beres ii Doopched ron der Zinco mile mochger F Donyung kil enrii Do prieirender linc ge mil e neie i I Pandunz sinr har F nyela rhea Amea ml keral ar rh Landis ESI ona laa am maik koralan ye teins amuna Poeun nie varaledhar Paral m dnar Srimad rg BaH alha Fag zin m je cri lt n ie a Soalwerkoiir t i atmospher
274. f setting a variable is referred to as allocation in the GRAFCET specifica tions At the start of a sequence all the variable values are initialized with 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Create the following GRAFCET Select the action Simple ac tion in the properties dialogue and enter A under Varia ble output Then start the simulation Templates Tolerance time 0 Seconds Type Action Variable output e Simple action Description E Display description instead of formula Figure 10 6 Action dialog window 1 Figure 10 7 Executed action Step 1 is active and the action connected to the step is executed Variable A is set to 1 The value of an action variable is shown during simulation in brackets after the variable s name Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 187 10 3 3 Transitions 188 Transitions are used to describe the sequence of a control system To do this add the following information to GRAFCET Figure 10 8 GRAFCET Select 2 as the name of the second simple step The transi tion conditions that specify when the system moves from one step to the next are still missing A transition is considered re leased once all the immediately preceding steps are active A transition is triggered once it has been released and its condi tion has the value 1
275. f the output Q shall be set to Lo or to Hi independent on the input value After the simulation start the value at the output is set to the value of the input Adjustable parameters Initial state Hi false Logic level HI h At the output Q you have the logic level Hi Logic level LO At the output Q you have the logic level Lo Connection digital An digital connection is a place where a digital line can be attached to To simplify the line drawing process a connection appears as a small circle in Edit Mode Note that at each digital connection its level Lo Hi can be displayed Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 509 Line digital A digital line links two digital connections Note that a digital con nection may be a simple digital connection or a T junction T junction digital A T junction joins up to four digital lines thus having a single digital level Note that T junctions are introduced automatically by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another line in Edit Mode 21 6 2 Basic Functions AND The output Q of the AND is only Hi when all inputs are Hi that is if they are closed If an input pin of this module is not connected its status is automatically Hi Edge triggered AND amp A The output Q of the edge triggered AND is only Hi when all inputs are Hi and if at least one in
276. face of the pilot piston against an adjustable spring force Every pressure Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 613 614 increase causes the throttle gap to become narrower resulting ina pressure drop 82 3 way pressure regulator 3 When the maximum preset pressure is reached the throttle point closes completely The pressure set on the system pressure limiter is produced at the inlet P 83 3 way pressure regulator 4 If the pressure rises above the preset value as the result of an external load at outlet A the valve opens to allow flow from A to the tank port T pressure limiter function 3 way pressure regulators are available with both positive and negative piston overlap If a 3 way pressure regulator is creat ed by combining a 2 way pressure regulator and a pressure re lief valve the overlap is adjustable 84 3 way pressure regulator The animation shows both the pressure regulator and pressure limiter function of a 3 way pressure regulator through the example of a roller which exerts a constant pressure on moving material of variable thickness The final control element which is normally interposed has been omitted here in the interests of clarity 85 3 way pressure regulator 5 A 3 way PR is shown here in a functional representation incorpo rated into a model circuit diagram The piston rod of the cylinder is subject to external force and the pr
277. ftware package This guide is not designed for the teaching of training content in fluid engineering or electronics if you require materials for that purpose there are textbooks availa ble from Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG FluidSIM permits the creation and simulation of circuits in the following fields Electro pneumatics vacuum technology Electro hydraulics mobile hydraulics Electrical engineering electronics There are specialized versions of the program for each of these technologies referred to in the following as FluidSIM P FluidSIM H and FluidSIM E respectively All three versions also contain components for drawing creation and simulation of Digital technology GRAFCET Some of the functions and components described in this manual may not be available depending on which program versions you purchased In places where the programming differences between the technologies are only minor general examples are given and the specific differences are mentioned When specialized functions are explained such as closed loop control in pneumatics and in hydraulics a separate chapter is devoted to each function For the first time you can link all technologies in FluidSIM in a single circuit or project This means that if you have purchased all three technology versions you can utilize pneumatic hydraulics control technology electronics digital technology etc in any way you want Festo Didactic GmbH
278. full screen mode Most of the topics form a picture sequence which can be viewed in a single step manner using the left mouse button or the spacebar Move two single steps forward in the current presentation 548 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Figure 22 18 Actuators When clicking the right mouse button a context menu is opened by which among others the presentation can be closed or particular pictures picked out The files of the extended presentations are in the subdirectory ppx of the FluidSIM installation You can add new PowerPoint presentations on your own by copying the related files format ppt or pps into the ppx directory Like the other didactics material illustrations of function component pho tos circuit drawings educational films etc the PowerPoint presentations can linked and used within presentations cf Section Presentations Combining Instructional Material Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 549 Didactics Material Survey Pneumatics Chapter 23 23 1 Basics rbetecdemente Su ope ea prs d l Enellechomecnsc y pursi i pr a Prozctesotn Brr Teer eels t Serran p i Elncangssiqnche SEKE Yarkangange lninan la Ss Tt g Arhanta art A Ehe Elenen ita erara hung er a ra m g a x ha elab Ennpaladuneu Pr i RTO Urata eerie 550 This chapter provides a comprehensive listing of
279. g a label and selecting the switch type in the component s properties dialog Reed contact break Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch Reed contacts are created by using a general break switch setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component s properties dialog Limit switch make Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch opens immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 477 478 Switch with roll make Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch opens immediately when the cam has passed the switch Switches with roll are created by using a general make switch setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component s properties dialog Reed contact make Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch opens immediately when the cam has passed the switch Reed contacts are created by using a general make switch setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component s properties dialog Limit switch changeover Switch that is changed over by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch changes back immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are
280. g force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 5 2 way solenoid impulse valve The solenoid valve is controlled by applying a voltage signal at the 5 solenoid coil flow passes from 1 to 4 and remains in this operat 1 ing position even when the signal is cut off Only by applying an opposite signal will the valve return to its starting position flow passes freely from 1 to 2 If no signal is applied to the valve it can be manually operated This valve is derived from a configurable 5 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Fre quently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 429 430 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot
281. g time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Low pressure amplifier unit 2 compartments Each of the two double level low pressure amplifier units has the function of a 3 2 directional valve that is normally closed The signal at connection 12 is raised to a higher boost pressure level through the use of a double level amplifier and is put out by con nection 2 Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 21 2 6 Shutoff Valves and Flow Control Valves Shuttle valve The shuttle valve is switched based on the compressed air entering into either input connection 1 and leaving via an output connection 1 1 2 Should both input connections begin receiving compressed air the connection with the higher pressure takes precedence and is put out OR function Adjustable parameters
282. generation of a complete vacuum in the suction cup Adjustable parameters Min spring pressure 0 1 bar 0 1 Max Spring pressure 0 01 1 bar 0 2 Min Flow rate at p1 p2 50 kPa 0 001 1000 l min 0 5 Max Flow rate at p1 p2 50 kPa 0 1 1000 l min 4 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Adjustable vacuum actuator valve The vacuum actuator valve is employed through the conversion of a vacuum signal As soon as the vacuum reaches the adjustable value at connection 1v the attached valve body is switched Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 0 1 0 MPa 0 025 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 21 2 10 Valve Groups Pressure sequence valve The sequence valve is operated when the control pressure at con nection 12 has been reached The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 Removing the signal allows the valve to return to its starting posi tion through the use of a return spring Connection 1 is shut The pressure of the control signal is infinitely adjustable via a pressure setting screw Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 0 20 bar 3 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 Time delay valve normally closed The time delay valve is made up of a pneumatically operated 3 2 way valve a one way flow control valve and small air accumulator Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 449 450
283. gnations of the parameters displayed using the Display option Show variable Shows the variables of the parameters displayed using the Display option Show Unit Shows the units of measurement of the parameters displayed using the Display option Display Check this box if you want that parameter to be displayed in the circuit Variable Clicking this button takes you to a dialog box with assignment options for accessing the parameter in GRAFCETs or for controlling it with a game controller Inthe Opening leve row click the button for variable assign ment Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 121 Predefined variable User defined alias 122 Variable assignment Variable access Predefined variable User defined alias Stepwise control Please note You can press a controller button in order to assign the comesponding axis Dead zone z Range 100 Punkt A x 100 y 0 Reset ok Cancel Hep Figure 9 2 Variable and controller assignment of a parameter This is the standard complete variable name It is made up of the identification entered by you and the internal parameter name You can use this variable name to access the parameter in GRAFCETs in order to query it or modify its value If you do not like the predefined variable name you can enter your own name for it here Note that this alias has to be unique across the entire page or project F
284. h no pressure drop being included in the simulation A frictional loss can be entered via the Physical mode options If you select Simple resistance only the Standard nominal flow rate param eter will be included in the simulation If you select Empirical model an empirical model is applied that utilizes the length and inner diameter Adjustable parameters Physical model Ideal connection Simple resistance Empirical model Ideal connection Length 0 01 1000 m 0 5 Inner diameter 0 1 100 mm 2 5 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 500 T junction pneumatic A T junction joins up to four pneumatic lines thus having a single pressure potential Note that T junctions are introduced automati cally by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another line in Edit Mode Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 2 2 Configurable Way Valves 2 Configurable 2 n way valve The configurable 2 n way valve is a way valve with two connec tions where both its body elements operation modes are user definable 1 Additionally the pneumatic connections can be closed with either blind plugs or exhausts Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70
285. h that is tailored depending on the type of component that actuates it For example if the break switch is Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 489 linked via a label to a switch off delay relay the break switch changes to a switch off delay break switch in the circuit diagram Make switch ladder General make switch that is tailored according to the component that actuates it For example if the make switch is linked via a label to a switch on delayed relay the make switch changes to a switch on delayed make switch in the circuit diagram 21 4 3 Delay Switches 490 oo ye Break switch switch on delayed ladder Switch with delayed opening after pickup Switch on delayed break switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Make switch switch on delayed ladder Switch with delayed closing after pickup Switch on delayed make switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label Break switch switch off delayed ladder Switch with delayed closing after dropout Switch off delayed break switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM NS Make switch switch off delayed ladder Switch with delayed opening after dropout Switch off delayed make switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label 21 4 4 Limit Switches
286. h the power component The resulting expansion of material is not however of significance for this simple vice If the solution with outlet flow control is selected it should be borne in mind that pressure intensification will take place in accordance with the area ratio of the differential cylinder of 2 1 The pressure relief valve will respond i e flow division will occur only when a pressure has built up on the piston rod side which is approximately twice as high as the system pressure set on the PRV The cylinder flow control valve and connectors used must therefore be suitable for this intensified pressure Precision drives for machine tools are a good example of cases in which it is essential to make allowance for expansion of the material of power components due to the passage through these of heated oil Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 170 Exercise Hydraulic crane speed reduction Ks A Press tools of varying weights are inserted into a press by means of a hydraulic crane A double acting cylinder raises and lowers the a load During the commissioning of the hydraulic crane it has be come apparent that the advance speed of the piston rod is too high The solutions have been proposed to reduce this speed a circuit with exhaust flow control and a circuit with a back pressure valve A suitable solution must be selected and reasons stated for this choice Since the second solutio
287. haust air throttling If the roller lever valve is fitted at the mid stroke position of the cylinder it will advance up to the limit valve and then retract Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 112 Exercise Memory circuit and speed control of a cylinder Note The memory control valve 1V3 when first fitted could be in either of two positions 14 or 12 It is not easy to predict the position of the valve when fitted If a manual override button is available the valve should be manually set to the 12 position before turning on the air to ensure that the cylinder remains retracted initially 23 9 Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit Bn n mo Eg i i p ELF ETE a a clam mia z BL r l wa or Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 113 Sequential circuit distance step diagram Confirmation is required that cylinder 2A1 is retracted before start of the cycle The sequence is A B A B The valves 2S2 and 1S3 are initially operated There is no signal overlap at the final control elements 1V2 and 2V2 o eocecene O Discuss the relationship between the circuit and the distance step diagram 114 Sequential circuit A sequential circuit has the following characteristics when a 3 2 way push button valve is operated cylinder 1A1 extends Confirma tion is required at each step of the sequence The sequence is A B A B eeceoovo T
288. he Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 433 434 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 5 3 way pneumatic valve mid Position closed The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying reciprocal pilot pressures at connection 14 flow passes from 1 to 4 and connec tion 12 flow passes from 1 to 2 By stopping the signals the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring Connections 1 2 and 4 are shut This valve is derived from a configurable 5 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positionin
289. he pressure p_2 must be larger than the pressure p_1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM The pressure transfer pressure intensification effect is put to practical use in pneumatic hydraulic pressure intensifiers and also in purely hydraulic systems when extremely high pres sures are required which a pump cannot deliver 32 Pressure transfer 2 A pressure transfer effect also occurs in conventional double acting cylinders with single piston rod This effect also causes problems in hydraulics If for example an exhaust flow control is fitted to a differential cylinder for the advance stroke a pressure intensification effect results in the piston rod chamber 33 Types of flow A distinction is made between laminar flow and turbulent flow In the case of laminar flow the hydraulic fluid moves through the pipe in ordered cylindrical layers If the flow velocity of the hydraulic fluid rises above a critical speed the fluid particles at the center of the pipe break away to the side and turbulence results Turbulent flow should be avoided in hydraulic circuits by ensur ing they are adequate sized 34 Diesel effect A pressure drop to the level of vacuum may occur at points of restriction causing precipitation of the air dissolved in the oil When the pressure rises again oil bursts into the gas bubbles and spontaneous ignition of the oil air mixture may occur 35 Cavita
290. he active actions during the simu lation If a monitoring condition is violated meaning that its value is O FALSE the corresponding action is marked with a color and the violation of the condition is tolerated for a defined time Once that time is exceeded the monitoring is categorized as failed The settings for monitoring can be set along with the choice of GRAFCET mode see Setting the GRAFCET mode GRAFCET GRAFCET mode GrafEdit GRAFCET is not simulated GrafView GRAFCET visualizes simulation gt GrafControl GRAFCET controls simulation lw Enable monitoring Monitoring condition false ms Action failed Pause simulation on action failed E Play sound on action failed Figure 10 22 Settings for GRAFCET monitoring Here you can define whether you want the monitoring to be carried out during the simulation If the monitoring condition of an active action is violated the action is marked in the color specified Once a monitoring condition fails or in other words once the tolerance time is exceeded the corresponding action is marked in the color specified Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 199 Pause simulation on action failed Play sound on action failed tarts PIT 200 If this option is activated the simulation switches to pause mode when a monitoring condition fails If this option is activated an audio signal is
291. he component parameters 9 4 2 Simulation of individual pages and entire projects In FluidSIM it is possible for multiple circuits to be open at the same time Circuits whose pages belong to a project are simulated as an entire system This is practical if for example you want to create the hydraulic or pneumatic part and the electrical part on separate pages You can also divide large drawings across multiple pages and define the line connections using interruption points When a circuit belonging to a project is simulated all the other pages of the project switch into Simulation Mode as well when the simulation is started While the simulation is running it is therefore not possible to edit any pages belonging to the open project In contrast if pages that do not belong to the project are edited or simulated the editing or simulation always applies only to the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 133 currently active circuit window In such cases it is therefore possi ble to simulate one circuit while editing another 9 5 Displaying quantity values The numerical values for all or some quantity values in a circuit can be displayed even without measuring devices Inthe View menu click Quantity Values to open the dialog box for the display of quantity values 134 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Quantity Values Quantity value Cylinder Force F
292. he necessity of the shuttle valve can be explained with topic 79 86 Quick exhaust valve To reduce resistance to flow the air is expelled to atmosphere through a large orifice thus increasing cylinder piston speed The valve is normally silenced so as to reduce exhaust air noise 87 Quick exhaust valve Quick exhaust valves are used to increase the piston speed of cylinders Lengthy return times can be avoided particularly with single acting cylinders To reduce resistance to flow the air is expelled to atmosphere close to the cylinder and through a large orifice In the direction 1 to 2 the air is passed freely via the open ing of the non return seal Port 3 is blocked by the disc If air is supplied to port 2 the disc seals port 1 Air is expelled to atmos phere through the large orifice 3 Mount the quick exhaust valve directly on the cylinder or as near as possible Refer to topic 88 for the circuit example Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 88 Circuit Quick exhaust valve oo a A cylinder piston rod is to travel at an increased speed utilizing the m d quick exhaust valve The forward motion of the piston rod is assist Lir ji ed by the release of exhausting air at the quick exhaust valve The return stroke is unchanged due to the bypass non return valve Refer to topic 70 for construction of the valve 89 Exercise The quick exhaust valve Problem A cylinder adva
293. he partial GRAFCET frame You can alter the size of the partial GRAFCET frame by dragging its edges with the mouse see exam ple Grafcet Grafcet11 ct It is important that all the ele ments of the partial GRAFCET are located entirely within the rele vant frame and that there are no foreign elements overlapping the frame Macro steps Macro steps can be specified using a step s properties dialogue The preceding M is not a part of the name that you have to enter it is added automatically by FluidSIM You can specify macro inputs and macro outputs in the same way The preceding E and S in these cases are not part of the name either and are automatically added by FluidSIM see example Grafcet Grafcet15 circ Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 10 6 16 G12 8 9 11 G12 G12 G12 INIT 10 6 17 Compulsory commands Compulsory commands can be used to control partial GRAFCETs regardless of their normal sequence There is an entry mask to help you enter these commands in FluidSIM There are four types of compulsory command They are shown here using four examples see example grafcet Grafcet16 circ Setting a specific situation This example activates steps 8 9 and 11 of partial GRAFCET 12 Freezing a partial GRAFCET In this example the current situation for partial GRAFCET 12 is maintained as it is No further transitions are triggered Setting a blank si
294. he parts on the circuit diagram FluidSIM enables you to easily find components on the parts list in the circuit diagram and vice versa Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 241 it j 161788 E z azai 2 4 fi 12 i viv 4 Ma 12 seer is dt Athy z2 i ert er Figure 13 3 Finding components from the parts list You have the following options Clicking onthe button on the Find Target parts list column switches to the circuit diagram display and an anima tion identifies the corresponding components If the same cir 242 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM cuit diagram is already open in another window than the parts list view remains in the active window The already opened window containing the circuit diagram is moved into the fore ground and an animation identifies the corresponding circuit diagram symbol When you click a cellin the parts list table an animation identi fies the corresponding component in all of the opened windows displaying the circuit diagram Ifyou click a column header in the parts list table then both the entire column of the parts list as well as the corresponding components in the associated circuit diagram windows are Se lected Ifyou click a component in a circuit diagram then both this component and the corresponding row in the open par
295. he power component must positively assume a defined end position when the installation is at rest valves with spring return must be used as in this case Here a 4 2 way valve with spring return has been used since this ensures that the cylinder remains in the desired posi tion if the hydraulic power unit is switched on unexpectedly The required cylinder diameter and the return speed of the pis ton rod can also be calculated as additional optional tasks in the exercise see the model calculations in the textbook st 168 Exercise Paint drying oven 4 3 way valve rT Workpieces are fed continuously through a paint drying ovenona ll conveyor belt In order to minimize the heat loss through the door iT this should be opened only as much as required by the height of the workpieces The hydraulic control system should be designed so that the door can be held reliably in position for a long period of time without slipping down Firstly a 4 3 way valve with suitable mid position functions should be selected as a final control ele ment Secondly a delockable non return valve should be provided in the circuit diagram to act as a hydraulic safety device to prevent slippage of the door under load i e its own weight over a long period of time as the result of leakage losses in the directional control valve The question is which type of 4 3 way valve has a suitable mid position function A 4 3 way valve with an all ports closed
296. he resulting increase in friction and cavitation leads to greater wear 49 Circuit diagram Hydraulic power unit The illustration shows the detailed circuit symbol for a hydraulic power unit Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 605 Since this is an combination unit a dot dash line is placed around the symbols representing the individual units 24 6 Fundamentals of Valves 606 50 Actuating force With some types of poppet valves the actuating force which is dependent on pressure and area may be very high In order to avoid this pressure compensation may be provided at the valves 51 Poppet principle Valves are based either on the poppet principle or slide principle In poppet valves a ball a cone or a disc is pressed by a Spring against the seat of a passage The high pressure per unit area which is created means that valves of this kind provide a very efficient seal The illustration shows a cone used as a Sealing element 52 Slide principle This illustration shows the principle of a longitudinal slide valve In order to allow the piston to move it has a certain clearance and floats in hydraulic fluids Ring grooves ensure an even film of oil and thus pressure equilibrium The piston can thus be moved with minimal frictional losses This type of valve cannot provide a perfect seal which means that there is always a certain oil leakage Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co
297. he same time Create a circuit comprising a function generator and an oscillo scope Figure 9 45 Simple circuit with function generator and oscillo scope Set the function generator to the sine function and the fre quency to 1 kHz Now start the simulation and click the oscillo scope A dialog window opens with a display modeled on a real oscillo scope Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Yi Oscilloscope Y1 S Show control panel Vertical Horizontal Fosition Fosition Scale Scale 0 03 V DIV 0 1 ms DIV a Adjust a Adjust e Adjust Figure 9 46 Modeling of a real oscilloscope Turn the various dials and observe how the displayed curve changes Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 179 180 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM GRAFCET Chapter 10 This chapter provides an introduction to creating and simulating GRAFCET plans with FluidSIM See norm DIN EN 60848 for the complete specification of the GRAFCET description language Festo Didactic provides a range of training documentation for more detailed introductions to GRAFCET Unlike an SPS programming language such as Sequential Function Chart SFC GRAFCET is a graphic description language that de scribes the logical behavior and operation of a control system ora process regardless of the technical software and hardware imple mentation FluidSIM c
298. he valve solenoid would not be activated directly via the switch but via an intermediate relay This is left out here for the sake of simplicity Start the simulation The electrical current and the pressure and flow distribution are calculated and the resulting pressures are shown in color If you want to view the exact values for the quantity values you can activate them in the dialog box accessible via Quantity lValues The activated quantity values are shown at the compo nent connection points For more detailed information about this see Displaying quantity values Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 143 Operate the electrical switch The valve then switches over and the cylinder advances Figure 9 14 Simulation of the electro pneumatic circuit In addition to manual actuation or electrical control some valves can also be switched over mechanically by the piston rod of a cylinder or by a permanent magnet on the piston Mechanical linkages like this are created in the same way as those with electri cal components The connection is established by applying a label to the cylinder s distance rule and another to the mechanical con nector on the valve Drag a configurable valve into a circuit window and specify a mechanical actuation e g the stem 144 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 3 Figure 9 15 Valve with mechanical act
299. here is no signal overlap with the circuit 587 588 I i i e e a a E Fd e 4 Al ils Lal m acl eles ok ot E gt Bgralbochcdng 115 Signal overlap circuit It is necessary to identify the points in the circuit where signal overlap occurs on the 5 2 way valves 1V2 and 2V2 With this dis tance step diagram the circuit design using roller valves cannot operate due to signal overlap Refer to the next topics for the overlap conditions 116 Signal overlap circuit II The first overlap condition occurs at the start The pilot signals at the valve 1V2 from the valves 1S3 and 1S2 are opposed The bista ble valve cannot move due to overlap Discuss the options for removal of overlap 117 Signal overlap circuit III The second overlap condition occurs in the third step The valve 2V2 has signals generated by 2S1 and 2S2 opposing each other and causing a signal overlap condition Review the control diagram topic 118 118 Control diagram signal overlap The first control valve 1V2 has an overlap problem in the first step The first of these signals must be out short and therefore valve 1S2 could be an idle return roller lever valve The second overlap prob lem is with valve 2V2 in step 3 when the cylinder 2A1 is fully ad vanced Valve 2S1 could be an idle return roller valve only active in step 2 for a short duration Idle return roller valves are not a recommended solution Festo Did
300. herwise it blocks the flow Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 6 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 864 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 09 Check valve with pilot control If the input pressure is higher than the output pressure the check valve opens Otherwise it is shut In addition the check valve can be opened via a control line allowing flow in both directions Adjustable parameters Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 093 5 Check valve with pilot control spring loaded If the input pressure is higher than the output and nominal pres sure the check valve opens Otherwise it is shut In addition the check valve can be opened via a control line allowing flow in both directions Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 2 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 864 Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 093 Double non return valve delockable The valve is made up of two delockable non return valves Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 093 Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 377 378 Double non return valve delockable The valve is made up of two delockable non return valves Adjust
301. hey are used primarily to control the fluidic components Because these simple electrical components are simulated completely with full physical accuracy just as much as the electronic components are they can be used Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 139 140 and interchanged across all FluidSIM versions and can be combined with the electronic components in FluidSIM E The following figure shows a small example Figure 9 11 Simple electrical circuit Create this circuit on your computer Start the simulation and observe that the indicator light lights up There are electrical components that link electrical circuits with pneumatic or hydraulic circuits These include switches that are operated pneumatically or hydraulically and solenoids for the control of valves As the electrical circuit is drawn separately from the fluidic circuit you need a way of creating a definite link between electrical com ponents e g a valve solenoid and fluidic components e g a certain valve position One way of doing this is with so called labels Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM A label has a specific name and can be assigned to a component If two components have labels with the same name they are con nected even if there is no visible line drawn between them You can enter the name for a label in a dialog box which you open either by double clicking the compone
302. ialog box to begin editing a presentation Preview When the Preview setting is activated the picture that pertains to the selected presentation appears underneath the topics list Click on New Presentation to open the following dialog box 544 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM a Pneumatic system structure and signal flow 2 Circuit diagram and pneumatic elements 3 Designating the elements circuit diagram 4 Designating the elements circuit diagram 5 Designating the elements circuit diagram Remove x Figure 22 15 Dialog box for editing presentations Pneumatics Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 545 Edit presentation or bad Description i 2 Press with elevated reservoir 3 Mobile hydraulics Excavator Components of a Hydraulic Plant 4 Structure of a hydraulic system 5 Hydraulic power section Block diagram of a control system 7 Interaction of components 8 Action related numbering 9 Numbering in accordance with DIN ISO 1219 2 10 Numbering in accordance with parts list Symbols lt ee gt uw p Figure 22 16 Dialog box for editing presentations Hydraulics Description In this text field a short description of the presentation can be entered This text may consist of up to 128 characters and will appear with the other presentations the next tim
303. ic pressure fluctuates but is approximately 100 kPa 1 bar Gauge pressure is normally that component above atmospheric pressure and is not an absolute value 22 Symbols for actuators linear actuators The single acting cylinder and the double acting cylinder form the basis for design variations The use of cushioning to reduce loads on the end caps and mountings during deceleration of the piston is important for long life and smooth operation Refer to topics 25 30 for construction details 23 Symbols for actuators rotary motion Rotary actuators are divided into continuous motion and limited angle of rotation The air motor is normally a high speed device with either fixed or adjustable speed control Units with limited angle of rotation are fixed or adjustable in angular distance The rotary actuator may be cushioned depending on the load and speed of operation Refer to topics 34 and 35 for construction details 24 Control of a single acting cylinder The position rod of a single acting cylinder is to move forward when air is applied A valve is to create a signal when a push button is released The animation shows the operation of the push button and the extension of the cylinder Pressure is maintained on the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 557 piston until the push button is released The next stage shows retraction of the cylinder and the release of air via the exhaust por
304. idSIM 615 616 90 2 2 way valve as by pass valve This example shows a 2 2 way valve used as a by pass valve when the 2 2 way valve is actuated the flow control valve OV2 is by passed causing the piston rod of the cylinder to advance at maxi mum speed 91 Circuit diagram 2 2 way valve as by pass valve The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the functional representation of the 2 2 way valve re placed by a circuit symbol 92 Circuit diagram 2 2 way valve as final control element In its initial position the cylinder is advanced If the 2 2 way valve OV1 is actuated the entire volumetric flow passes to the tank and piston rod of the cylinder is reset by the external load m If OV1 is not actuated the system pressure set on the pressure limiter OV2 builds up and the piston rod advances In the initial position the pump operates against the preset system pressure which has an unfavorable effect on the power balance of the circuit shown 93 2 2 way valve as final control element The animations show the actuation and release of the 2 2 way valve which causes the piston rod of the cylinder to advance and retract Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 94 Circuit diagram for pressure less pump recirculation The part circuit diagram shows a 2 2 way valve used as a by pass valve to achieve pressure less pump recirculation if the v
305. idactic GmbH amp Co KG The sample circuits can be edited and simulated as desired However bear in mind that your modifications may alter the func tion of the circuit and consequently also the training material We therefore recommend saving any modified sample circuits under a different name or in their own folder Open the circuit demo1 and start the simulation via Start or using the symbol J gt FluidSIM switches to Simulation Mode and starts the simulation of the circuit In Simulation Mode the mouse pointer changes into the hand symbol M At the start of the simulation FluidSIM first creates a physical model of the entire system Construction of the model is usually a complex operation which can take several seconds depending on the complexity of the circuit and the speed of the computer Con tinuous calculation of the model using mathematical methods then follows It cannot always be guaranteed that the subsequent dy namic simulation will take place in real time The percentage of real time achieved is displayed by FluidSIM in the status bar at the lower edge of the screen The line animation display during the simulation can be customized in Options Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 91 92 The exact numerical values for the pressures flow rates voltages and currents are displayed on the connected measuring devices Section Displaying quantity values describes how you
306. ight 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Configurable 3 n way valve The configurable 3 n way valve is a way valve with three connec tions where both its body elements and its operation modes are user definable Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Additionally the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind plugs Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Configurable 4 n way valve The configurable 4 n way valve is a way valve with three connec tions where both its body elements and its operation modes are user definable Additionally the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind plugs Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning t
307. ignal from the opposite side There are Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM two manual override buttons to manually operate valve spool The animation shows the two switched positions The air pilot signals are applied from both directions The manual override operations are also shown The manual overrides are used to manually actuate the valve or initialize the valve position Compare the suspended disc seat construction to the longitu dinal slide principle topic 53 Explain the working principle of the manual override button and its related diagram symbol 55 5 3 way valve The 5 3 way valve has five ports and three positions Signals ap plied at ports 14 or 12 operate the valve If the valve is not actuated it is closed in the mid position After actuation via a pilot signal at port 14 air flows from 1 to 4 Port 2 exhausts via 3 After actuation via a pilot signal at port 12 air flows from 1 to 2 Port 4 exhausts via port 5 Show the three valve positions 56 Memory circuit 5 2 way bistable valve The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when a 3 2 way push button valve is actuated The cylinder is to remain ex tended until a second push button is actuated The cylinder is to then return to the initial position The speed of the cylinder is to be adjustable in both directions Discuss the memory characteristic of the bistable valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co
308. igure 16 11 Browse Pages dialog window After you click the button a dialog window opens where you can define the name and number of wires for the new cable object The dialog window is described under Cables and wiring 16 2 2 Insert cable map You can insert an associated cable map for a cable into the circuit diagram You do this by inserting a cable map into a circuit diagram and then assigning a cable to this map To insert a cable map into the circuit diagram select the Cable menu item from the menu Alternatively you can Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 271 click the button Select Cable Map Jin the selection dialog window that opens The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair Click the position in the circuit diagram where you want to insert the cable map A dialog window then opens where you can assign the relevant cable and customize the appearance Properties Appearance Spacing Additional Line Spacing Additional Cell Spacing Column Header Background Color Target ID from Identificatic Lattice Show Lattice Color E Lines per Page Figure 16 12 Cable Map dialog window Cable Defines the relevant cable Properties Opens the properties dialog window for the associated cable sym bol 272 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM You can customize the appearance of the cable map in the Ap pearance tab You can s
309. ime 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 359 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Configurable 5 n way valve The configurable 5 n way valve is a way valve with three connec tions where both its body elements and its operation modes are user definable Additionally the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind plugs Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01
310. imension ar rows Alternatively you can also access the dimensioning functions in the Draw menu under Dimension Horizontal vertical and diagonal dimensioning is done by defining two points for the distance as well as then clicking to position the dimension text Angular dimensioning requires the center point to be defined as well as two points for the angle The fourth click in turn defines the position of the dimension text The dimen sion function can also be used for general labeling of important points in the circuit Two points for a line with any pitch and a final click for the text are needed for this Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 215 11 2 Settings for the dimension Layer Automatic Dimensioning Length Decimals Factor Color 216 Dimension Layer Automatic Dimensioning Length 43 mm Decimals 3 IM Show Unit Factor Drawing Properties E Ovenide Color Line Style Line Width Figure 11 1 Dimension dialog window Defines the drawing layer for the dimension Activates or deactivates automatic adaptation of the dimension when the dimension length is changed If the Automatic Dimensioning option is deactivated you can enter any number that will be displayed as the length dimension A unit can also be selected Show Unit defines whether the unit should be displayed Defines the number of decimal places Determines the factor
311. inder piston gt gt GrafControl GRAFCET controls simulation lt lt Monitoring condition 1 3 v m s gt 0 001 Tolerance time 15 t Cylinder extracted 1 3 x 1 3 x_max Figure 10 26 Simulation with GRAFCET monitoring Now close the one way flow control valve The solenoid valve still switches over as a result of the GRAFCET action but the cylinder cannot advance now The monitoring condition of the action is now violated and the action is marked in yellow to indicate this viola tion Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 203 Monitoring condition 1 3 v m s gt 0 001 Tolerance time 15 l Cylinder extracted 1 3 x 1 3 x_max fh Figure 10 27 Simulation with GRAFCET monitoring After the set tolerance time of one second the violated condition is categorized as failed the action is marked red and the simulation goes into pause mode 204 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM m gt T lt lt gt Di gt fed 1 Grafcet 1_Hyd SE gt GrafControl GRAFCET controls simulation lt lt Monitoring condition 1 3 v m s gt 0 001 Tolerance time 15 Cylinder extracted 1 3 x 1 3 x_max Figure 10 28 Simulation with GRAFCET monitoring 10 6 Quick reference for the FluidSIM relevant GRAFCET concepts The next sections introduce all GRAFCET concepts that are related to FluidSIM 10 6 1 Initiali
312. indow for a rectangle Drawing Properties tab Defines the scaling in the x or y direction Defines the angle of rotation in degrees Defines the color of the drawing element Fills the rectangle with the color listed Defines the line style Defines the line thickness Sets the location of the drawing element to the background This means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this For example symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground This means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this For ex ample symbols are covered by filled drawing elements Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 7 4 6 Circle Position Center cx Center cy Size Radius ne Radius ry Color Line Style Line Width Background Scale Arc Rotation Override Color Fill Area Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM A circle is drawn by defining a middle point and a radius You can draw a circular arc by subsequently entering the beginning and final angles into the Drawing Properties tab in the Properties dialog window of the circle The circle specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Proper ties tab of the Properties dialog window for the circle Drawing Properties Arc Starting Angle Scale Ending Angle Rotation 0 Deg 19 20937271 19 2093727 mm E o o Start Ca
313. ine 1 Delete Revision 1 Date Delete Revision 1 Name Delete Number of pages Delete Company Line 2 Delete Company Line 3 Delete Figure 15 2 Attributes tab This column contains the name of the attribute This column contains the value of the attribute The buttons in this column allow the following actions if the attrib ute was created in the parent project node then the Find Target action is available Clicking this opens the Projector Circuit dialog window for the project node as the target that contains the corre sponding attribute If the attribute was created in the same node then the Delete action that allows you to delete the attribute is available If the attribute was created in the same node then this option is deactivated and grayed out This applies to all of the attributes of the project node since it does not have a parent node For child nodes the value of the attribute from the project node is copied when this option is activated After deactivating this option it is possible to locally overwrite the attribute value Here you can enter a comment about the attribute Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 15 1 1 Predefined placeholders PageNumber PageDescription PageFileName PageFullFilePath PageFileDateTime PageFileDate PageFileTime FluidSIM provides a host of predefined placeholders These place holders can be used in text c
314. into the simulation of electro pneumatic systems using the simulation program FluidSIM and practical examples lt is assumed that you are familiar with the basic functions and operation of FluidSIM B Experiments B Excursus B Mathematical Models B Various Figure 22 7 Tutorial Pneumatics 536 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM E Tutorial Sa o MiG Simulating with FluidSIM a Da Excursus Mathematical moc a Various H 5 Component Library Introduction 6 Didactics Material a Transparent Model Fih Tutorial m Welcome to the tutorial Simulating with FluidSIM Ls Hydraulics The aim of the tutorial is to provide an insight into the simulation of electro hydraulic systems using the simulation program FluidSIM and practical examples It is assumed that you are familiar with the basic functions and operation of FluidSIM Experiments Excursus Mathematical models Gada a Various 4 m Figure 22 8 Tutorial Hydraulics On the right hand side the hierarchical directory is displayed By double clicking the directory symbols you may list off or close the applicable subsections Clicking a page symbol will display the contents of the page in the open window 22 2 2 Component Library Below the menu option Component Library you will find descrip tions and photos of all FluidSIM components Click a
315. ion AND Refer to the following topic for additional conditions 74 Circuit Two pressure valve III If the roller lever valve 1S2 is also operated then the two pressure valve will produce a 1 signal at port 2 which operates the control valve via pilot port 1V1 against the return spring and the cylinder advances Compare this topic to topic 73 75 Exercise The logic AND function the two pressure valve Problem A transfer station removes a product from a conveyor belt If the product is detected as present and if the operator presses the push button the pick up cylinder 1A1 advances The product is sensed by a 3 2 way roller lever valve Upon release of the push button cylinder 1A1 is to retract to the initial position The operat ing condition for the pick up cylinder to advance is a logic AND function between the product sensor and the operator push button Therefore if a two pressure valve is used to combine the signals from the sensor and push button the logic conditions can be met 76 Exercise The logic AND function the two pressure valve Solution The two pressure valve is connected between the outlet lines of the two 3 2 way valves Operating the push button a 1 signal is gen erated at left input 1 of the two pressure valve Once the part is sensed as present the 3 2 way roller valve generates a second 1 signal this time at the right input 1 of the two pressure valve A signal is passed through
316. ion T distributor Junction id E Connected conduction lines are marked as links automatically Controls terminal s target search Figure 5 8 T distributor dialog window Tab Representation T distributor Defines the representation of the basic T distributor Here you can select whether the distributor should be represented as a filled circle or a simple intersection Cross Link Defines that the T distributor should be represented as an electric link This representation has a knock on effect on the connected lines which are automatically marked as links Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 39 Junction 5 5 Move lines 40 Defines that the T distributor should be represented as an electric junction This representation has a knock on effect on the termi nals target search With a junction the target in the direction of a Straight line or right angle is found first and then the target via an angled branch Once you have joined two connectors you can then adjust the length of the lines You can move the line segments in parallel by moving the respective line segment You can see when you have touched the line on the basis of the line selection shape of the mouse pointer Press the left mouse button and move the line segment or thogonally to the desired position Figure 5 9 Moving a line segment Release the left mouse button FluidSIM adjusts the adjoining line segments in
317. ion under the menu The following page opens Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 527 Component library Componentlibrary Pneumatic Components Shutoff Valves and Flow Control Valves One way flow control valve rr ua TA One way flow control valve A L o gt The one way flow control valve is made up of a throttle valve and a check valve The check valve stops the flow from passing in a certain direction The flow then passes though the throttle valve The cross section of the throttle is adjustable via a regular screw In the opposite direction the flow can pass through the check valve Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 Related Topics 94 One way flow control valve 95 Throttle valve Throttle valve Piloted operated check valve Oo G gt Figure 22 1 Technical page of the one way flow control valve 528 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Component library Componentlibrary Hydraulic Components Flow Control Valves One way flow control valve ae es One way flow control valve A T B The setting of the One way flow control valve is set by means of a rotary knob A check valve see check valve is located parallel to the throttle valve Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute resistance value can be set This means that i
318. ion is controlled by air in both directions of motion The animation shows the advance and retraction sequences as separate phases The fully advanced position is related as long as the push button is actuated The topic can be used as an intermediate stage for explanation of the related symbols 28 Double acting cylinder Double acting cylinders are used particularly when the piston is required to perform a work function in both directions of motion The construction is in general similar to the single acting cylinder Refer to the large number of variants which result from the different designs materials etc 29 Double acting cylinder The first sequence shows the piston rod advancing The second stage the retraction The speed of advance and retraction are fairly constant under no load conditions Point at the positions of cylinder body piston cover cylinder cover piston seal piston rod bearing bush and scraper ring 30 Cushioned double acting cylinder If large masses are moved by a cylinder cushioning is used in the end positions Before reaching the end position a cushioning piston interrupts the direct flow of air to the outside For the last Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 559 part of the stroke the speed is slowed to reduce impact on the cylinder Discuss the different concept of throttleling the exhausting air by means of one way flow control valve vany are
319. iption entry on the menu The Find Symbol dialog window then opens You can enter your search terms in the Search input line Separate the individual search terms using commas or spaces Neither the order of the search terms nor upper or lower case letters have any influence on the search results Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM aii e Symbol Search valve Fuzzy Search El Festa 2 2 way valve configurable amp n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 3 Hectic E E 2 2 way valve configurable 4n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Mam r St i 3 2 way valve configurable 3n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Sw a za l r H 32 way valve configurable 3n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Mz El Pneumatic symbols ISO 1215 1 3 way ball valve Pneumatic symbols ISO 1219 1 Switch Vary Q 4 2 way valve configurable 4 n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Mz 4 2 way valve configurable 4 n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Sw 5 2 way valve configurable S n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Sw 5 way valve configurable S n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Mz 5 3 proportional directional control valve closed electrical Magnetic spring direc 5 3 way valve configurable 3 n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1 Sw 7 5 3 way valve configurable 3n way valve Pneumatic symbols 150 1219 1
320. ircuit diagram a table which contains for each component its designation and its description Rectangle Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Rectangles are graphic primitives which can also be used within circuit diagrams 5 Ellipse Ellipses are graphic primitives which can also be used within circuit diagrams FESTO tmp In FluidSIM images as with all other components and objects can be inserted positioned moved rotated and mirrored In addition images such as rectangles and ellipses are freely scalable Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 525 Learning Teaching and Visualizing Technologies Chapter 22 Beside the creation and simulation of electro fluidic circuit dia grams FluidSIM also supports teaching basic knowledge This knowledge is presented in the form of texts overview pictures sectional views exercises and educational films Functions that realize the selection of this instruction material are found under the One group of these functions refers to information about single selected components Another group of functions refers to ordered overviews of the didactics material allowing the selection of an interesting topic Finally it is also possible to select and link to gether arbitrary topics into so called Presentation l Appendix Component Library J and Didactics Material offer a complete and concise summar
321. is disconnected from the voltage source If charge resp electric flow is extracted from the capacitor its voltage drops again Adjustable parameters Capacity 1E 4 1E7 uF 1 Capacitor polarized A capacitor is a passive electrical component which is able to store electric charge and therefore electric energy The capacitor in its basic configuration consists of two electrically conductive surfaces the electrodes The electrodes are separated through an insulating material the so called dielectric The separa tion of the two electrodes is so narrow that the electrical forces are able to act through the insulating material If a constant voltage is applied to the connectors of an uncharged capacitor a current flows for a short period of time and one of the electrodes is positively charged the other one negatively This electric charge is retained when the capacitor is disconnected from the voltage source If charge resp electric flow is extracted from the capacitor its voltage drops again Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM In contrast to the non polarized capacitor the polarized capacitor is only suitable for DC and for AC voltage that does not reverse the capacitor s polarity The advantage of the polarized capacitor is the much higher capacity for the same form factor compared to non polarized capacitors Adjustable parameters Capacity 1E 4 1E7 uF 1 Inductor An inductor is
322. ist Export dialog window Parts List Export W Column Header Quotation Marks Delimiter gt Tabulator l Comma Semicolon Other an Ge Figure 13 7 Parts List Export dialog window Column Header If this option is selected then the names of the attributes appear in the first row of the text file Quotation Marks Select this option to set the field elements in quotation marks Delimiter The selected separator is used to separate the columns 13 5 Insert tube list You can insert a tube list into a circuit diagram Inthe menu select Tube List to insert a tube list into the circuit diagram Alternatively you can click the i button In the selection dialog box that opens select Tube List Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 247 The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair Click the position in the circuit diagram where you want to insert the tube list A dialog window then opens where you can select the associated tubing and customize the appearance Include This Page s Components Only Include All Project Files Include Selected Files Include This Page s Compo nents Only Include All Project Files Include Selected Files 248 Figure 13 8 Tube List dialog window ncluded Pages tab Lists only the tubes in the associated circuit Lists all tubes in the active project Lists all tubes in the selected circuit in the active project Festo
323. ized to meet the flow requirements Discuss the accuracy of the time delay valve 105 Time delay valve normally closed The time delay valve is a combinational valve consisting of a 3 2 way valve throttle relief valve and an air reservoir The 3 2 way valve can be a valve with normal position open or closed The delay time is generally 0 30 seconds for both types of valves By using additional reservoirs the time can be extended When the neces sary control pressure from 12 has built up in the air reservoir the pilot spool of the 3 2 way valve is actuated An accurate switch over time is assured if the air is clean and the pressure constant Discuss the need for clean and stable air for accuracy Discuss the relationship between time delay and the reservoir size Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 106 Circuit Time delay valve A double acting cylinder is to glue components The push button operates the clamping cylinder and trips a roller lever valve The cylinder is to remain fully extended for a time of 6 seconds and then immediately retracts to the initial position A new start cycle is only possible after the cylinder has fully retracted The cylinder advance is to be slow and the retraction adjustable but fast Refer to topic 104 for construction of the valve 107 Exercise The time delay valve Problem A double acting cylinder is used to press together glued compo 2 nen
324. justable parameters Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 108 Pilot to close check valve spring loaded If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2 and the nominal pressure then the non return valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the flow Additionally the non return valve can be closed using the pilot line 10 Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 2 MPa 0 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 1 MPa 0 05 Area ratio 0 1 10 3 3 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 108 Nozzle The nozzle represents a pneumatic resistance Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Throttle valve The setting of the throttle valve is set by means of a rotary knob Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute resistance value can be set This means that in reality different throttle valves can generate different resistance values despite identical settings Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 Orifice The orifice represents a pneumatic resistance Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 Orifice adjustable lt The orifice represents a variable pneumatic resistance Adjustable parameters Opening level O 100 100 Standar
325. k Target Text 70 layer Text Text Attributes B ee E Link Alignment Horizontal Vertical C Left Top Center Center Right C Bottom Tet Attributes Target Tet Display Target Text Alignment z Horizontal Vertical Show Description Left Top Show Locati i i ai E Center Center Right C Bottom Figure 7 3 Cross reference dialog window This text is displayed in the cross reference Defines the labels via which the linked cross references are identi fied If this option is activated then the label entered constitutes a link to a target object The cross reference only works in the direction of the target object in this case This option can be combined with the Show Location option to show the location of the target object If the Show Location option is activated then the location of the target object will be displayed here The representation of the location is defined in the Cross Reference Representation tab in the properties dialog window for the page or project Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM If Show Description is activated then the text of the corresponding cross reference is displayed for paired cross references otherwise the description of the target object is displayed Display Target Text If this option is activated then the above mentioned text from the Target Textfield is displayed below the text for this cross reference
326. l Panel You may need the matching device drivers for Windows Additional drivers may be necessary in order to link FluidSIM to external hardware Compatible drivers for Festo s EasyPort can be found in the Support subfolder on the DVD Communication with other applications via OPC requires special auxiliary modules which are likewise located in the Support folder For more details about OPC see the section OPC and DDE communication with other applications Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 17 2 2 Installation with program activation We recommend activating the program via a PC connected to the internet During installation you will be prompted to activate FluidSIM There are three ways of doing so Online activation This variant allows fully automatic activation if the installation PC has direct access to the internet Indirect activation In this case the PC on which FluidSIM is to be installed does not need to have direct internet access Instead the subsequent dialog window gives you an internet address and an individual ly generated license key You can then generate a matching ac tivation code by accessing the displayed internet address from any computer You then enter that activation code in the field provided in the activation dialog box on the installation PC Call Festo to receive your activation code If you do not have an internet connection or if the internet con nection
327. l valves 1 Designations for directional control valves always give firstly the number of ports and then the number of switching positions Direc tional control valves always have at least two ports and at least two switching positions The number of squares shows the number of possible switching positions of a valve Arrows within the squares show the direction of flow Lines shown how the ports are intercon nected in the various switching positions of the valve The designa tions always relate to the normal position of the valve 18 Circuit symbols for directional control valves 2 This illustration shows the circuit symbols for 4 2 and 5 2 way valves There are two general methods for the designation of ports using either the letters P T R A B and L or consecutively using A B C D etc the first method is the preferred one in the rele vant standard 19 Circuit symbols for directional control valves 3 The illustration shows the circuit symbols for 4 3 way valves with various mid positions 20 Circuit symbols for manual operation The switching position of a directional control valve can be changed by various actuation methods The symbol for the valve is accord Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 597 stem or push button spring roller stem Unicsboorencunpsscnil io pe 7 Jaya Cin arega haril kale we Wege rneasg T a Ak r Aweera erii Timer co e e E L
328. lect the menu item from the menu or click the button to define a cable or wiring This activates a mode that allows you to insert a cable symbol by making two consecutive clicks All of the lines that are defined by the cable symbol are initially assigned to wiring If you want to use a cable instead of wiring you can assign a cable object to the symbol using the properties dialog window for the cable symbol Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 265 Layer Cable Wiring Wires 266 W2 Display Identification Display Attributes Reverse Direction Renumber From Identification From To Display Find Target Find B 2 Find Figure 16 6 Cable Symboldialog window Wires tab Defines the drawing layer for the cable symbol Defines whether the cable symbol represents a cable or wiring comprising single wires Wiring is not listed in cable maps etc If Wiring is selected then an identification can be specified that can be displayed with Display dentification If Cable is selected then an existing cable object can be assigned to the cable symbol using a drop down list A new cable object can be created using the button Clicking opens the properties dialog window for the selected cable object In order to analyze cable maps the component connections that join a wire must be determined The connectors are automatically entered in the list box if they can be uniquely assigned
329. lectrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 5 2 way solenoid valve The solenoid valve is controlled by applying a voltage signal at the solenoid coil The flow passes freely from 1 to 4 By stopping the signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 If no signal is applied to the valve it can be manually operated This valve is derived from a configurable 5 n way valve You find this valve in Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical sprin
330. lic resistance Non return valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 06 Pressure regulator balanced The valve restricts the pressure at port P to the set value compared with the pressure at T If the hydraulic force at the sealing cone exceeds the spring force the sealing cone lifts out of the seat and allows oil to flow to port T The valve closes again once the pressure in port P drops again The cushioning piston acts like a shock absorber to increase stability The spring pretension can be adjusted at the hand wheel Oil flows through the non return valve when the pressure at port T is greater Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM than at P Since the spring chamber is separated from the oil by the stem the pressure in T has no effect on the limiting pressure Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 3 5 Hydraulic resistance Pressure relief valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 09 Hydraulic resistance Non return valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 7 P Counterbalance valve The valve limits pressure at port P vis a vis pressure applied to T to 7 pis the selected value Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 0 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 1 Hydraulic resistance Pressure control valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Area ratio 0 1 10 3 Hydraulic resistance Non return valve 1e 6 1000
331. lighted in color in the cable lists The associated cable symbols are listed in rows in the table You can jump to the associated cable symbol using the Find f button The User Defined Properties tab in the properties dialog window for the cable symbol lists the cable specific product properties such as Cable Type and Length These properties and the entries in the Cable tab are analyzed in the cable map etc Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 269 16 2 1 Manage cables All cables within a circuit can be listed and renamed using the Manage Cables menu item from the menu You open the properties dialog window for the relevant cable object using the button You can also call up the cables of all circuits belonging to the pro ject using the Manage Cables menu item from the menu Manage Cables Projectl Create New 4 x Description a an Find Target Figure 16 10 dialog window Containing Page Shows which circuit the cable is assigned to You can edit this assignment within a project You can add a new cable object to the project using the button Each cable object must be assigned to a page 270 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Clicking the button first opens the following dialog window where you can define the assignment Browse Pages Please select a page to assign the new cable to Cancel Help F
332. lines and insert signal connections 345 20 5 1 Free draw signal lines 345 20 5 2 Drawing signal lines from signals 347 20 5 3 Draw signal lines from diagram support points 347 20 6 Insert additional signal lines 348 20 7 Insert row 348 20 8 Delete row 348 20 9 Additional editing functions 349 20 9 1 Zoom 349 20 9 2 Undo editing steps 349 21 The Component Library 350 21 1 Hydraulic Components 350 21 1 1 Service Components 350 21 1 2 Configurable Way Valves 358 21 1 3 Mechanically Actuated Directional Valves 362 21 1 4 Solenoid actuated Directional Valves 370 21 1 5 Shutoff Valves 376 21 1 6 Pressure Control Valves 379 10 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 1 7 Pressure Switches 21 1 8 Flow Control Valves 21 1 9 Continuous valves 21 1 10 Actuators 21 1 11 Measuring Devices 21 2 Pneumatic Components 21 2 1 Supply Elements 21 2 2 Configurable Way Valves 21 2 3 Mechanically Operated Directional Valves 21 2 4 Solenoid Operated Directional Valves 21 2 5 Pneumatically Operated Directional Valves 21 2 6 Shutoff Valves and Flow Control Valves 21 2 7 Pressure Operated Switches 21 2 8 Pressure Operated Switches 21 2 9 Vacuum Technique 21 2 10 Valve Groups 21 2 11 Continuous valves 21 2 12 Actuators 21 2 13 Measuring Instruments 21 3 Electrical Components 21 3 1 Power Supply 21 3 2 Actuators Signal Devices 21 3 3 Measuring Instruments Sensors 21 3 4 General Switches 21 3 5 Delay Switch
333. ling you to manage the terminal strips in the project Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Manage Cables Manage Cross References Properties 19 9 View O m O sO O O O D oO Oo gt oO aS D 5 n n Oo gt a e e5 D o La G a2 D Z O0 oO oa o z Gs 5 aze oa o 5 a T 2 O ao t o a gt 5 5 Oo fas fas oO oO Oo 5 gt oq oq lt lt A O O mj a or or ro Oo rap 3 3 w 5 5 oa oa D D E D D Oo c a gt O sg lt VN U Oo ro n Ss O rt Ww Circuit Diagram Switches from the parts list view to the circuit diagram view Parts List WN a fap WN O D a gt O lt re N om a a gt Library Shows or hides the libraries window Project Shows or hides the window for managing the project files Standard Size Displays the circuit diagram in its original size Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 327 328 Previous View Displays the previous view of the circuit diagram Repeatedly activating this function switches back and forth between the views Fit to Window Set the zoom level to fit the entire circuit diagram into the window TC zx oO O c al lt am Wn ig View Detail J ie p 5 ia 7 ost gt ca gt ig 5 ig ion lt Q pe Z uQq se ig Q rt f
334. losed liquid a pressure p is produced which acts throughout the liquid Pascal s Law Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 599 600 Hydrostatic pressure has been ignored here The term pressure propagation is also used to mean the pulse velocity in liquids approx 1000 m s 28 Power transmission If a force F_1 is applied to an area A_1 of a liquid a pressure p results If as in this case the pressure acts on a larger surface A_2 then a larger counter force F_2 must be maintained If A_2 is three times as large as A1 then F_2 will also be three times as large as F_1 Hydraulic power transmission is comparable to the mechanical law of levers 29 Displacement transmission 1 If the input piston of the hydraulic press travels a distance s_1 a volume of fluid will be displaced This same volume displaces the output piston by the distance s_2 If the area of this piston is larger than that of the input piston the distance s_2 will be shorter than s_1 Hydraulic displacement transmission is comparable to the mechanical law of levers 30 Displacement transmission 2 See topic 29 31 Pressure transfer 1 The fluid pressure p_1 exerts a force F_1 on the surface A_1 which is transferred via the piston rod to the small piston The force F_1 thus acts on the surface A_2 and produces the fluid pressure p2 Since the piston area A_2 is smaller than the piston area A_1 t
335. lowing circuit Grafcet Grafcet19 circ illustrates access to circuit variables Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 197 198 7 A E EE Figure 10 20 Access to circuit variables The GrafControl GRAFCET mode is set in the circuit properties otherwise the action could not act directly on the circuit The condi tion checks if the voltage of voltmeter M1 is greater than 10 volts The complete variable name of the voltage is M1 U as described above and is displayed on the action in the circuit Once the simulation starts the voltage can be increased interactively in the function generator If the voltage exceeds 10 volts the action becomes active y offset 10 872 v 100 100 51 Tez M11 iow Figure 10 21 Access to circuit variables The variable S1 is set which is an automatic alias of S1 state This sets the state of switch S1 to 1 actuated and the switch opens Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 10 5 Monitoring with GRAFCET actions Enable monitoring Monitoring condition false Action failed A GRAFCET can be used to monitor the proper functioning of a fluidic or electrical circuit The monitoring functionality in FluidSIM allows you to check whether GRAFCET actions executed in a circuit resulted in the desired behavior This is done by evaluating so called monitoring conditions in t
336. lues of predefined placeholders attributes of a circuit or the project The text component must be linked to the corresponding attribute for this The linked attribute is defined in the input field of the Edit Tex tab in the Properties dialog window for the text component The activated Attribute Link option defines that the text in the text field should not be displayed but rather interpreted as a link Example Assuming that your project is called Project1 and possesses the Supplier attribute with the value Festo You project contains the Circuit1 circuit and you would like to display the value of the Supplier attribute in this example namely the value Festo in this circuit diagram Insert a text component into the circuit drawing by selecting the text element on the drawing elements toolbar and then left clicking the circuit drawing The Properties dialog window for the text component then opens Note You can open the dialog window of an existing text compo nent by double clicking it or using the menu and the menu item Activate the Attribute Link option and then click the button A window opens displaying the hierarchy of all of the available attributes Please note that only those objects are listed that have an identification assigned by the user Identifications beginning with a question mark are not listed These are identifications that have been automatically assigned
337. luidSIM issues a warning if an alias name is entered twice Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Controller assignment Axis Dead zone Range As described in the Adjusting component parameters during the simulation section many component parameters can be altered with the mouse during the simulation FluidSIM also offers the option of controlling parameters via connected game controllers e g Microsoft Xbox controller This is especially practical when you need to modify several parameters at the same time during a simulation Here you can define which axis you want to use to control the parameter during the simulation To assign an axis simply click in the field and briefly actuate the desired controller axis FluidSIM then enters the desired axis This value determines how much movement of the controller axis is required to trigger a signal This prevents unintended modification of values from very small movements of the fingers Sometimes you may wish to use the game controller to control only a certain range This can be necessary above all because the con trol levers on most controllers spring back to their zero position automatically as soon as they are released Using the mouse to gether with the straight line on the graph you can interactively determine how the controller position relates to the parameter Controller assignment is not available for the simulation variables calculated b
338. lve closes again In simple terms the pilot pressure is generated by the input pressure The flow direction is indicated by the arrow The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a pilot stage and a main stage When open there is less volumetric flow at the pilot stage that leads internally to connection T The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 5 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 3 5 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 08 Pressure relief valve with pilot control The valve is closed in the idle position The hydraulic fluid drains off at T when the pressure difference at the connections P and T exceeds the nominal pressure If the pressure falls below the preset value the valve closes again The flow direction is marked with an arrow The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a pilot stage and a main stage When open there is less volumetric flow at the pilot stage that leads to connection Y The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 5 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 3 5 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 08 P Shut off counterbalancing valve The valve connects port P with port T if the pressure set at control port X is exceeded
339. ly set to Hi Otherwise for LOGO Soft example an AND gate with three inputs would not function as expected if only two inputs were wired So that the circuit does not become cluttered with unnecessary permanently Hi level signals FluidSIM can set unused inputs on the relevant components to Hi automatically If you do not want this automatic function you can switch it off To prevent misunderstandings regarding unused digital inputs FluidSIM displays a corresponding message at the start of every simulation If you do not want this message to ap pear you can switch it off 1 Note that these values are only used if no others are defined in the page or project properties Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 309 18 11 GRAFCET GRAFCET mode Active step GrafEdit GRAFCET is not simulated GrafView GRAFCET visualizes simulation GrafControl GRAFCET controls simulation IM Enable monitoring ii D Enabled transition Active action Monitoring condition false Action failed W Pause simulation on action failed E Play sound on action failed GRAFCET mode GrafEdit GRAFCET is not simulated GrafView GRAFCET visual izes simulation GrafControl GRAFCET con trols simulation Enable monitoring 310 st m Reset Figure 18 11 Options dialog window GRAFCET tab Here you can set the mode that FluidSIM will apply when handling GRAFCETs during the simula
340. m 0 1 20 bar 4 25 Air consumption at 600 kPa 1 1000 l min 11 6 Max suction rate 0 1 1000 l min 6 446 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Vacuum suction nozzle The vacuum suction nozzle creates its vacuum based on the ejector oie principle In this case compressed air flows from connection 1 to 3 2 creating a vacuum at connection 1v A sucker can be connected to the vacuum connection 1v Stopping the input of compressed air at connection 1 stops any suction also Adjustable parameters Maximum vacuum 0 999 0 bar 0 85 Operating pressure for max vacuum 0 1 20 bar 4 25 Air consumption at 600 kPa 1 1000 l min 11 6 Max suction rate 0 1 1000 l min 6 Single stage ejector with repulsion mechanism vacuum genera tor 3 The vacuum generator functions like the vacuum suction nozzle except that an integrated reservoir is filled with air during the suction process When the input line is switched off the com pressed air stored in the reservoir discharges in a pulse via the port quick exhaust securely repelling the suctioned workpiece from the vacuum cup The volume can be enlarged by means of an additional port This additional volume allows the energy of the vent pulse to be varied as required Adjustable parameters Maximum vacuum 0 999 0 bar 0 85 Operating pressure for max vacuum 0 1 20 bar 4 25 Air consumption at 600 kPa 1 1000 l mi
341. m it will always stop at the specified target position Vary the initial piston position and observe how the cylinder reaches its setpoint position every time without fail To study the closed loop control procedure more closely let s examine the cylinder s displacement and velocity up to its setpoint position You can do this by adding a state diagram adjusting it to a Suitable size and dragging the cylinder onto the diagram A dialog box will open where you should select the two quantity values Position and Velocity Set the y offset of the function generator to O and the start position of the cylinder to O and start the simulation The cylinder advances to the middle losing velocity continuously until it comes to a stop Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 175 Designation Quantity value Velocity miz Figure 9 43 Position displacement and change in velocity during closed loop control It is often desirable for the cylinder to move at maximum velocity until it reaches its setpoint position and then to stop as suddenly as possible You can do this by amplifying the position signal of the displacement encoder which will accelerate the switchover of the regulating valve This makes use of the fact that the PID controller limits the output voltage for the proportional valve solenoid to 10 V 176 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Set the
342. m as follows 290 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Terminal Strip x1 Terminal Link Plug wire Link Identification Figure 16 32 Proceed in the same way to set a link plug between 8 and 9 at level 2 and a wire link between 9 and 10 The terminal diagram then has the following appearance Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 291 Terminal Strip x1 Terminal Link Plug wire Link identification Figure 16 33 16 5 Contact images The contact images can be displayed within a circuit diagram be neath relay coils and similar symbols The contact images list all the contacts of the associated relay coil and show which current paths these contacts are in The division of the page or circuit diagram can be defined using the page dividers TO do this select the Display Contact Images menu item from the menu The contact images of the current circuit diagram are shown or hidden Contact images can be highlighted moved and aligned like other symbols 292 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM S1 A Q1 K1 K1 f 5 Figure 16 34 You can have all of the contacts in a contact image displayed in a list and customize the appearance by double clicking the contact image or highlighting the contact image and selecting the menu item from the menu Festo Didactic GmbH amp C
343. m2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Configurable 4 n way valve The configurable 4 n way valve is a way valve with two connec tions where both its body elements operation modes are user definable Additionally the pneumatic connections can be closed with either blind plugs or exhausts Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Configurable 5 n way valve The configurable 5 n way valve is a way valve with two connec tions where both its body elements operation modes are user definable Additionally the pneumatic connections can be closed with either blind plugs or exhausts Adjustable parameters Desired position 0
344. main compo nent using this button 238 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Parts list management and analyses Chapter 13 Various analyses can be inserted into a circuit diagram using the menu item Alternatively you can also use the ij button on the toolbar The following dialog window opens Parts List Teminal diagram Cable Map Cable List Wiring List Tube List Cancel Help Figure 13 1 List Table dialog window The following analyses can be inserted into the circuit diagram using this dialog Parts List Terminal diagram Cable Map Cable List Wiring List and Tube List The use of parts lists is described below The use and function of the other analyses are described in the corresponding chapters FluidSIM creates parts lists that are automatically updated in the background while the circuits are being edited If a parts list has been added to a circuit diagram as described above it can be used like a symbol The use of parts lists as a spe cial page type is described under Display parts list You can customize the appearance of the parts list under Proper ties in the Appearance tab You can see the effects of the settings straight away in the preview on the right hand side Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 239 If the Lines per Page option is selected you can specify the num ber of lines
345. mbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 423 424 component cancels the operated state and returns the valve to its starting position This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 3 2 way valve with pushbutton normally open Pressing the pushbutton operates the valve Connection 1 is shut Releasing the pushbutton allows the valve to returns to its starting position through the use of a return spring The passes freely from 1to 2 By holding down the Shift key and simultaneously click ing on the component with the mouse cursor FluidSIM keeps the valve in permanent operating position Simpl
346. mbols do not need to be used for these switches in FluidSIM The simple switch symbols can be used instead Figure 9 24 Simple switch symbols 9 9 Adjusting component parameters during the simulation Most components have parameters that can be adjusted in Edit Mode Some of these components have already been discussed in earlier sections Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 153 154 You can open the dialog box for adjusting the parameters by dou ble clicking or with Properties Several components can be adjusted during the simulation in the same way as they would be in reality For example the operating pressure of the compressed air supply the delivery rate of the pump the opening level of the throttle valve or the resistance of the potentiometer can be altered continuously To do this you do not need to open the properties dialog box and then close it with ok all you need to do is click once on the component to open a window with sliders Your changes take effect on the simulation immediately As soon as you click another component or an empty space in the window the dialog window with the sliders disappears automatically In Simulation Mode when you move the mouse over a component that allows such real time adjustments the mouse pointer changes Throttle check valve Opening level Figure 9 25 Adjusting the opening level during the simulation For precision adjustmen
347. me 8 2 The different simulation modes In addition to the functions for simulating circuits as presented in the previous section W 11 there are also the following sup plementary functions Simulation reset and restart Simulation in single step mode Simulation up to a state change Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 93 8 2 1 Reset and restart of the simulation With or Reset a running or paused simulation of a circuit is reset and the circuit is returned to its initial state The simulation is then restarted immediately 8 2 2 Single step mode In single step mode the simulation will stop after a small step More exactly clicking or Single Step starts the simulation for a short period of time about 0 01 0 1 seconds of simulation time in the real system before switching back into pause mode 11 You can switch into single step mode directly from an actively running simulation This makes it easy to focus on key moments in the simulation 8 2 3 Simulation to a state change 94 Clicking gt or Simulate until State Change causes the simulation to start and run until a state change happens the simu lation then pauses 11 A state change happens when one of the following takes place 1 Acylinder piston moves against a stop 2 Avalve switches over or is actuated 3 Arelay switches over 4 Aswitchis actuated Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Sys
348. me 58 Frame File C Program Files 6 86 Didactic AluidSIM5 frm Frame_ Ad circ Remove Local Frame Reload Frame Attributes Figure 6 1 dialog window inserting a drawing frame If this option is activated then the drawing frame specified in the project is copied into the circuit The path and the file used are displayed in the Frame File line This button opens a dialog window in which an included frame can be selected These frame files are located in the frm directory and are compiled in the project file frames prj Opens the frame file for editing Removes the drawing frame from the circuit The drawing frame s attributes remain attributes of the project or circuit Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Reload Frame Attributes When inserting a drawing frame the attributes of the text compo nents of the drawing frame are listed These attributes are saved with the project or the circuit drawing and can be edited and delet ed The button reloads all of the attrib utes from the drawing frame thus updating the attribute list of the project or the circuit drawing Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 59 60 Select Drawing Frame So Drawing frame AD Drawing frame A Drawing frame A2 Drawing frame AS Drawing frame A4 Portra Title block 1 wide C Festo Auid Draw P5 irm Frame_A4 circ Attributes Project Additi
349. me These attributes are replaced by the corresponding attribute values when using the drawing frame in a project or circuit diagrams Edit the attribute values in the Properties dialog window of the project or the circuit diagram Clicking on a text component of the drawing frame opens the Properties dialog window of the project or the circuit which contains the attribute which the text component refers to Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 6 2 Usea drawing frame Drawing frames can be copied into a project and or a circuit dia gram Insert the drawing frame via the Properties dialog window of a project or a circuit 1 All of the objects belonging to a drawing frame are inserted into the circuit diagram as a copy Changing the file with the drawing frame at a later date does not have any effect on the circuit diagram which the drawing frame was inserted into When copying the objects belonging to the drawing frame all of the attributes are generated with the drawing frame s text components refer to and which do not exist in the project or circuit Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 57 Page Properties File Name Description loth faecal CAUsers Festo Documents Fluid SIM noname 1 circ noname 1 Page number Drawing Frame Drawing Size Page Dividers Simulation GRAFCET Inherit From Project E Inherit From Project Pick Edit Remove Local Fra
350. min2 I2 0 001 Heater The hydraulic fluid s optimal viscosity can be reached quickly through the use of a heater Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 001 Connection hydraulic A hydraulic connection is a place where a hydraulic line can be attached to To simplify the line drawing process a connection appears as a Small circle in Edit Mode Hydraulic connections can be shut by means of a blind plug An open hydraulic connection Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM may result in leaking oil FluidSIM thus pops up a warning mes sage if some hydraulic connection was left open Note that at each hydraulic connection values for the flow and pressure can be dis played Line hydraulic A hydraulic line is used to connect two hydraulic connectors These may be either a simple hydraulic connection or a T junction A hydraulic line is normally treated as an ideal connection with no pressure drop being included in the simulation A frictional loss can be entered via the Physical mode options If you select Simple resistance only the Hydraulic resistance parameter will be included in the simulation If you select Pipe model Hagen Poiseuille Blasius a complex empirical calculation is carried out using a model based on Hagen Poiseuille for laminar flows and a model based on Blasius for turbulent flows utilizing the Reynolds number and the wall
351. mp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM IY oe Figure 8 22 Simple circuit with a potentiometer The potentiometer allows the resistance to be modified using a rotating or sliding controller In FluidSIM you can click the potenti ometer during the simulation and modify the resistance value as with a real potentiometer Start the simulation and display the amperages using Quantity Values Alternatively you can also press the key repeatedly Now click the potentiometer and watch how the current flow changes Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode Select the state diagram from the component library and move it into the circuit window The state diagram records the quantity values for the most im portant components and displays them in graph form Move the state diagram to a free space in the circuit drawing and drag and drop the ammeter onto the diagram A dialog box opens where you can select the quantity values you are interested in In this instance only the amperage is of interest Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 117 Start the simulation vary the resistance value of the potenti ometer and observe the diagram Potentiometer R Potentiometer position 16 2 Figure 8 23 Circuit with state diagram for the ammeter Set the simulation to Pause and move the mouse pointer onto the curve on the diagram If you move the mouse along
352. mp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 459 460 Pneumatic linear drive with shape fitting adaptor The sledge of the double acting cylinder without a piston rod is controlled by alternating the compressed air input This type of linear drive conveys forces by means of a shape fitting piston sledge construction The slitted cylinder prohibits the torsion of the Slider Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000 N 120 Break away force at dp_ ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Air motor The air motor transforms pneumatic energy into mechanical energy Adjustable parameters External torque 1000 1000N m 0 Displacement 0 001 5 l 0 1 Friction 0 001 100N m s rad 3 Moment of inertia 0 0001 10 kg m2 0 0001 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Semi Rotary actuator The semi r
353. mponent open the prop erties dialog and adjust the configuration accordingly Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120 Break away force at dp ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Single acting cylinder The piston rod of a single acting cylinder is operated by the input of compressed air at the front end position When the compressed air is shut off the piston returns to its starting position via a return spring The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be used to operate a proximity switch Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 453 454 Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate aut
354. n 11 6 Max suction rate 0 1 1000 l min 6 Volume 0 001 101 0 05 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 447 448 Suction cup The suction cup can be used together with the vacuum suction nozzle to grip objects by suction Lowering the cup onto an object is simulated in FluidSIM in Simulation Mode by clicking on the component An additional click lifts the suction cup Adjustable parameters Diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Load to be lifted 0 001 1000 kg 0 1 Safety factor 0 1 100 1 Vacuum security valve If multiple suction cups are supplied with vacuum by one vacuum suction nozzle the vacuum will collapse if one or more cups do not form a suction grip on the workpiece or workpieces To prevent this so called vacuum security valves are used Vacuum security valves are installed between the vacuum suction nozzle and the suction cup If during vacuum generation a suction cup is uncov ered or only partly covered the vacuum security valve automatical ly stops the influx of air If the suction cup is open to the environ ment the float is pressed up against the housing by the vacuum In this position air can only flow through a small hole at the front of the float greatly reducing the air flow If a workpiece comes in contact with the suction cup the air flow is reduced and the spring forces the float downward The air flow flows around the float with the larger opening allowing
355. n where you can select the quantity values to be logged and can assign different colors to them Dragging onto the diagram again opens the dialog box again allowing you to change your selection If no quantity value is assigned to a component it is not displayed in the diagram This concludes the example Further editing and simulation con cepts are described in the next section 8 3 3 Example with an electronic circuit Create the circuit shown in the figure Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 111 Da 2 O OM oe Figure 8 17 Simple electronic circuit Now try to simulate this circuit Start the simulation with gt or with or with FOH Then all voltages and currents are calculated and the potential from the positive terminal of the electrical power source to the pushbutton is colored Click the pushbutton and hold down the mouse button The current now flows through the pushbutton to the ground via the ammeter and the light Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Figure 8 18 Simulated circuit The values for current and voltage can be read on the measuring devices So far the circuit is a purely electric circuit strictly speak ing Now let s add an electronic component the diode Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode Modify the circuit as shown in the figure and start the simulation Ensure that the diode is installed as
356. n is not capable of operating in this form this must be rectified by correcting the circuit diagram If the solution with exhaust flow control is selected it must be borne in mind that the cylinder flow control valve and connectors must be suitable for this intensified pressure The solution chosen is the circuit with the back pressure valve in this case the load is clamped hydraulically and a pressure intensification effect does not occur since the pressure can be adjustable by means of the pres sure relief valve as appropriate to the load A non return valve must be installed to provide a by pass on the return stroke Inlet flow control cannot be used to control a tractive load the load forces oil out of the piston rod chamber faster than oil can flow into the piston chamber Vacuum is created and air will escape 171 Exercise Feed control for a lathe speed control The feed movement of a lathe has previously been carried out manually In future this is to be performed automatically by a hydraulic control system The feed movement must be adjustable and remain constant even with changing tool loads Since a simple throttle valve is not able to provide a constant feed speed under changing load a 2 way flow control valve must be used On the basis of a circuit diagram with data for the no load situation val ues for pressures pressure differences and feed speed under load Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems
357. n reality different throttle valves can generate different resistance values despite identical settings Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Hydraulic resistance 1e 7 100 MPa min2 l2 0 01 Related Topics Throttle valve Check valve 144 One way flow control valve 1 ODG e gt Figure 22 2 Technical page of the throttle check valve Under the heading Related topics but also when appropriate in the component description cross references for related instruction material and components are defined By clicking on a cross refer ence the related page will automatically be displayed 22 1 2 Component Illustrations Component illustrations provide useful information relating a component s function This may include a sectional view of the component but also illustrations of the component s usage within a circuit diagram For several components their sectional view can be animated like a cartoon Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 529 Select an air motor 4 2 way hand lever valve in case of hy draulic version and click on Component description under the menu The following dialog box appears 530 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Component library Componentlibrary Pneumatic Components Actuators Airmotor Pneumatischer Motor Air motor The alr motor transforms pneumatic energy into mechanical energy Related Topic
358. n the cylinder is calculated automatically by FluidSIM from the entered cylinder dimensions If the load is lifted or pulled without coming into con Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM tact with a surface enter O for both values In practice it is very difficult to arrive at reliable values for friction FluidSIM therefore offers set friction coefficients for some combinations of materials to provide a rough guide If you compare other tables of friction values you will notice that the specifications usually measured in experiments vary greatly from table to table You should therefore be cautious when interpreting the results of simulations influenced by friction Nonetheless varying the friction values does allow you to see clearly the physical effects of static and sliding friction Note also that the mounting angle influences the friction force from the moved load You can adjust the mounting angle on the Component Parameters tab Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 127 9 2 3 Force profile ranertier Symbol Name CONFCYL Description Linear Drive Pneumatic wit E Display Fart number Display in Parts Lists Identification F Display Component Parameters User Defined Properties Force profile Extemal load Extraction Constant force Apply force profile Retraction Extraction Piston Position 0 100 di 101 0753 Extemal force
359. nal valve solenoid is used for position controlled continuous valves where the control and amplifier com ponent is built into the valve If you inadvertently use a label to link a directional control valve to a proportional valve solenoid or a proportional valve to a simple valve solenoid FluidSIM issues a warning The following two sections provide a brief introduction to the options for open loop controland closed loop control with FluidSIM The term open loop control means that an output variable changes as a function of an nput variable n this specific case the voltage on the proportional valve solenoid or amplifier represents an input variable The valve piston of the proportional valve is shifted in a particular direction to a greater or lesser distance as a function of the value and the direction of the electrical current caused by that voltage by means of an amplifier This piston displacement is the output variable If the pressure at the valve port is constant the flow rate can be controlled in this way If on the other hand the flow rate is constant the pressure drop will change as a function of the opening level determined by the valve position The term closed loop control is used when the output variable or a quantity value affected by it is used in turn as the input variable It is also quite possible for multiple output variables and quantity values dependent on them to be combined together with
360. namic characteristics with minimal hystere sis less than 0 3 short actuating time typically 5 ms anda higher upper frequency limit approx 100 Hz are achieved through an integrated electronic position control for the slide distance Thus the valve as control element and especially in combination with a higher ranked position controller is suitable for the positioning of a pneumatic cylinder Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 773 21 2 12 Actuators ao Configurable cylinder m The configurable cylinder can be customized via its properties m dialog Almost any combination of piston type Single acting dou 4 ble acting the specification of the piston rods double ended with magnetic coupling or slide and the number none one two is nee 452 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM possible An end position cushioning without with adjustable can also be defined FluidSIM automatically adjusts the symbol according to the preset configuration In addition a load to be moved including possible static and sliding friction and a variable force profile can be defined in the properties dialog In the compo nent library of FluidSIM there are several pre configured cylinders that can be inserted in your circuit and directly used Should no suitable symbol be available then simply choose the component with the most similarity to the required co
361. nces a forming tool on an edge folding device If a sheet is detected as present and if a push button is pressed then the cylinder is to advance For rapid forward travel the circuit utilizes a quick exhaust valve The forward movement folds the edge of a flat sheet If the push button is released the double acting cylinder is to return slowly to the initial position 90 Exercise The quick exhaust valve Solution Initial position In the initial state the cylinder assumes the retract ed position If both of the 3 2 way valves are actuated pressure is rae Ti present at the output port 2 of the two pressure valve 1V4 This An reverses the 5 2 way control valve The cylinder advances with air being supplied via an unrestricted passage through the one way flow control valve 1V1 The actuator travels rapidly to its forward end position since the pressure space on the piston rod side is rapidly exhausted through the quick exhaust valve If both 3 2 way valves remain actuated the cylinder remains in the forward end position If the push button is released the actuator is no longer pressurized since the control valve reverses via the return spring The actuator travels to its initial position under conditions of re stricted flow valve 1V1 and therefore at a reduced speed Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 579 91 Exercise The quick exhaust valve Note ml The quick exhaust valve shoul
362. nd display electrical part Pressure sensor with display electrical part Flow sensor electrical part Position transmitter The position transmitter is used for continuous detection of the piston position of magnetically sensed drives The piston position is sensed without contact magnetic The measurement result is output in the sensing range of 50 mm as a current and voltage signal via two analogue outputs A displacement proportional output signal is supplied within the sensing range Adjustable parameters Voltage Cylinder retracted 100 100 V 2 Voltage Cylinder extracted 100 100 V 10 Current Cylinder retracted 10000 10000 mA 4 Current Cylinder extracted 10000 10000 mA 20 Minimum voltage 1 300 V 15 Idle current 24 V 1 10000 mA 32 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 473 Signal converter The signal converter converts analogue voltage output signals from a sensor into switching points It closes or opens one of the two circuits Out A Out B when the adjustable switching points are reached Possible switching functions are threshold value hystere sis or window comparator The switching characteristic N C N O can also be selected Adjustable parameters Output function Make switch Break switch Make switch Switching function Threshold value Window comparator Threshold value Switching point 1 100 100 V 1 Switching
363. nd drops out immediately when current is removed Adjustable parameters Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 550 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Relay with switch on delay The relay picks up after a preset time when current is supplied and drops out immediately when current is removed Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 999s 5 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 550 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Relay with switch off delay The relay picks up immediately when current is supplied and drops out after a preset time when current is removed Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 999s 5 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 550 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 483 Relay counter The relay picks up after a predefined number of current pulses has have been counted between the connections A1 and A2 Ifa A R potential is supplied between the connections R1 and R2 the counter is reset to its predefined value In the Simulation Mode the relay counter can also be reset by clicking on it Adjustable parameters Counter 0 9999 5 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 550 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 DAY Starting current limiter m IN ee The starting current limiter consists essentially of a relay whose coil is situated between the connections IN and OV and whose i I oy switch contact is situated between the connections 24V and OUT An electronic longitudinal
364. nd select the ro Object menu item from the menu This creates a new macro object Macro objects are included in the parts lists as inde pendent components The original symbols are removed from the parts lists It is no longer possible to edit their component attrib utes Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 51 5 14 Delete symbol groups and macro objects To delete a group or a macro object select the group or the macro object and select the menu item from the menu This always deletes the outermost group In order to delete nested groups you must repeat the operation 5 15 Align symbols To align objects with each other select these and choose the de sired orientation from the menu item on the menu or click the appropriate button 5 ey ef a on the toolbar 5 16 Mirror symbols The symbols can be both horizontally and vertically mirrored Select the desired mirror axis from the menu item on the menu or click the appropriate button ss on the toolbar If you select multiple objects at the same time then every object will be mirrored separately If you wish the operation to use a common mirror axis then group the objects before the operation The geometrical properties can be entered directly via the Drawing Properties tab Enter a minus sign in front of the corresponding scaling factor in order to mirror the symbol 52 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 5
365. ndent resistor consists of an amorphous semiconduc tor film As the incidence of light is increased electrical resistance is decreased due to the internal photoelectric effect Adjustable parameters Light intensity O 100 50 Min Resistance 1 1E6 Ohm 183 Max Resistance 1 1E6 Ohm 34324 Potentiometer A potentiometer is an electrical resistance component with me chanically adjustable by means of rotation or sliding resistance values It provides three connectors and is mainly used as a contin uously adjustable voltage divider Adjustable parameters Potentiometer position O 100 0 Resistance 1E 4 100000 kOhm 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 497 498 E 7 pan fo Capacitor A capacitor is a passive electrical component which is able to store electric charge and therefore electric energy The capacitor in its basic configuration consists of two electrically conductive surfaces the electrodes The electrodes are separated through an insulating material the so called dielectric The separa tion of the two electrodes is so narrow that the electrical forces are able to act through the insulating material If a constant voltage is applied to the connectors of an uncharged capacitor a current flows for a short period of time and one of the electrodes is positively charged the other one negatively This electric charge is retained when the capacitor
366. nection 1 is shut This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 425 426 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 5 2 way valve with selection switch Turning the selection switch operates the valve The flow passes freely from 1 to 4 Releasing the switch has no effect the valve remains in its operating position Turning the switch back to its Original position allows the flow to pass freely from 1 to 2 This valve is derived from a configurable 5 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable par
367. nector and move the label using the cursor keys If you have inadvertently moved a label text so far that you cannot tell which component it belongs to you can double click the label to open the properties dialog box and then activate the associated component with Find Target 9 8 Operating switches This section describes how switches can be actuated by cylinders relays pressure or by other switches 148 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 9 8 1 Switches at cylinders Limit switches proximity switches and mechanically actuated valves can be activated by the piston of the cylinder To make this possible first you have to place a distance rule on the cylinder so that the switches can be positioned Drag the cylinder onto the drawing area and open its proper ties by double clicking Go to the Actuating labels tab and en ter a label along with the start and end positions When you close the dialog box the distance rule will appear auto matically above the cylinder You can move or copy the distance rule from one cylinder to another When the distance rule comes close to a cylinder it slots automatically into the correct position The correct position for a distance rule depends on the cylinder type Distance rules can be positioned over the cylinder housing in front of the cylinder housing next to the advanced piston rod or in both positions at the same time Figure
368. neras 31 Cylinder seals nl nll roa sone Bem marete The various piston seal arrangements are shown The double cup T TE seal materials used are Perbunan for 20 C to 80 C Viton for pe t Dorrean 20 C to 190 C Teflon for 80 C to 200 C Laks I a m Emphasize correct temperature range selection for reliability i nS 32 Mounting arrangements for cylinders pa p The type of mounting is determined by the manner in which the e m m cylinder is to be fitted to a machine or fixture The cylinder can be skeer ee e O designed with a permanent type of mounting if it does not have to _ be altered at any time Alternatively the cylinder can utilize adjust able types of mounting which can be altered by using suitable accessories on the modular construction principle Discuss application examples for each type of mounting 560 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 33 Tandem double acting cylinder This design features the characteristics of two double acting cylin ders forming a single unit This increases the effective piston area of the unit for high force applications It is suitable for applications where a large force is required but the cylinder diameter is restrict ed Compare the double acting cylinder in topic 29 34 Semi rotary actuator The rotary actuator is compact with high torque ratings The force is transmitted to the drive shaft by a rot
369. ng List Jin the selection di alog window that opens The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair Click the position in the circuit diagram where you want to insert the wiring list A dialog window then opens where you can select the associated wiring and customize the appearance 276 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Include This Page s Components Only Include All Project Files Include Selected Files Figure 16 17 dialog window ncluded Pages tab Include This Page s Compo Lists only the wirings in the associated circuit nents Only Include All Project Files Lists all wirings in the active project Include Selected Files Lists all wirings in the selected circuit in the active project Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 277 Spacing Additional Line Spacing Additional Cell Spacing Column Header Background Color Lattice Show Lattice Color E Lines per Page Figure 16 18 dialog window Appearance tab You can customize the appearance of the wiring list in the Appear ance tab You can see the effects of the settings straight away in the preview on the right hand side If the Lines per Page option is selected you can specify the num ber of lines to be displayed per page The relevant pages will also be output when the circuit diagram is printed Buttons for naviga tion are displayed underneath the page if the list is split acros
370. ng a label Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 475 TE on On oo ok CO N F YX n 476 Changeover switch switch on delayed Changeover switch with delayed changeover after pickup Switch on delayed changeover switches are created by using a general changeover switch and setting a label Break switch switch off delayed Switch with delayed closing after dropout Switch off delayed break switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Make switch switch off delayed Switch with delayed opening after dropout Switch off delayed make switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label Changeover switch switch off delayed Changeover switch with delayed changeover after dropout Switch off delayed changeover switches are created by using a general changeover switch and setting a label Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 3 6 Limit Switches o7 Limit switch break Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch Limit switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Switch with roll break Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod The switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch Switches with roll are created by using a general break switch settin
371. ng a graphical repre sentation of the function of a component or component group This can consist of simple circuit symbols or entire circuits Symbols can be inserted into their own circuits and linked between the connect ing points The insert can be performed either via the menu or via drag and drop from a library window Symbols can be com piled into library files with the 1ib file suffix Libraries Libraries are hierarchically organized collections of symbols In addition to the standard library which users cannot modify users can compile any desired number of their own libraries You can find functions for organizing the libraries on the menu as well as on the context menu of the currently active library To switch libraries use the tab in the upper margin of the library window Library files have the 1ib file suffix Circuits The default location for circuits is in the FluidSIM folder con tained in the My Documents folder defined by the operating sys tem These have the circ file suffix Note It is worthwhile to create a new sub folder in the FluidSIM directory for every customer or every project Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 25 3 3 26 Insert symbol from menu To find a specific symbol you can either enter characteristic key words in the Find Symbol dialog windows or navigate through the hierarchical structure Where necessary open a new window and select the Symbol Descr
372. ng pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 457 458 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Multiple position cylinder By connecting two cylinders of same piston diameter but different maximum stroke three piston stop positions can be realized From the first stop position the third stop can be reached either directly or via the intermediate stop Note that the maximum stroke of the second piston must be larger than the preceding one When moving back an intermediate stop requires a particular control The shorter maximum stroke is half of the other maximum stroke Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 1 1000 mm 8 Total stroke 1 2000 mm 200 Piston Position 0 2000 mm 0 Intermediate position 0 1000 mm 0 External force 10000 10000 N 0 Linear drive with solenoid coupling The sliding of the piston in the double rod cylinder is controlled by a reciprocal input of compressed air Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120
373. nly one control signal and the valve has a spring return A signal is applied at port 12 and the valve plunger is moved against the reset spring The connections 1 and 2 are then inter connected creating a signal 2 The pressure at port 12 must be sufficient to move the disc against the supply pressure Note the pneumatic symbol shows direct application of the signal at port 12 Compare the construction of the valve to the 3 2 way disc seat valve topic 43 46 3 2 way valve single pilot Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 565 566 The valve ports are labeled to ensure the correct connections are made The pilot valve is available in a range of sizes depending upon the flow rate Note the need to designate and label the ports 47 3 2 way valve internal pilot roller operated This type of valve can be used as either a normally closed valve or as a normally open valve by exchanging connections 1 and 3 and rotating the actuating head 180 degrees The force required on the roller lever is small due to the pilot operation Show the requirements to alter the valve configuration 48 3 2 way valve internal pilot normally closed To avoid high actuating force mechanically controlled directional valves can be equipped with an internal pilot valve to assist open ing Asmall hole connects the pressure connection 1 and the pilot valve If the roller is operated the pilot valve opens Compre
374. nnel and p channel JFETs Adjustable parameters Threshold voltage 0 20 V 2 5 Transconductance parameter 1e 6 1e 1 A V2 1 271e 3 Channel length modulation parameter 1e 6 1e 11 V 0 04 N channel MOSFET Transistor A metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor MOSFET is an active component with at least three terminals electrodes G Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM gate D drain and S source In some designs an additional B bulk terminal is fed to the outside Usually though B is connected internally with S Like other field effect transistors a MOSFET acts as a voltage controlled resistor meaning that the voltage between gate and source can be used to change the resistance and thus the electri cal current between drain and source by several orders of magni tude Depending on doping type MOSFETs are classified in two types n channel and p channel MOSFETs P channel MOSFET A metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor MOSFET is an active component with at least three terminals electrodes G gate D drain and S source In some designs an additional B bulk terminal is fed to the outside Usually though B is connected internally with S Like other field effect transistors a MOSFET acts as a voltage controlled resistor meaning that the voltage between gate and source can be used to change the resistance and thus the electri cal cu
375. node Right clicking a circuit node opens a context menu containing the following menu items Opens the selected circuit or the selected parts list in a window Double clicking on the node in the project tree also opens the window Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Close Windows Closes the window of the selected circuit or the selected parts list Remove From List Removes the selected circuit or the selected parts list from the project Rename Changes the description of the selected circuit or the selected parts list Properties In this dialog window you can enter data for the circuit or parts list Note Please note that the additional parts list specific properties can be set using the window view of the parts list Drawing Size E Adopt from drawing frame Dimensions Standard Size E User Defined Orientation Portrait E Landscape Figure 14 2 dialog window Drawing Size tab Here you can define the circuit dimensions and orientation both of which are relevant for printing Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 253 Circuit and project properties Chapter 15 Circuits and projects have a host of common properties The prop erties set in the project can be used by circuits in the project All of the properties that can be specified for both circuits and projects are listed below The screenshots shown are dialog windows fo
376. non return valve fitted in each case protects the pump against oil back pressure This is necessary in case the hydrau lic power unit is switched off with the cylinder advanced and under load 167 Exercise Ladle activation of a double acting cylinder Liquid aluminum is transferred from a holding furnace into a chan nel leading to a die casting machine A ladle is required for this A double acting cylinder is used to enable the ladle to carry out the appropriate movements A circuit diagram is provided for the acti vation of the cylinder with a 4 2 way valve as final control element This must be examined to see if it is suitable for the control task concerned The ladle must not be allowed to dip into the furnace when the valve is not actuated A circuit diagram with a back pressure valve must be developed to cater for the case in which the ladle is very heavy The requirements of the exercise are met by the first circuit dia gram only if the ladle represents a light load If the ladle is very heavy the advance speed could rise to an unacceptably high level during the advance stroke of the piston rod ladle moving towards furnace and the ladle could as a result plunge too quickly into the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM molten metal This can be prevented by installing a back pressure valve in the B line between the valve and cylinder tractive load If as is required in this exercise t
377. nt Fixed displacement pump O 10000 cm3 4 5055 Opening pressure Fixed displacement pump 0 40 MPa 5 Steering unit Orbitrol The steering unit is used to steer vehicles that are equipped with hydrostatic steering The steering unit consists of a proportional rotary valve a pump control valve and a dosing pump The rotary valve is opened pro portional to torque steering force and direction of rotation The control edges of the proportional valve are arranged radially at several levels on the rotary piston and the inside of the rotary valve housing A spring package assures a spring centered closed mid position Adjustable parameters External torque 10 10 N m 0 Displacement 0 10000 cm3 32 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 L R Steering unit Orbitrol The steering unit is used to steer vehicles that are equipped with hydrostatic steering The steering unit consists of a proportional rotary valve a pump control valve and a dosing pump The rotary valve is opened pro portional to torque steering force and direction of rotation The control edges of the proportional valve are arranged radially at several levels on the rotary piston and the inside of the rotary valve housing A spring package assures a spring centered closed mid position Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 353 354 External torque 10 10 N m 0
378. nt of FluidSIM Dr Daniel Curatolo Dr Marcus Hoffmann and Dr Benno Stein Users of this software are encouraged to contribute tips criticism and suggestions for improvement of FluidSIM via email info fluidsim de did de festo com You can also find the newest version on the following websites www fluidsim de www festo didactic de Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 15 16 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Installation Chapter 2 With your purchase of the full version of FluidSIM you received one or more DVD ROMs and possibly a license connector The installa tion procedure is described in the following sections The full version of FluidSIM is available in two versions a version that supports automatic Online activation and the version with a license connector for insertion in a USB port 2 1 Technical requirements You need a computer running Windows XP SP3 Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 If you intend to simulate complex circuits a computer with dual processor is recommended Stand alone tablet PCs without a physically connected mouse are not ideal because creating draw ings is impractical using only swipe and gesture control During simulation most of the adjustable components can be controlled using a game controller as an alternative to the mouse You can use any game controller which Windows recognizes and which appears in the Contro
379. nt or by selecting the compo nent and clicking Properties With electrically operated valves solenoid actuated the labels are entered on the left and the right by double clicking the appropriate connector as op posed to clicking in the middle of the component The following example illustrates how labels are used in FluidSIM Activate Edit Mode with or with Stop Expand the circuit as shown in the following figure Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 141 Figure 9 12 Simple electro pneumatic circuit So that the valve can be controlled by the solenoid these compo nents need to be linked using labels Double click the valve solenoid or select the solenoid and click Eat Propertes The following dialog box appears 142 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Connector Hectic Connector Browse Cancel Apphy Help O Figure 9 13 Dialog box for the valve solenoid Identification This text field is for entering a label name A label name can be up to 32 characters long and can contain numerals and special charac ters as well as letters Enter a name e g Y1 for this label Double click the outside of the solenoid on the valve to open the dialog box for the label name Enter the same label name there as for the solenoid Y1 The solenoid is now connected to the valve l In reality t
380. nt that emits light and has the electrical characteristics of a diode If an electric current is flowing through the diode in forward direction it emits light with a wavelength that depends on the semiconductor material and doping To make the use of the LED as a simple signal indicator easier FluidSIM allows setting the color independent of the physical characteristics Adjustable parameters Reference voltage 0 1 100 V 2 Reference current 1 1000 mA 25 Resistance in series 0 001 1000 Ohm 12 5 Saturation current 1e 15 100 A 1e 12 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Light emitting diode LED green A light emitting diode LED is a semiconductor component that emits light and has the electrical characteristics of a diode If an electric current is flowing through the diode in forward direction it emits light with a wavelength that depends on the semiconductor material and doping To make the use of the LED as a simple signal indicator easier FluidSIM allows setting the color independent of the physical characteristics Adjustable parameters Reference voltage 0 1 100 V 2 2 Reference current 1 1000 mA 30 Resistance in series 0 001 1000 Ohm 12 5 Saturation current 1e 15 100 A 1e 12 Light emitting diode LED blue A light emitting diode LED is a semiconductor component that emits light and has the electrical characteristics of a diode If an
381. ntacts as secondary components as well as electromagnetic directional control valves with the pneumatic symbol as the main component and the valve solenoids as secondary components in the electrical part of the circuit diagram 12 6 Link solenoid valves and solenoid coils The coils belonging to solenoid valves are usually displayed sepa rately in the electrical part of a circuit diagram The link between a solenoid valve and the associated coils is defined at the solenoid valve symbol The following circuit diagram shows a solenoid valve and the sym bols for two separate solenoid coils No link has been established yet between the solenoid valve and the coils Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 225 Figure 12 8 Solenoid valve and two separate coils There are two ways of establishing a link between a solenoid valve and a coil The first is using the properties dialog window for the solenoid valve Open the appropriate properties dialog window by double clicking the solenoid valve and select the Connector Labels tab 226 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Symbol Description Part number Layer 1 Display in Parts Lists Identification V1 Display ao User Defined Properties Drawing Properties Confic Hectic Connector Hectic Connector o oo 2 an Display Display Figure 12 9 Properties dialog window Connector Labels tab This tab
382. ntal lines in the diagram row 340 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM States Base state Numbering Start column Numbering Start number Numbering Number Numbering Step width Numbering Loop Representation Display arrows Representation Display grid Representation Display text 1 Representation Display text 2 Representation Line color Horizontal lines are drawn through the base state with a thin pencil The start column defines which column the numbering should begin with The start number defines which number the numbering should begin with The number specified how many steps need to be numbered Defines the step width between two numbers If this field is selected then an equals sign and the start number are always displayed after the last number If this field is selected then two arrows are displayed If this field is selected then the background grid is displayed If this field is selected then a textbox is shown which can serve as a label This textbox belongs to the selected row and cannot be moved to another row If this field is selected then an additional textbox is shown which can serve as a label This textbox belongs to the selected row and cannot be moved to another row Sets the color of the diagram lines 20 2 Draw diagram curve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM In this mode diag
383. ntial cylinder The area ratio of the full piston surface of this cylinder to the annu lar piston surface is 2 1 Since the piston rod chamber is only half the volume of the piston chamber the return stroke is twice as fast as the advance stroke Machining has previously been carried out only during the advance stroke In future working movements are to be carried out in both directions To make this possible the hydraulic control system must be modified so that forward and return strokes are at the same speed The speed should now also be adjustable The connecting lines should be added to the given circuit diagram The mode of operation of the circuit in the three Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM switching positions should be described and the various piston speeds and forces compared In order to achieve the same speed on the advance and return strokes a differential circuit by pass circuit can be used with differential cylinders with an area ratio of 2 1 Picture 116 2 The second picture shows the principle of a by pass circuit with a 3 2 way valve In the case of the parallel planing machine the neces sary differential circuit can be achieved by using the mid position of a 4 3 way valve A B and P connected T closed In this switching position advance stroke the piston speed and force are twice as high as in the right hand switching position return stroke In the left hand switching position
384. nts and displays them in graph form Move the state diagram to a free space in the circuit drawing and drag and drop the cylinder onto the diagram A dialog box opens where you can select the quantity values you are interested in In this instance only the position is of interest so Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 109 you can remove the check marks for the other values velocity acceleration Start the simulation and observe the diagram 1 nonamel __ Description Quanttyvae 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 JU 180 4 FY ils i 160 iY 140 A j lp 120 cylinder x mm 100 80 Figure 8 15 Circuit with state diagram for the cylinder Set the simulation to Pause and move the mouse pointer onto the curve on the diagram If the mouse pointer rests on the diagram for a second a box ap pears showing the exact values for time and the relevant quantity value If you move the mouse along the curve the display alters accordingly updating the values as the mouse pointer moves 110 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Quantity value Time 3 669 s x 139 66 mm Figure 8 16 Display of the exact values in the state diagram You can use multiple state diagrams in one window and can also display multiple components in the same diagram You can add a component to a state diagram by dragging it onto the diagram A dialog will ope
385. o KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 293 Figure 16 35 Contact Image dialog window You can customize the representation of the contact image in the Print Options tab The Contacts tab lists all of the associated contacts You can jump to the corresponding contact in the circuit diagram using the Jump to Target button 294 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Circuit input and output Chapter 17 17 1 Print circuit diagram and parts list FluidSIM circuits and parts lists can be printed by opening the Print dialog window via the menu item on the menu In FluidSIM a parts list is the representation of a circuit as a table If you wish to print an individual parts list then the corresponding circuit must be shown in the parts list display Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 295 Printer Microsoft XPS Document Writer X Print to File _ Print Project Files Invert Selection Copies Number of Copies 1 Scale Fit to Paper Size 0 mm Right mm 0 H mm Bottom mm ox cac J C He J Figure 17 1 Printdialog window Printer Select the desired output device from the list of the available print ers Properties This button enables you to open the dialog window for setting the printer options Print to File Activate this option if you wish to write the print data to a file Print Proj
386. o KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 81 Foreground Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground This means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this For ex ample symbols are covered by filled drawing elements Reset Reset the settings to the default values 7 4 4 Polyline set of connected lines A polyline also called a set of connected lines or polygonal chain is drawn by defining two or more points Each mouse click sets a further vertex The polyline is ended by clicking the same point twice The properties of the polyline can be defined in the Drawing Proper ties tab in the Properties dialog window Drawing Properties Position Scale Left mm x l Top l mm y 1 Rotation 0 Color kw oa JE Line Style Start Cap Line Width 0 1 End Cap Background Foreground Figure 7 10 Properties dialog window for a polyline Drawing Properties tab Scale Defines the scaling in x or y direction 82 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Rotation Override Color Line Style Line Width Start Cap End Cap Background Foreground 7 4 5 Rectangle Defines the angle of rotation in degrees Defines the color of the drawing element Defines the line style Defines the line width Defines how the beginning of the line is displayed Defines how the end of the line is displayed Sets the location of the drawing element
387. o a terminal strip Changes the direction of the terminal The direction is indicated in the circuit by an arrow that shows which connector is inside the control cabinet and which is outside The tip of the arrow points into the control cabinet If this box is checked then the direction arrow is displayed at the terminal Defines the terminal strip containing the terminal in question The list contains the terminal strips already created You call up the properties dialog window for the selected terminal strip using Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Properties You can also create a new terminal strip using Create New Display Identification If this box is checked then the identification for the associated terminal strip is displayed beside the terminal 16 3 2 Set multiple terminals As well as the option of setting individual terminals FluidSIM also offers a mode that allows you to set multiple terminals one after the other You can keep inserting terminals by simply clicking on the electric lines until you leave the mode again To insert multiple terminals select the Multiple Terminals menu item from the menu or click the f button Aa g BB m Figure 16 22 The operation begins with a dialog window where you can make some settings for the new terminals Above all you need to first select an existing terminal strip or create a new one If a suitable Festo Didactic
388. o the right hand edge of the diagram The color which the grid lines are drawn in the diagram area Defines the row height of all of the rows 20 1 2 Table textboxes The table textboxes are located on the left hand side of the function diagram Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 337 Font size Color Width Height Horizontal adjustment Vertical adjustment 338 Figure 20 3 Double clicking on a table textbox opens the corresponding dialog window Text forwards a Font size 10 backwards Color E z Frame Width 22 Horizontal adjustment Leit Height 20 Vertical adjustment Center OF Cancel Help OK Figure 20 4 The font size of the text to be shown A selection from sixteen standard colors for the text to be dis played The width of the selected table column can be changed by dragging the mouse pointer The height of the selected table column can be changed by drag ging the mouse pointer The following alignment options are available Lef Center and Right The following alignment options are available 7op Center and Bottom Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Alignment within a table cell If a text within a textbox should resemble a table then set a tab stop between the text parts The text is displayed in the textbox in ac cordance with the number of tab stops and the s
389. of a standard com ponent The text properties are located on the Fd t Tex tab Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Edit Text Alignment Font Color Frame Text Attribute Link Edit Text E Attribute Link PageNumber Alignment Horizontal Vertical Left Top Center Center Right Bottom Text Attributes E Frame Text E Fixed Width Translation Table Figure 12 14 Detail from the Properties dialog window for a text component Edt Texttab Enter your text into the input field on the left hand side You can also enter text with multiple lines Press the Enter key to create a line break Defines the horizontal or the vertical alignment of the text within the text field Defines the text font Defines the text color Draws a frame around the text field If this option is activated a text that identifies a link to an attribute is displayed instead of the text entered The value of the selected attribute is displayed in the circuit diagram You can find a detailed description of this function under Link text components with attrib utes A predefined placeholder such as the page number can also be selected using the Predefined variable button Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 231 12 8 Link text components with attributes 232 Text components can also display attributes of other components va
390. of data You may need to reduce the simulation time or increase the time increment Defines the color of the diagram Defines whether the entire area is filled with the chosen color or just the border of the diagram In this drop down list you define the Layer of the diagram You can set the Layer by clicking the downward pointing arrow to the right of the list and selecting a layer Depending on the setting for draw ing layers the rectangle might not be displayed or might not be able to be edited In order to see the object or change its settings you have to temporarily activate the drawing layers with menu item View Drawing Layers This list contains all the quantity values displayed in the diagram Every component is listed together with its identification and all its output variables are listed below it Every variable can be selected and deselected with a checkmark Once you have marked a varia ble you can use the buttons at lower right to define the color line style and line thickness for it You can use Add to select the components you want deletes the marked component together with its quantity values and Find Target takes you to the relevant component in the circuit 9 7 Coupling hydraulics pneumatics electrics and mechanics All three available technology versions FluidSIM P FluidSIM H and FluidSIM E allow you to create basic electrical circuits In the pneumatics and hydraulics versions t
391. of properties It only contains those properties which meaningfully relate to all of the selected objects This enables you to change the font for multiple texts in a single operation for ex ample The more different object types symbols connectors drawing elements texts etc that are selected the less common properties are available The following tabs are available for the common properties de pending on the objects highlighted Drawing Properties The dialog elements available within a tab depend on the objects highlighted Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 235 Font Frame Text Scale Rotation Override Color Line Style Line Width Start Cap End Cap Background 236 Drawing Properties Font E Frame Tet Scale Rotation E Ovenide Color Line Style Line Width Background Arc Starting Angle Ending Angle 0 Deg E Fill Area Foreground Figure 12 17 Properties dialog window Drawing Properties tab several highlighted objects Defines the font type of the text Draws a frame around the text field Defines the scaling factor of the text in the x or y direction Defines the angle of rotation of the text field in degrees Defines the color of the drawing element Defines the line style Defines the line width Defines how the beginning of the line is displayed Defines how the end of the line is displayed Sets the location
392. of their characteristics zener diodes are used in numerous circuitries for stabilizing and limiting electrical voltages In forward direction they behave like normal diodes In reverse direction resistance drops off considerably after the voltage exceeds a cer tain value the so called breakdown voltage The voltage does not increase by much after that even if the electric current is increased Adjustable parameters Reference voltage 0 1 100 V 0 7 Reference current 1 10000 mA 9 Saturation current 1e 10 100 A 1e 10 Z voltage 0 1 100V 10 Current at Z voltage 1 10000 mA 15 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM NPN transistor An NPN transistor is a bipolar junction transistor BJT It is operat ed with an electric current and is used for switching and amplifying signals without using mechanically moving parts There are two types of BJTs NPN and PNP The letters indicate the order and doping type of the layers Essentially a BJT constitutes two p n junctions connected together in series like that of a p n diode The three terminals are called collector C base B and emitter E Adjustable parameters Forward current gain 0 1 1000 120 Reverse current gain 0 1 1000 1 Saturation current 1e 16 1e 3 A 8 81138e 14 Forward early voltage 1 1000 V 64 PNP transistor An PNP transistor is a bipolar junction transistor BJT It is operated with an
393. ogy one license will be occupied Cancel Help Figure 3 1 Select Technologies dialog window The available technologies and the currently free licenses are displayed here FluidSIM remembers the last selection and suggests it when the program is next started If you frequently use different combina tions you can create links which will allow you to start FluidSIM directly with the corresponding selection Next the key concepts and terms are described which you will encounter when using FluidSIM Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 21 22 Start FluidSIM with the selection you require In the menu File select New Fite An empty circuit window opens in which you can insert symbols and connect them with lines First you should set the drawing size Inthe menu select Paper Size Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM _ sca Properties File Name Description Page number Drawing Frame Inherit From Project Frame File C Festo Aluid Draw P5 firm Frame_A circ Drawing Size Page Dividers Basic Unt Length Designation Convent Adopt from drawing frame Dimensions Standard Size Width 191 06 User Defined Height 287 36 Orientation Portrait Landscape Figure 3 2 dialog window Drawing Size tab setting the drawing size If you use a drawing frame then FluidSIM can automatically adjust the paper
394. ol check valve 573 numbering system _ 551 pressure control valve 582 rotary actuator _ 4557 supply component _ 552 Dialog window diagram properties 337 drawing areas 340 Functional diagram 336 line options 346 648 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM signal logic 347 signaling elements 343 text options 338 didactics actuators 557 applications 592 basic pneumatics _ 550 cylinder didactics motor 631 directional control valves 562 educational film educational film overview 589 645 exercises 635 flow control valves 580 flow valves 628 gauge 634 hydraulic plant ees physical fundamentals 599 power unit 602 presentation presentation play 541 presentations overview 645 presentations presentation overview 590 pressure control valves 582 pressure valves 608 sequential circuit didactics signal overlap circuit 587 shutoff valves 573 624 supply elements 552 symbols 595 time delay valve 584 tutorial tutorial 535 valves 606 way valves 615 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 649 650 Digital Basic Functions Digital Components Digital Special Functions Digitale Constants DIN standard distance step diagram Druckschalter E electrical components american standard ladder diagram style Electrical Components electronic components exercise bending machine clamping device drilling machine drying oven embossing press feed control grinding m
395. om P to A until the tank has been completely isolated by the other piston Pressure is immediately fed to the load device cylinder or hydraulic motor with the result that this starts abrupt ly 607 soerkarlige Ssverkanls Fda eke cal aoe Sika mil Arkaik 57 Control edges The control edges of the pistons are often either sharp chamfered or notched The profiling of the control edges means that the throt tling action of the flow when switching is gradual rather than ab rupt See also the example in topic 144 58 Vertical interconnection system Vertical interconnection systems modular hydraulics mean that less space is required and that no piping is needed between the components The circuit symbols directly marked on the compo nents give greater clarity in the installation 24 7 Pressure Valves FiA 608 59 Pressure relief valve 1 In this design incorporating a poppet valve a seal is pressed against the inlet port P by a pressure spring when the valve is in its normal position In this situation for example an unloaded piston rod is execut ing an advance stroke and the entire pump delivery is flowing to the cylinder 60 Pressure relief valve 2 As soon as the force exerted by the inlet pressure at A exceeds the opposing spring force the valve begins to open Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG
396. omatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120 Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Single acting cylinder with return spring The piston of the single acting cylinder is extended to its back position by the input of compressed air When the compressed air is switched off a return spring moves the piston back to its front position Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120 Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pre
397. omponent states are not transmitted to the GRAFCET The GRAFCET is a draw ing only with no action This mode can be useful in practice in order to prepare the draft circuit conceptually with a GRAFCET and to verify it without the assistance of FluidSIM 10 1 2 Observation GrafView In this mode also called GrafView a GRAFCET can be drawn as described above but unlike the simple GrafEdit mode the condi tions in GRAFCET objects can linked directly to variables in a corre sponding circuit see section Access to variables of circuit compo nents The GRAFCET can only have read access to the circuit elements The GRAFCET observes the circuit during the simulation and is processed and visually presented according to the condi tions in transitions and actions This mode is practical for simple checking of whether the intended function of the GRAFCET sequence matches the simulated system characteristics In this mode the processing of the actions of the GRAFCET has no effect on the other circuit elements Control of the circuit is therefore not possible 10 1 3 Control GrafControl The GrafControl mode expands the GrafView mode by not only allowing read access to the fluidic and or electrical circuit ele 182 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM ments but also permitting the GRAFCET actions to actively modify the values of those elements This means GRAFCET cannot only take the place of
398. omponents and drawing frames among others The placeholders begin with a percentage sign The following predefined placeholders are some of those available The page number is specified in the properties dialog window for the circuit diagram If analyses are split across several pages the number of the sub page is added to the page number with a minus sign If for exam ple the entered page number is 42 01 and the page displayed is the third page in an analysis then the placeholder PageNumber is replaced by the character string 42 01 03 The description for the page is specified in the properties dialog window for the circuit diagram Stands for the file name of the page without the file path Stands for the file name of the page with the full file path Stands for the date and time of the most recent change to the circuit diagram Stands for the date of the most recent change to the circuit dia gram Stands for the time of the most recent change to the circuit dia gram Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 257 15 2 Page Dividers Page dividers can only be defined for pages Editing of page divid ers is described under Page dividers 15 3 Basic Unit Length 258 The symbols in the FluidSIM symbol libraries are created according to various DIN ISO standards Instead of specifying absolute units of length the standards simply use a relative basic unit of length M
399. on return valve on the inlet side via which oil can be taken in from a reservoir during the vacuum phase following the closure of the directional control valve 609 aa L 610 eesseove The following animation shows the events which occur in the two working lines 65 Circuit with brake valve First the animation shows in schematic form the behavior of the PRV during the braking phase then it shows the behavior of the non return valve NRV in the supply line eessoove The necessity of the brake valve can be demonstrated by topic 63 66 Circuit diagram PRV as back pressure valve Back pressure valves counteract mass moments of inertia with tractive loads The illustration shows a circuit with a back pressure valve on the piston rod side On the return stroke the PRV is by passed by an NRV eessoove The PRV must be pressure compensated and the tank port must be capable of carrying a pressure load 67 PRV internally controlled cushioned Pressure relief valves often incorporate cushioning pistons or flow control valves The cushioning device shown provides fast opening and slow closing of the valve This prevents damage caused by pressure shocks smooth valve operation Pressure shock arise for example when the pump delivers oil in an almost unpressurized condition and the supply port of the load device is abruptly closed by a directional control valve 68 PRV externally controlle
400. on shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the 2 way pressure regulator in the form of a circuit sym bol 79 Circuit diagram 2 way pressure regulator It is appropriate to use PRVs only when different pressures are required in an installation The mode of operation of pressure regulator will thus be explained here by taking an example with two control circuits The first control circuit acts via a flow control valve on a hydraulic motor which drives a roller This roller is used to stick together multi layered printed circuit boards The second control circuit acts on a hydraulic cylinder which draws the roller towards the boards at an adjustable reduced pressure This example can be used as a preliminary stage to the intro duction of the 3 way PR If the 2 way PR is closed due to the fact that the preset maximum pressure has been reached thickening of the material of the workpieces would cause an in crease in the pressure on the outlet side of the PR to a higher value than desired See also the animation for topic 84 80 3 way pressure regulator 1 The 3 way pressure regulator can be regarded as a combination of a 2 way PR and a pressure relief valve PRV The PR is in its normal position here only a low pressure has built up at the outlet A 81 3 way pressure regulator 2 When the pressure at A rises the result of external conditions this pressure acts via a pilot line on the left hand piston sur
401. onal text 2 Revision 1 Text Company Line 1 Revision 1 Date Revision 1 Name Number of pages Company Line 2 Company Line 3 Additional text 1 191 06 Figure 6 2 Select Drawing Frame dialog window All of the available frame files are displayed as a tree on the right hand side The desired drawing frame can be selected in this tree The drawing frame is then displayed in the preview In addition the Attributes list displays all of the attributes of the texts from the drawing frame which were defined as links Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Browse 6 3 Page dividers Opens a dialog window to select a circuit file to be used as a frame A circuit diagram or page can be logically divided into rows and columns which can be labeled with numbers or letters These page dividers are usually shown in the drawing frame and serve as a means of orientation within the page Above all they allow the current paths columns of contacts to be specified in the contact images The graphical representation of the page dividers matches the logical page dividers in the drawing frames provided The logical page dividers can be shown and hidden via the Show Page Divid menu item from the menu or via the button They are displayed at the left hand as well as the upper edge of the circuit window To be able to display and edit page dividers you need to activate the Expert Mode option
402. onnection A acts upon the pilot poppet via a drilling in the control slide valve The proportional magnet exercises Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM the electrically adjustable counter force with the assistance of a proportional amplifier If the pressure at connection A is below the preset value then the pilot control remains closed The pressure on both sides of the control slide valve is equal A spring holds the main stage control slide valve open and the hydraulic fluid flow freely from connection P to connection A If the pressure at connec tion A exceeds the preset value then the pilot stage opens causing less volumetric flow to flow to connection A The pressure falls at the throttle valve inside the control slide valve Thus the pressure at the spring side is lower than the pressure at connection A Due to the pressure difference the control slide valve closes so far until the spring force re establishes an equilibrium of forces As a result the flow resistance at the control edge between connections P and A increases and the pressure at connection A sinks The control voltage must be between 0 V and 10 V The minimum nominal pressure defines the opening pressure at the pre stage via the spring force at 0 V The maximum nominal pressure defines the Opening pressure at 10 V The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened main stage leading edge Adjustable parameters Min Nominal pressure
403. onnector descriptions for those connectors with the Display option activated Show Connector Descriptions None Hides all connector descriptions regardless of the settings at the connectors Show Terminal Directions WN gt O WN O O ie Wn rt gt ca S ig Q O fan x O WN se rt fama gt ca i x 3 5 2 4 gt ca go O n om wt gt ca arrow points into the control cabinet here Show Terminal Directions All Shows all arrows regardless of the settings at the terminals Show Terminal Directions Individual Show Terminal Directions None Oo WN al ao Wn os a au v o o gt 23 g z ODO oO N aQ D g gt m 2a A D o N lt eg gt N 5 D D a 3 ga D Wn n i 5 y oO D D L 3 2 5 Q v N n S P z 9 J Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Display Contact Images Shows or hides the contact images Drawing Layers Opens a Drawing Layers dialog window enabling you to set the properties of the drawing layers 19 10 Library Add New Library A oO pe O oa se 5 ig pe ie Add Existing Library Opens the dialog window enabling you to select a saved library file with the 1ib file suffix The library saved in the file is added to the pe lt 3 Q O r Add Existing Symbol Folder
404. onnector for connecting the external supply for the controller 5 11 Configure cylinders If you require a certain cylinder which you cannot find in the stand ard FluidSIM library you can create your own cylinder symbol with the help of the cylinder editor Insert a double acting cylinder into a circuit window from the Standard Symbols Pneumatic Symbols Pneumatic Drives Configurable Cylinders library In the case of FluidSIM H se lect a hydraulic cylinder accordingly To configure the cylinder double clock on the cylinder The dialog window Properties then opens Click the Configure Cylinder tab This brings you to the cylinder editor Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 49 Symbol Name CONFCYL Description Linear Drive Pneumatic wit E Display Part number laye Display in Parts Lists Identification Al Display Component Parameters Drawing Properties Configure Cylinder Actuating labels Force profile Ecemal load Cylinder Type Single Acting gt Retum Spring T amp Single Acting lt E Left F Right Piston E E Cushioning Piston Position Y s E Show all settings Cylinder Type Return Spring Piston 50 Double Acting lt gt Piston Rod E Adjustable Self adjusting Figure 5 17 Properties dialog window Configure Cylinder tab Click the button with the mouse pointer to open the symbol ele ments list
405. oothly and prevent hard impacts at the end of the stroke Shortly before the end position is reached the cross section for the outflow of fluid is reduced by the built in cushioning pistons and then finally closed The hydraulic fluid is then forced to escape through a flow control valve 155 End position cushioning 1 The piston is a short distance before its end position the hydraulic fluid on the piston rod side must escape via the adjustable flow control valve above the piston rod Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM This type of end position cushioning is used for stroke speed between 6 m min and 20 m min At higher speed additional cushioning or braking devices must be used 156 End position cushioning 2 The piston rod is on its return stroke in this flow direction the non return valve below the piston rod is opened thus by passing the flow control valve The piston rod retracts at maximum speed 157 End position cushioning The illustration shows first the advance of the piston rod froma mid position to the forward end position with cushioning at the end of the advance movement The non return valve is open during the return stroke In addition the animation shows the opening of the pressure limiter after a certain pressure has been built up on the outlet side by the cushioning piston 158 Double acting cylinder Actual photograph of a double acting cylinder
406. operties dialog window Configure Valve tab You can select the actuation types of the valve from the Manual l Mechanically and Pneumatically Electrically Hydraulical ly Electrically resp categories for both sides of the valve Click the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol element A valve can have multiple actuation types at the same time If you do not want an actuation type from a category then select the empty field in the list You can also define whether each side should have a spring return pilot control pneumatic spring or external supply A configurable valve can possess a maximum of four switching positions One valve body can be selected for each switching posi tion Click the associate button with the mouse points to open the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Initial Position Dominant Signal External Supply symbol elements list Select a symbol element for each switching position If you want to use less than four switching positions then select the empty field on the list for the positions not required Here you set which switching position the valve should use in the normal position Note When determining this setting ensure that it does not conflict with a possible spring return This provides a graphical identification of whether the right or left signal should dominate in the event of equally strong signals This creates an additional c
407. or a foot pedal is operated then the cylinder is to advance Once the cylinder has fully advanced it is to retract to the initial position A 3 2 way roller lever valve is to be used to detect forward end position of the cylinder 84 Exercise The logic OR function the shuttle valve Solution The shuttle valve is connected to the junction between the two manual 3 2 way valves Upon operation of one of the manual 3 2 way valves a 1 signal is generated at either input 1 of the shuttle Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 577 578 valve This signal passes through the shuttle valve and is emitted at port 2 This operates the control valve via pilot port 14 and the cylinder advances A limit valve 1S2 senses that the cylinder has fully extended Pilot signal 2 from valve 1S2 actuates the 5 2 way valve via port 12 and the cylinder retracts The signal at port 12 is only effective if the opposing signal at port 14 is released If both of the signals produced via the push button valves are set to zero then the shuttle valve will release the pilot signal 14 back through the exhaust port of one of the 3 2 way valves In other words both the push button and the foot pedal must be inactive for retraction to occur The control valve can be a 4 2 way or 5 2 way valve and can be sized to suit the flow rate required for the cylinder speed 85 Exercise The logic OR function the shuttle valve Note T
408. or by entering a pair of values Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 131 9 4 132 Hydraulic resistance 36 88 80 T2 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 0 Flow rate 20 0 1000 4 59465 Pressure 472 0 100 3 3473 Hydraulic resistance 0 093 1E 06 1000 Figure 9 8 Hydraulic resistance curve Additional simulation functions This section describes additional functions for the simulation of circuit diagrams Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 9 4 1 Simultaneous actuation of several components So that you can actuate multiple pushbuttons or spring returned valves at the same time you can put them in a permanently actuat ed state You can permanently actuate a pushbutton or valve with manual actuation by clicking it with the mouse while pressing the Shift key You can release this permanent actuation by clicking once on the component Sometimes it may be necessary for multiple actuated objects to be released at the same time In that case when clicking the object hold down the Ctrl key instead of the Shift key The switched components then remain in the actuated state until you release the Ctrl key again at which time all the objects actuated in this way return to their initial position simultaneously 1 For more complex switching operations or continuous adjustments we recommend using a game controller For more details see Adjusting t
409. orresponding electrical connection and the GRAFCET PLC component is connected to a power supply This list defines the names of the output variables whose values can be set by the actions of the related GRAFCET Specifying a name is optional The output variable names QO to Q7 are created automatically A voltage of 24 volts is generated at the electrical connection corresponding to an output variable if that output variable has a value not equal to 0 and the GRAFCET PLC compo nent is connected to a power supply In any other situation a voltage of 0 volts is generated The following simple example illustrates the use of the GRAFCET PLC component 24 oe 1 GRAFCET PLC ov ao a1Ja2 a3 fas jas as a7 z ov Figure 10 16 GRAFCET with its related PLC component In the properties dialog box for the GRAFCET PLC component the alias E2 is entered for the input 12 The output Q5 was not given an alias As soon as the electrical switch is closed there is a potential at the input of 12 this potential causes the GRAFCET variable 12 and thereby also the alias E2 to change its value from 0 to 1 As a consequence of this the condition in the action becomes true 1 and the value of variable Q5 is set to Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 1 This in turn leads to a potential being created at the output of Q5
410. otary actuator is controlled by a reciprocal input of compressed air In the end positions the semi rotary actuator can activate switches or valves via labels Adjustable parameters Initial Position 0 360 deg 0 Rotation angle max 1 360 deg 180 Displacement 0 01 10001 0 1 Friction 0 01 100 N m s rad 0 1 Moment of inertia 1e 005 1 kg m2 0 0001 External torque 1000 1000 N m 0 21 2 13 Measuring Instruments Manometer The manometer displays the pressure at its connection Differential pressure gauge The differential pressure gauge displays the pressure difference between the adjacent pressures at the left and the right connection Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 461 462 4 Pressure indicator An optical signal is activated when the pressure at the connection to the pressure indicator exceeds the preset switching pressure Adjustable parameters Switching pressure 0 1 2 MPa 0 3 Pressure sensor analog This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog pressure sensor The analog pressure sensor measures the adjacent pres sure and transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal In the process only pressures in the specified pressure ranges are considered Within this range the pressure in the voltage range from O V to 10 V is represented i e the minimum pressure delivers O V and the maximum pressure 10 V Adjustable pa
411. oups of piston motors sliding vane motors gear motors and turbines Discuss applications for the air motor Figure 22 5 Function illustration of a air motor Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 533 Didactics material Didactics material Basics and working principles lt WayValves lt 4 2 way valve two pistons 1 104 4 2 way valve two pistons 1 The 4 2 way valve has two working ports A and B a supply port P and a tank port T The supply port is always Connected to one of the working ports while the second working port is routed to the tank In the normal position there is flow from P to B and from A to T In contrast to valves with three pistons 4 2 way valves with two pistons do not require a leakage oil port see topic 106 TMW Ladi O G e gt Figure 22 6 Function illustration of a 4 2 way valve Often it is easier to understand the functional nature of a compo nent when its behavior is visualized through the use of animation For this reason several components possess different sectional views showing the component at different states These sectional views can be animated in much the same way as a flip book Please mark a quick exhaust valve hydraulics 3 way pressure reducing valve and click the menu option nent description f to open the window with the component de scription Now click the link with the function illustration 87 quick e
412. p Y 0 1 r End Cap Foreground Figure 7 12 Properties dialog window for a circle Drawing Proper ties tab Defines the scaling in the x or y direction Defines the starting and final angles of a circular arc Defines the angle of rotation in degrees Defines the color of the drawing element Fills the circle with the color listed 85 Line Style Line Width Start Cap End Cap Background Foreground 7 4 7 Ellipse 86 Defines the line style Defines the line thickness Defines how the beginning of the line is displayed Defines how the end of the line is displayed Sets the location of the drawing element to the background This means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this For example symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground This means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this For ex ample symbols are covered by filled drawing elements An ellipse is drawn by defining a middle point and two radii with parallel axes You can draw an ellipse by subsequently entering the beginning and final angles into the Drawing Properties tab in the Properties dialog window of the ellipse The ellipse specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Prop erties tab of the Properties dialog window for the ellipse Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Drawing Properties Position Scale Arc Center o
413. parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 2 way hand lever valve i In normal position the connection P is open to B and Ato T When manually actuated the valve is set to parallel position This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100
414. pecified horizontal and vertical alignment To enter tab stops hold down the Ctrl key Examples Text 3TK1 3TK3 4 Schrifthohe 9 v 3TK2 3TK4 Fabo M Rahmen V Breite 20 mm Horizontale Ausrichtung Zentriert A Hohe 10 mm Vertikale Ausrichtung Zentriert kes Abbrechen Hilfe _ 3TK2 3TK4 ras iii 3TK1 3TK3 Schrifthohe 9 hai 3TK2 3TK4 Fabo a Rahmen v Breite 20 mm Horizontale Ausrichtung Rechts x H he 19 mm Vertikale Ausrichtung Unten x 2 Abbrechen Hilfe 31k4 Insert text boxes Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 339 20 1 3 Adjust the presentation of the diagrams The area in which curves can be drawn is located on the right hand side of a diagram row Figure 20 5 Double clocking on this area opens a corresponding window in which you can define the appearance of the drawing area Please ensure that no diagram element such as a signaling element for example is underneath the mouse pointer Diagram States Numbering Number E Start column Base state 1 Start number Number Representation Step width Display arrow C i Loop Display grid Display text 1 Display text 2 Line colt IN Line Style Cancel Help Figure 20 6 States Number The entry defines the number of states and thus the number of horizo
415. point 2 100 100 V 8 Hysteresis 0 100V 0 Switching time 1e 5 10 s 0 001 Minimum voltage 1 300V 15 Idle current 24 V 1 10000 mA 32 21 3 4 General Switches 474 Break switch General break switch that is tailored depending on the type of component that actuates it For example if the break switch is linked via a label to a switch off delay relay the break switch changes to a switch off delay break switch in the circuit diagram Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 3 Make switch General make switch that is tailored according to the component that actuates it For example if the make switch is linked via a label to a switch on delayed relay the make switch changes to a switch A on delayed make switch in the circuit diagram J 4 Changeover switch General changeover switch that is tailored according to the compo nent that actuates it For example if the changeover switch is linked via a label to a switch on delayed relay the changeover 1 switch changes to a changeover switch in the circuit diagram 21 3 5 Delay Switches 5 Break switch switch on delayed Switch with delayed opening after pickup Switch on delayed break switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label T Make switch switch on delayed Switch with delayed closing after pickup Switch on delayed make switches are created by using a general make switch and setti
416. portional amplifier in the valve into a corresponding current that actuates the propor tional valve solenoid so that the valve connected to it is shifted to either side to the maximum extent according to the signal voltage applied To switch over the valve to a lesser extent the valve requires a lesser maximum voltage You can set that by opening the proper ties dialog box for the function generator by double clicking 164 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Component Parameters E Show designation Show variable Show Unit Designation Value Range ni Display Signal type Sine Frequency 1 0 01 1E 05 Amplitude 10 o 400 i y offset 0 100 100 L_offset Min Voltage 30 400 400 U_cut_min Max Voltage 30 400 400 U_cut_max Simulated values Designation Value Display Voltage E Figure 9 34 Properties dialog box for the function generator Enter 4 as the Amplitude close the dialog box and restart the simulation The voltage will now vary between 4 and 4 volts As a result the valve will still shift symmetrically but with less displacement from the mid position Open the function generator properties again and set 2 as the y offset The function generator now supplies a voltage between 2 and 6 volts with the valve moving further to the left than to the right Open the function generator properties again and set Con stant as the signal type
417. positive overlap of proportional valves The amplifier requires a power supply of 24 V Adjustable parameters Current max 0 01 30A 0 1 Jump current 0 25 0 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 100 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Proportional amplifier 2 channel The amplifier is used to control proportional valves with two mag nets For this purpose nominal values voltage signals from 10 V to 10 V are transformed into the necessary magnetic current for the proportional valves Output A is gated at a nominal value be tween 0 V and 10 V output B between 0 V and 10 V In FluidSIM the amplifier is coupled to the respective valve with the help of two labels The maximum currents at the amplifier outputs are hereby automatically adjusted in relation to the coupled valves A step current relative to the maximum current can be specified in order to compensate the positive overlap of proportional valves The amplifier requires a power supply of 24 V Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Adjustable parameters Current max 0 01 30A 0 1 Jump current 0 25 0 Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 100 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Valve solenoid ladder The valve solenoid switches the valve By means of a label the valve solenoid can be linked to a valve that is solenoid operated Adjustable parameters Resistance 1 10000 Ohm 90 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 TOTT Distan
418. put was Lo in the previous cycle If an input pin of this block is not connected its status is automatical ly Hi 510 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM NAND AND not The output Q of the NAND is only Lo when all inputs are Hi that is if they are closed If an input pin of this block is not con nected its status is automatically Hi NAND With Edge Evaluation amp y The output Q of the NAND with edge evaluation is only Hi if at least one input is Lo and if all inputs were Hi in the previous cycle If an input pin of this block is not connected its status is automatically Hi OR The output Q of the OR is only Hi if at least one input is Hi that is if it is closed If an input pin of this block is not connected its status is automatically Lo NOR OR not gt 1 The output Q of the NOR is only Hi when all inputs are Lo that is if they are switched off As soon as any input is switched on status Hi the output of the NOR is set to Lo If an input pin of this block is not connected its status is automatically Lo XOR exclusive OR 1 The output Q of the XOR is Hi if the inputs are nonequivalent If an input pin of this block is not connected its status is automatical ly Lo Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 511 NOT Negation In
419. r 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120 Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Double acting cylinder with two in and out piston rods and single trestle This twin cylinder has two in and out piston rods that move in parallel and that are coupled by a trestle The construction guaran tees minimum torsion when positioning and moving tools or as semblies Moreover coming along with the same construction height the double piston rod conveys the double force as com pared to standard cylinders Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically R
420. r by which the real length is multiplied for the displayed value This is necessary if you are creating a drawing with a scale other than 1 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 303 18 6 Cross Reference Representation Cross Reference Representation Default Settings Page number Page Column Example Figure 18 6 Options dialog window Cross Reference Representa tiontab This tab is used to define the default settings for the cross reference representation You can find further information under Cross reference representation The settings are only applied to newly generated projects or cir cuits They have no effect on existing objects Example Illustrates the effects of the settings using an example Reset Resets the settings to the settings defined in FluidSIM 304 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 18 7 Connector Links Allow connections between same connector types only Pneumatic Horizontal Pneumatic Vertical Electric Horizontal Electric Vertical W Allow connections between same connector types only Connect Automatically Pneumatic Hydraulic IM Horizontal IM Horizontal IM Vertical IM Vertical Electric Digital Horizontal Horizontal IM Vertical E Vertical GRAFCET E Horizontal E Vertical Figure 18 7 Options dialog window Connector Links tab Only connectors of the same type can be connec
421. r circuits are also used in conjunction with line filters or brake valves Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 625 626 131 Delockable non return valve 1 In the cases of delockable non return valves flow in the closed direction can be released by means of an additional pilot port X The illustration shows the valve in its normal position flow from B to Ais closed 132 Delockable non return valve 2 The released piston is pressurized via pilot port X This lifts the sealing element from its seat and releases flow from B to A In order to release the valve reliably the effective area of the pilot piston must always be greater than the effective area of the sealing element Piloted non return valves are also availa ble with lockable non return function 133 Delockable non return valve 3 The model circuit diagram shows how a load can be positioned by holding a cylinder using a suitable delockable non return valve The valve becomes active in the return stroke whereby the restriction on the piston side is released by actuation of the 3 2 way valve See also the animation 135 on this topic 134 Circuit diagram Delockable non return valve The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the piloted non return valve as a circuit symbol Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Ae ee Festo Didactic Gm
422. r the circuits Page G23 Properties File Name C Users Festo Documents Aluid SIM noname 1 circ Description noname 1 Page number Simulation GRAFCET Environment parameters Fluid properties Basic Unit Length Drawing Frame E Attributes Drawing Size Page Dividers Cross Reference Representation Inhent From Project Frame File C Program Files 6 86 Didactic Aluid SIM5 frm Frame_A4 circ Remove Local Frame Reload Frame Attributes Figure 15 1 Properties dialog window Properties The file name field displays the file name of the circuit or project along with the complete path The file name is carried over to the input field for the Description and can be edited there This entry is displayed in the upper margin of the window as well as beside the circuit or project node Page number Here you can specify a page number The page number can be made up of any character string The page number can be defined using the PageNumber predefined placeholder This placehold er can be used in text components and drawing frames among others 254 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Drawing Frame Here you can make settings for the drawing frame This function is described in the section Drawing frame 15 1 Attributes Any number of attributes can be created for every circuit or node in a project The attributes are listed in a table in the Attributes tab New attributes can b
423. ram curves can be drawn Supporting points can only be inserted on the grid A supporting point is drawn at every left click Ht At Po 1 pert 2 Ost 3 Hof 4 Or 341 If you hold down the left mouse button then supporting points can be moved as in the selection mode Selected supporting points are shown in grey Use the Del key to delete a selected symbol 20 3 Insert signal elements 342 In this mode signaling elements can be inserted by left clicking 1 Ri If you hold down the left mouse button then signaling elements can be moved as in the selection mode Selected signaling elements are shown in grey Use the Del key to delete a selected signaling element Double clicking on a signaling element in the selection mode opens a dialog window in which you can modify how the signaling element is shown Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Signal element Signal tyoe 2 D ay O D a 294 1 CA 5 Line Style Color we Cancel Help Figure 20 7 Signal type Display description If this field is selected then a text is shown which can serve as a label for the signaling element Color The signaling element is displayed in this color 20 4 Insert text boxes In this mode textboxes can be inserted by left clicking Selected textboxes are shown in grey Use the Del key to delete a selected textbox Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e
424. rameters Minimum pressure 2 2 MPa 0 Maximum pressure 2 2 MPa 1 Voltage at p1 100 100 V 0 Voltage at p2 100 100 V 10 Analog pressure sensor This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog pressure sensor Adjustable parameters Minimum pressure 2 2 MPa 0 Maximum pressure 2 2 MPa 1 Voltage at p1 100 100 V 0 Voltage at p2 100 100 V 10 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM A Flow meter The flow meter measures the flow rate Either the current flow or the total quantity flowed can be displayed The component image is automatically adjusted accordingly B Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 A Flow meter The flow meter measures the flow rate Either the current flow or the total quantity flowed can be displayed The component image is automatically adjusted accordingly B Adjustable parameters Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 100 Flow meter analog This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog flow meter The analog flow meter measures the volumetric flow and transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal In the B process only flow rates in the specified pressure ranges are con sidered Within this range the flow rate in the voltage range from 0 V to 10 V is represented i e the minimum volumetric flow delivers O V and the maximum volumetric flow
425. re compensator closes when the pressure difference X Y exceeds the nominal pressure A pressure regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connections A and X The pressure balance is also a component of 2 way flow control valves The nominal pressure setting of the real compo nents is component dependent and cannot be changed The hy draulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Closing pressure compensator adjustable The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent hy draulic resistance The pressure compensator closes when the pressure difference X Y exceeds the nominal pressure A pressure regulating valve is implemented by the combination of the connec tions A and X The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 1 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Opening pressure compensator The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent hy draulic resistance The pressure compensator opens when the pressure difference X Y exceeds the nominal pressure A pressure relief valve is implemented by the combination of connections P and X Th
426. relief valve with the assistance of a proportional amplifier is a continuous electrically adjustable pressure relief valve The control piston has two adjacent areas exposed to pressure The first area is exposed to the pressure at connection P the other to connection T If the magnet is not sup plied with electricity then the piston is fully retracted and the complete passage from connection P to connection T is free The proportional magnet creates a force proportional to its magnetic current which moves the control piston according to the balance of the adjacent forces magnetic force spring force and pressures The control voltage must be in the range 0 V to 10 V The minimum nominal pressure defines the opening pressure through the spring force at O V The maximum nominal pressure defines the opening pressure at 10 V The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened main stage leading edge Adjustable parameters Min Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 Max Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 10 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 397 398 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 2 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Proportional pressure relief valve piloted The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a pilot stage with poppet valve and a main stage with control slide valve The pressure at connection P acts upon the pilot poppet via a drilling in the
427. resistive relative pressure transducer with integrated amplifier and built in temperature compensation The pressure to be measured is transferred onto a silicone coated piezoresistive element The signal change generated therein is output as a voltage or switching signal at the connector plug via an integrated amplifier Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Output function Make switch Break switch Make switch Switching function Threshold value Window comparator Threshold value Switching pressure 1 0 1 2 MPa 0 3 Switching pressure 2 0 1 2 MPa 1 Hysteresis 0 2 MPa 0 Minimum pressure 0 1 2 MPa 0 Maximum pressure 0 1 2 MPa 1 Voltage at p1 100 100V 0 Voltage at p2 100 100 V 10 Minimum voltage 1 300 V 13 Idle current 24 V 1 10000 mA 32 Flow sensor The flow sensor is used to measure and monitor flow rate and air J 6 consumption values Measurement is carried out by means of a thermal procedure whereby the amount of heat drawn from a heated surface of the sensor by the medium flowing past it is calculated The flow rate or the accumulated air consumption is based on the amount of heat drawn Connection to higher order systems is established via two switch ing outputs Out A B and an analogue output Out C Switching points can be defined for both binary outputs Switching points are possible for both switching
428. ric motor hydraulic pump pressure relief valve safety valve filter and cooler The Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM hydraulic power unit may also act as a carrier for other devices gauges directional control valves 39 Hydraulic power unit Reservoir The hydraulic reservoir contains the hydraulic fluid required the operate the installation Within the reservoir air water and solid matter are separated out of the hydraulic fluid The size of the reservoir will depend on the practical applica tion involved for stationary systems the volume of fluid deliv ered by the pump in 3 to 5 minutes can be taken as a guide In mobile hydraulic systems on the other hand the reservoir con tains only the maximum quantity of hydraulic fluid required 40 Externally toothed gear pump The increase in volume which results when a tooth moves out of mesh produces a vacuum in the suction area The hydraulic fluid is conveyed into the pressure area The hydraulic fluid is then forced out of the tooth gaps by the meshing of the teeth and displaced into the above supply line 41 Internally toothed gear pump The inner gear is driven by a motor The teeth of the inner wheel drive the outer gear wheel The rotary motion creates a vacuum in the gaps between the teeth causing hydraulic fluid to be sucked in On the other side the teeth engage once more and oil is displaced from the tooth chambers
429. rid snap function may not be desired as it prevents free positioning In this case you can hold down the Ctrl key during the moving operation this temporarily deactivates the alignment lines and the grid snap function Various Snap points can be activated for precise drawing During a drawing operation the mouse pointer snaps into place as soon as it is close to a Snap point The following snap functions are available Snap to Grid Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 7 1 4 Rulers 7 2 Drawing levels Press and hold the Ctrl key during a drawing operation to tempo rarily deactivate the object snap function To be able to use object snap you need to activate the option in the menu The rulers can be shown and hidden via Show Rulers They are displayed at the left hand as well as the upper edge of the circuit window To be able to use the rulers you need to activate the Expert Mode option in the menu FluidSIM supports 256 drawing levels which can be shown hidden and locked unlocked individually In addition you can also define the color and line thickness for every drawing level Using the Drawing Layers menu item on the menu you can set the properties of the individual layers and also insert a description Note The drawing frame is located on layer 0 by default Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 67 Drawing Layers Number Desc
430. ription Color Line Width Display kia gt nivel E piel Cemo E CS ce iia gt nivel CS eaaa CS eaaa as fe iia gt nivel lIndiwial ow trast P ali ali 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 8 J ca SS S S S S RAR Ra S S S S RAAR RRE Preserve Olject L E Display Hidden Objects in Parts Lists Place Objects on Default Layer orate T Figure 7 2 Drawing Layers dialog window The drawing layer settings can be copied over as default settings from the current circuit using the Inherit From Page button You can select the drawing layer where newly inserted objects should be placed under Default Layer f you do not want the symbol layer to be changed when objects are inserted then select the Preserve Object Layer option Objects located on a drawing layer for which the Edif option is deactivated are visible but cannot be highlighted and therefore neither moved nor deleted This enables you to lock a drawing frame for example if it was inserted manually and not via the Properties dialog window for the circuit or project In order to still be able to edit objects on layers of this type you must activate the Edif option for the corresponding layer 68 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Drawing layers for which the Display option is deactivated are neither visible nor can they be edited 7 3 Cross references Cross references se
431. rly with complex controls sys tems for which a control chain related numbering system can not be used due the overlaps involved 11 Circuit symbols for energy transfer 1 The symbols shown are used in circuit diagrams for energy transfer and hydraulic fluid preparation In the interests of clarity the lines in the circuit diagram should be drawn without cross overs as far as possible 595 596 AoA epurniee mil ene Strociisiung ose yng il zwe Stramnchborgen Dleklrancber Waestatiraschhys Bucsstclung durch avers arah Peterdcksiclurg AHechosedincer ambada Fa bendre l HA herh H Bente lst Are nei by inder Taha hus sacyl cles Al ye deshe einciel gree cd werdining 12 Circuit symbols for energy transfer 2 The direction of the arrows in the circuit symbols for the heater and cooler correspond to the direction of heat flow 13 Circuit symbols for energy conversion Hydraulic pumps are shown by a circle with a part representation of a drive shaft Triangles in the circles show the direction of flow The triangles are shown solid since pressure fluid is used in hydraulics Ifthe pressure medium is gaseous as in the case of pneumat ics the triangles are shown in outline 14 Circuit symbols for hydraulic motors The symbols for hydraulic motors are distinguished from the sym bols for hydraulic pumps by the fact that the arrows showing the direction of flow are the other way round
432. rol embossing of plastic Solution The cylinder advances if valve 1V1 is switched by push button valve 1S1 The pressure on the advancing side of the cylinder is fed from siy a junction to the limit valve 1S2 and then in series to the sequence valve The signal port 12 at the sequence valve acts against the preset compression of the adjustable spring If the limit valve 1S2 is operated due to full extension of the cylinder and the preset value is reached then the sequence valve opens from 1 to 2 and sends a pilot signal to port 12 of the control valve 1V1 The memory valve switches and the cylinder retracts At the same time the air from port 4 is exhausted and the pilot signal at the sequence valve is relieved through the limit valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 583 103 Exercise Pressure dependent control embossing of plastic Note Ifthe pressure does not reach the preset limit then the cylin der will remain advanced If the cylinder is obstructed during extension to the forward position the cylinder will not retract due to the dependency upon operation of the limit vale 1S2 The power circuit must be initialized by operating the 5 2 way memory valve manually via the manual overrides with the air off The air can then be turned on 23 8 Time delay valve 584 104 Time delay valve normally closed The valve has a lock able adjusting screw for setting time The valve is s
433. rom the View menu Here you can assign an identification that uniquely identifies the component in the circuit diagram The identification is shown as text in the circuit drawing if the Display option is selected Note FluidSIM automatically assigns a unique identification when inserting or copying circuit symbols An automatically assigned identification text begins with a question mark and can be edited by the user FluidSIM shows a warning if you are assigning an identifi cation that already exists Deactivate this option if you do not want the symbol to appear in the parts list Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 12 2 User Defined Properties You can enter your own component attributes in the User Defined Properties tab User Defined Properties X By x Translation Table Attribute Value Display Comment Supplier Festo E cr m O E Figure 12 3 Detail from the Properties dialog window for a compo nent User Defined Properties tab In order to edit an entry the corresponding row must be selected by clicking on it Clicking on the table cell to be modified again then enables you to edit the entry in the cell A row can be deleted by first clicking the row to highlight it The highlighted row can then be deleted using the Del key You can add any desired attributes by filling out the empty cells on the last row Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art S
434. rrent between drain and source by several orders of magni tude Depending on doping type MOSFETs are classified in two types n channel and p channel MOSFETs Unijunction transistor Similar to a normal bipolar transistor a unijunction transistor UJT provides three terminals Unlike a bipolar transistor however but similar to a diode there is only one p n junction In practice it acts like a controlled diode that despite the constant polarity of the applied voltage can be made conductive or non conductive Be cause of the two B terminals the UJT is also called double base diode Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 505 506 If a small positive control voltage against B1 is applied to the emitter nothing happens at first If the control voltage is raised further and a certain potential is reached the UEB1 voltage will collapse abruptly and at the same time the emitter current will jump to a certain value In a sense the UJT has been fired This behavior is very similar to a thyristor A UJT is cleared when the emitter current falls below a certain threshold Thyristor A thyristor is a semiconductor component built from four or more semiconductor films of varying levels of doping Thyristors are switchable components meaning they are non conductive in their initial state and can be switched on through a small gate current After a thyristor has been switched on it remains conduc
435. rties dialog window User Defined Properties Drawing Properties Main and secondary components Linking main and secondary components Link solenoid valves and solenoid coils Attributes of the text components Link text components with attributes Text components with specified links 207 207 208 208 209 210 211 212 212 212 213 213 214 215 215 216 218 219 221 222 223 223 225 229 232 234 Change the properties of multiple objects simultaneously 12 10 1 Drawing Properties 12 10 2 Main Component Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 235 239 23 13 Parts list management and analyses 239 13 1 Display parts list 240 13 2 Find components from the parts on the circuit diagram 241 13 3 Set parts list properties 243 13 4 Export parts list 246 13 5 Insert tube list 247 14 Manage projects 250 14 1 Create new project 250 14 2 Project nodes 251 14 2 1 Project archiving 251 14 3 Circuit and parts list nodes 252 15 Circuit and project properties 254 15 1 Attributes 255 15 1 1 Predefined placeholders 257 15 2 Page Dividers 258 15 3 Basic Unit Length 258 15 4 Encryption 259 15 5 Cross Reference Representation 261 16 Special functions for electric circuits 262 16 1 Potentials and conduction lines 262 16 2 Cables and wiring 264 16 2 1 Manage cables 270 16 2 2 Insert cable map 271 16 2 3 Insert cable list 273 16 2 4 Insert wiring list 276 16 3 Terminals and terminal strips 279
436. rve to link connected parts of a circuit drawing when the entire drawing is spread across multiple pages This allows lines to be interrupted for example and continued on an other page FluidSIM offers two types of cross references Paired cross references consist of two cross reference symbols that reference each other The two cross reference symbols are linked via a unique label that is entered for both symbols The option also exists to reference any object within a project from a cross reference symbol The cross reference is uni directional in this case from the cross reference to the target object This allows several cross references to reference the same object Both types enable you to jump directly from a cross reference to the associated target With the paired cross reference the target is the corresponding cross reference otherwise an object You jump to the corresponding target either using the button in the properties dialog window for the cross reference symbol or by highlighting the cross reference and select ing the Jump to Target menu item from the context menu The circuit drawings involved must belong to the same project Open the Cross reference dialog window from the menu and the menu item Alternatively you can open this dialog window by double clicking the cross reference symbol or using the context menu Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 69 Text Label Lin
437. s 10 6 12 Boolean value of an assertion In GRAFCET you can use Boolean values to calculate an assertion for example a counter C should be larger than 6 and step X1 should be activated C is larger than 6 can be calculated as with a variable To do this the assertion has to be set in square brack ets So in this example C gt 6 X1 If a Boolean assertion is positioned on its own in a condition then you can omit the square brackets in FluidSIM for example C gt 6 instead of C gt 6 See example Grafcet Grafcet13 ct Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 211 10 6 13 10 6 14 10 6 15 212 Target information If you want to interrupt an operative connection from a transition to a step you can enter the name of the target step in the transition s properties dialogue See example Grafcet Grafcet14 circ Partial GRAFCETs Partial GRAFCETs can be used to separate a GRAFCET into different hierarchy levels This function is most often used for enclosing steps and compulsory commands The name of a partial GRAFCET is always preceded by a G In order to determine partial GRAFCETs in FluidSIM the partial GRAFCET frame has to be placed over the relevant GRAFCET part and you have to assign a name in the properties dialogue The preceding G is not part of the name that you have to enter it is added automatically by FluidSIM and shown at the bottom left of t
438. s dialog window in the Drawing Properties tab Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 55 Drawing frame Chapter 6 6 1 Editable labels 56 In FluidSIM drawing frames are circuit diagrams which consists of a title block and the frame with the field divisions They can also be displayed in other circuit diagrams Existing CAD drawing frames can be imported using the DXF import menu item on the File menu No order to make a drawing frame usable in different pro jects and circuit diagrams a number of texts in the title block must be editable These texts are Author Creation date Project name Page name and Page number for example In FluidSIM these are text components with Attribute Link Texts in the title block of a drawing frame are text components You can use the imported texts or insert new text components at the desired positions Editable texts are text components with Attribute Link These texts are replaced by the corresponding attribute val ues of the project and the circuit Double click a text component to open the Properties dialog window Enter the name of the attribute to be linked e g creator in the text field and activate the Attribute Link option Note You can also use an imported text as an attribute name The attribute name is utilized as a placeholder These attributes are displayed in angle brackets in the circuit diagram with the draw ing fra
439. s multiple pages 278 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM lists Tables 2 4 Figure 16 19 Buttons for navigating through lists 16 3 Terminals and terminal strips 16 3 1 Set terminals You can Set individual terminals or multiple terminals in one step Select the menu item from the menu or click the t button to define an individual electric terminal This activates a mode that allows you to insert a terminal by click ing a free point on the electric line Figure 16 20 As soon as you have set a new terminal in this way the dialog window containing the settings for this terminal appears You can use this dialog window to assign the terminal to a terminal strip This assignment can also be made or changed later Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 279 Description Display Layer Pos Internal External Show Direction Terminal Strip 280 Terminal Description Intemal lt gt Extemal W Show Direction Teminal Strip El Display Identification Figure 16 21 7erminaldialog window Contains the description of the terminal or the terminal designa tion If this box is checked then the description entered will be displayed beside the terminal Defines the drawing layer for the line Defines the position of the terminal within the associated terminal strip An entry is only possible once the terminal has been assigned t
440. s once again As soon as you have performed your operations in this window and move the mouse pointer to a circuit window the library window and or Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 31 32 the project window are automatically hidden To deactivate the function click the associated tab again this then appears de pressed Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Edit circuit Chapter 5 5 1 Insert and arrange symbols You can insert symbols into the symbol window being edited using the dialog window Find Symbo and by means of the libraries You can also transfer objects from every other window by selecting them and dragging them to the desired window Alternatively you can also utilize the clipboard by selecting the items choosing the menu item on the menu bringing the target window into the foreground and selecting the menu item on the menu Using the mouse pointer to drag objects from one window to another copies them Dragging the objects from one position to another within a window moves them In order to copy within a window you need to hold down the Shift key while moving the mouse pointer You can recognize operation by the shape of the mouse pointer During a move operation a cross with arrows f appears when copying a plus symbol fz also appears in the lower right hand corner of the cross 5 2 Connect connectors ports In order to connect two componen
441. second way of linking a solenoid valve with a coil is to double click the solenoid valve s connector directly The coil connectors are represented like pneumatic connectors within the solenoid valve by means of small circles Double click the right connector of the solenoid valve A dialog window whose fields correspond to the entries for a con nector in the Connector Labels tab of the Properties dialog window Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Hectic Connector Browse E tik Prd Target W Display aa Go Ge Figure 12 11 Connectordialog window Select K2 from the list of compatible solenoid coils The electric connectors of the solenoid valve are now linked with the solenoid coils Figure 12 12 Link solenoid valve and solenoid coils 12 7 Attributes of the text components In FluidSIM text components serve firstly to insert comments and labels and secondly can be defined by the labels and accessories without displaying a symbol Open the dialog window Properties of the text component by double clicking on a text or via the menu item on the menu Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 229 230 Display in Parts Lists 7201524 nia Ream Horizontal Center Right Text Attributes Figure 12 13 Properties dialog window for a text component A text component possess all of the attributes
442. sentations of a partial aspect of an associated main component All product properties are stored in the main component The secondary components only have a description and a reference to the associated main component In electrical engineering in par ticular components such as relays are divided into main and sec ondary components where the coil is the main component and the contacts are the secondary components 12 5 Linking main and secondary components Main and secondary components are linked using the symbol for the secondary component The circuit diagram detail shows a relay comprising a coil as the main component and two contacts as the secondary components The contacts are to be linked with the coil This information is evaluated when displaying the contact image Figure 12 5 Relay comprising coil with two contacts The symbol identifications are the defaults used in FluidSIM The symbols are not linked together yet Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 223 Description Main Component Browse Link Find Target Display 224 Open the corresponding properties dialog window by double clicking a contact Main Component 7 Display Suppress Inherited Parts OK _ Canai __ Arey __Hee Figure 12 6 Properties dialog window for a contact Defines a description for the secondary component In the case of a contact this is shown in the terminal diagram
443. sistance relates to the resistance of the individual measuring orifices and control resis tors Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance Pressure compensator 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 375 Hydraulic resistance Metering orifice 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 537 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Flush valve with pressure relief valve If differential pressure exceeds the required force for the spring the valve opens from B to the pressure relief valve The pressure relief valve assures that pressure on the suction side does not drop to below the required minimum pressure for the pump Adjustable parameters Spring preload 0 40 MPa 0 25 Hydraulic resistance Directional valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 2 0 08 Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 5 Hydraulic resistance Pressure control valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 08 21 1 9 Continuous valves 4 3 way regulating valve The regulating valve transforms an analog electrical input signal into corresponding opening cross sections at the outputs The setpoint signal must be within the range 10 V to 10 V At O V the hydraulic mid position is adopted and the valve stops the flow in relation to the null overlap The cross section area of the flow opening widens with increasing slide distance How far the area and with it the flow at the valve changes depends on the shape and form of the control notches A triangular shaped
444. ssed air flows to the main piston and actuates the main valve disc The symbol shows the roller operating a pilot signal 49 4 2 way valve disc seat The valve is robust Two stems directly operate the disc seats The load required to move the stems may be large for high flow rate valves Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 4 a 1 cy maja 3 pra 5 jp p aan zA i oe ks in F i he r tal an Compare the construction with the 3 2 way valve 50 4 2 way valve disc seat The 4 2 way valve has four ports and two positions A disc seat 4 2 way valve is similar in characteristic to the combination of two 3 2 way valves one valve normally closed and the other normally open The plungers can be operated by an auxiliary mounted device such as a roller lever or push button When the two plungers are actuated simultaneously 1 to 2 and 4 to 3 are closed by the first movement By pressing the valve plungers further against the discs opposing the reset spring force the passages between 1 to 4 and from 2 to 3 are opened Show the similarities to the 3 2 way valve construction Dis cuss the valve overlap 51 4 3 way valve mid position closed The 4 3 way valve has four ports and three positions An example of the 4 3 way valve is the plate slide valve with hand or foot actuation By turning two discs channels are interconnected with one another Compare
445. sses freely from 1 to 2 This valve is Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM derived from a configurable 5 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 5 2 way impulse valve pneumatically operated 14 P 42 The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying reciprocal pilot aig alee pressures at connection 14 flow passes from 1 to 4 and connec 1 tion 12 flow passes from 1 to 2 The valve s operating position remains until an opposite signal is received by the valve This valve is derived from a configurable 5 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under t
446. ssure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Double acting cylinder The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is operated by the recip rocal input of compressed air at the front and back of the cylinder The end position damping is adjustable via two regular screws The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be used to operate a proximity switch Adjustable parameters Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 20 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 8 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Reference pressure 0 1 20 bar 6 Reference velocity 0 1 2 m s 1 Friction at dp_ref 1 5000N 120 Break away force at dp_ref 1 5000N 12 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 10 MPa 0 5 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 10 MPa 1 Damping length 1 100 mm 10 Double acting cylinder with in and out piston rod Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 455 456 The in and out piston rod of the double acting cylinder is controlled by alternating the compressed air input The cushioning can be adapted with two adjustment screws Adjustable parameters Piston diamete
447. ssurizing valve with plunger control is operated by the surface of the cylinder cam When the plunger is operated com pressed air flows freely until the nozzle is closed A signal up to the level of the boost pressure is assembled at exit connection 2 In the Simulation Mode the valve can be switched manually by click ing on the component thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the valve Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Pneumatic proximity switch solenoid operated A permanent solenoid found on the piston of a cylinder drives this 3 2 pneumatic directional valve and triggers the control signal The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 In the Simulation Mode the valve can be swit
448. stems GmbH e FluidSIM Signal link Representation gt e Cancel Help Figure 20 10 20 5 2 Drawing signal lines from signals In the Freely draw signal lines z signal lines can be drawn from signals Left click a signal and hold down the mouse button Drag the mouse pointer to a position which you have selected as the end point of a signal line The signal line will be drawn once you release the mouse button 3 234 23 6 2 es Zs 1 5 j i i i 1 2 Tie 3 20 5 3 Draw signal lines from diagram support points In the Freely draw signal lines mode z signal lines can be drawn from curve support points Left click a supporting point and hold down the mouse button Drag the mouse pointer to a second supporting point The signal line will be drawn once you have the Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 347 mouse pointer over the second supporting point and release the mouse button 20 6 Insert additional signal lines In the nsert additional signal lines mode additional support ing points can be inserted into existing signal lines 20 7 Insert row Clicking on the nsert row button inserts a new diagram row above the current selection If no cell is market then a new row is attached to the end of the diagram 20 8 Delete row Clicking on the Delete row button deletes a selected diagram row If nothing is selected then the function is not availa
449. t line on the left hand surface of the pilot piston against an adjusta ble spring force Pressure regulators reduce the inlet pressure to an adjustable outlet pressure It is appropriate to use these in hydraulic in Stallations only if different pressures are required 74 2 way pressure regulator 2 When the pressure rises at outlet A the force at the left hand surface of the pilot piston becomes greater the piston is displaced to the right and the throttle gap becomes narrower This causes a pressure drop In the case of slide valves it is also possible to design the control edges in such way that the opening gap increases only Slowly This gives greater control precision 75 2 way pressure regulator 3 When the preset maximum pressure is reached the throttle point closes completely the pressure set on the pressure relief valve is produced at the inlet P 76 2 way pressure regulator 4 In the circuit illustrated the piston rod of the cylinder is executing an advance stroke The pressure at the outlet A of the pressure regulator is less than the system pressure at P and constant 77 2 way pressure regulator 5 The piston rod of the cylinder is now in its forward end position The pressure at outlet A thus continues to rise and the throttle point closes completely Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 78 Circuit diagram 2 way pressure regulator The illustrati
450. t modules that are not connected locally e g via a network connec tion However if the EasyPort modules are connected directly to the simulating PC it is recommended to set up the direct connec tion Drag a digital input or output component from the component library into a circuit window and open the properties dialog box by double clicking or via the menu item Properties The following dialog box will open Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 155 Component Parameters Connect EasyPort via Direct EasyPort connection Serial port iia Detect EasyPorts Connector color Voltage range ZS leo Connection established as No connection Figure 9 26 Dialog box for the EasyPort components Direct EasyPort connection Here you can set the serial port by which the hardware is connected Connector color Voltage range 156 to the PC which EasyPort module and port number is assigned to the input output component If you do not know the exact number of the serial port leave the setting as Automatically FluidSIM then searches all COM ports for connected EasyPorts l Older EasyPorts are fitted as standard with only a serial port of the kind used for many years on PCs and also in industrial applications Modern PCs and especially portable computers however increas ingly do not feature this connection Nonetheless the serial port interface can be retrofitted
451. t of the 3 2 way valve The topic can be used as an intermediate stage for explanation of the related symbols 25 Single acting cylinder The cylinder requires one pneumatic connection and an exhaust port The exhaust port must be clear of obstructions to ensure that the piston is not restricted by the air passage A filter is normally fitted to the exhaust port Discuss the importance of selecting the size of the cylinder to match the load conditions 26 Single acting cylinder With single acting cylinders compressed air is applied on only one side of the piston face The other side is open to atmosphere The cylinders can perform work in only one direction The return move ment of the piston is effected by a built in spring or by the applica tion of an external force The spring force returns the piston to its Start position with a reasonably high speed under no load condi tions The stroke is limited by the natural length of the spring Single acting cylinders are therefore only available in stroke lengths of up to 100 mm Compare the construction with the double acting type Discuss the spring size and return speed 27 Control of a double acting cylinder The 4 2 way directional control valve is suitable for the control of a double acting cylinder Normal practice is to use the 5 2 way valve TEI 558 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM a The cylinder mot
452. t some sliders allow you to select the control range However you can also enter the numeric value directly as a number in the input field Most parameters can also be controlled using a game controller For details see Adjusting the component parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 9 10 Settings for simulation In the menu basic parameters and options for the simulation can be set under Simulation Environment parameters Fluid properties and Sound 1 Note that these settings are only used if no others are defined in the page or project properties Newly created pages and projects are preset with the standard values set under Options 9 11 Use of the EasyPort hardware FluidSIM can directly address EasyPorts connected to the serial ports of the PC No additional drivers or auxiliary programs are required These days however serial ports are rare outside indus trial environments To use the EasyPort via a USB cable you may require drivers that you will find on the installation DVD and which you can also download online from Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG The EasyPort hardware is linked to the components in FluidSIM via special electrical input output components which each have either eight digital inputs outputs or two analog outputs four analog inputs 1 The EasyPort hardware can also be addressed using DDE and OPC communication This allows you to control even remote EasyPor
453. t connectors with a line move the mouse pointer to the component connector You can recognize a connector by the small circle at the end of a symbol s connection line AS soon as you have touched the line the mouse pointer trans forms into a crosshair gt Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 33 34 fe 1 nonamel cl fa Figure 5 1 Mouse pointer as a crosshair over a component con nector Now press the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer to the connector which you wish to connect with the first You can recognize when you are over the connector by the shape of the mouse pointer amp gt If the mouse pointer is over a connector which is already connected to a line then the prohibited sign appears and no line can be connected Release the mouse button once you have touched the second connector FluidSIM automatically lays a line between the two connectors Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM E1 nonamet Pe ae Figure 5 2 Line between two connectors H Support points can be set when dragging lines To do so simply release the mouse button while dragging the line and click the desired points The line is completed as soon as you click a second connector or the same point twice You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc key or the right mouse button 5 3 Automatically connect connectors FluidSIM supports two methods o
454. t with open pressure relief valve 1 FluidSIM not only animates the switching of manually actuated components but nearly all components which have multiple states The following figure shows a pressure relief valve in closed position and in open position 108 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM ree 1 Figure 8 14 Closed and open pressure relief valve Remember that manually operated valves and switches can be switched during Simulation Mode by clicking them with the mouse Move the mouse pointer onto the left hand side of the direc tional control valve The mouse pointer changes into a hand with pointing finger indicating that the valve can be switched over Click the left hand side of the valve and hold down the mouse button When you click a valve with the mouse the real behavior of the valve is simulated In our example the clicked valve is switched over and recalculation begins automatically As a result the pres sure relief valve closes and the cylinder retracts As soon as the cylinder reaches its left hand stop the pressure relief valve opens again 1 When non detenting components are clicked they remain actuated as long as the mouse button is held down Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode Select the state diagram from the component library and move it into the circuit window The state diagram records the quantity values for the most im portant compone
455. tangle sine and triangle signals The voltage range is restricted to 10 V to 10 V The frequency the amplitude and the Y offset of the signal can be set within this range A voltage profile can be additionally specified Data points can be set interactively with a mouse click in the relevant graphic field These can then be com bined to a closed polygon Alternatively existing data points can be marked and both numeric values for the time and the correspond ing voltage can be entered in the input fields If the option Loop is selected then the voltage profile is started again Adjustable parameters Signal type Rectangle Sine Triangle Constant Profile Sine Frequency 0 01 100000 Hz 1 Amplitude 0 400 V 5 y Offset 100 100 V 0 Min Voltage 400 400 V 30 Max Voltage 400 400 V 30 Function generator The function generator is a voltage source that can create constant rectangle sine and triangle signals The voltage range is restricted to 10 V to 10 V The frequency the amplitude and the Y offset of the signal can be set within this range A voltage profile can be additionally specified Data points can be set interactively with a mouse click in the relevant graphic field These can then be com bined to a closed polygon Alternatively existing data points can be marked and both numeric values for the time and the correspond ing voltage can be entered in the input fields If the op
456. ted if this option is active For example a line from an electric connector to a pneumatic connector cannot be created in this case FluidSIM supports the automatic connection of connectors The following settings define which connections should be automatical ly created Pneumatic connectors that are on one horizontal line will be auto matically connected when a symbol is inserted or moved Pneumatic connectors that are on one vertical line will be automati cally connected when a symbol is inserted or moved Electric connectors that are on one horizontal line will be automati cally connected when a symbol is inserted or moved Electric connectors that are on one vertical line will be automatical ly connected when a symbol is inserted or moved Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 305 18 8 Warnings Wamings Show Wamings Duplicated identification labels Duplicated cross reference labels Unresolved link targets Superimposed objects Lines through connectors Open pneumatic connectors E Open electric connectors Objects outside the drawing area Unassigned Terminals Unassigned Cyclic object references Enable Background Check Show Warnings Enable Background Check 306 Figure 18 8 Options dialog window Warnings tab Different types of warnings that FluidSIM should or should not deliver can be activated and deactivated here These warnings include Duplicated identification l
457. tems GmbH e FluidSIM You can switch into state change mode directly from an actively running simulation 8 3 Simulating circuits you create yourself This section assumes that you are already familiar with the basic concepts involved in creating circuits If necessary read the section Create a new circuit drawing first 1 Circuit diagrams can be created and modified in Edit Mode only You can identify Edit Mode by the mouse arrow pointer 8 3 1 Example with a pneumatic circuit Create the circuit shown in the figure Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 95 Figure 8 1 Simple pneumatic circuit To define the valve s actuation type double click the valve The valve s property dialog opens Go to the Configure Valve tab Then in the top drop down list on the left side select a manual actuation with detenting On the right side click the Spring returned field If required you can also set the standard nominal flow rate of the valve Close the dialog box with OK As port 3 on the valve is only needed as an air outlet set a silencer there Double click the port Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM A dialog box opens where you can select a 7erminator by clicking the downward pointing arrow to the right of the list and selecting the blanking plug or a silencer symbol Select the third symbol the simple silencer and close
458. ter an input pulse The output is set on expiration of this time As soon as the status at the input Trg changes from Lo to Hi the specified time starts After expira tion on the configured time the output Q is set to Hi Further switching actions at input Trg have no influence on the running time The output and the time are only reset to Lo when the status at input R is Hi Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 100 s 3 514 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Latching Relay Input S sets output Q Another input R resets the output Q A latch ing relay is a simple logic memory The output value depends on the input states and on the previous output status Pulse Relay A short oneshot at the input is used to set and reset the output Output Q status is toggled at every Lo to Hi transition of the Status at input Trg that is the output is switched on or off Use input R to reset the pulse relay to initial state that is the output is set to Lo Wiping Relay Pulse Output An input signal generates a signal of specified length at the output The output status is switched to Hi after the input Trg is set to Hi The configured time is started at the same time and the out put remains set After expiration of the configured time the output is reset to the status Lo pulse output If the input status chang es from Hi to Lo
459. ters Impulse time 0 01 100 s 3 Impulse pause time 0 01 100 s 1 Frequency Threshold Trigger Ix The output is switched on and off depending on two frequencies which can be specified The threshold trigger measures the signals at input Fre The pulses are captured across a measuring interval which can be specified If the frequency measured within the meas uring interval higher than the input frequency the output Q is switched to Hi Q is switched again to Lo when the measured frequency has reached the value of the output frequency or if it is lower Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM 517 On frequency 0 01 9999 Hz 6 Off frequency 0 01 9999 Hz 2 Time interval 0 001 100s 5 21 7 GRAFCET Elements 21 7 1 GRAFCET Step The name of a step may contain the following characters 0 9 a z A Z and the underscore _ You can select from the following seven different step types simple step initial step macro step macro input macro output enclosing step and initial enclosing step Furthermore you can give the step an activation link Transition You can give a transition a name which is shown to the left of the transition in brackets Entering a transition condition is supported by buttons for special symbols AND OR NOT falling edge rising edge delay Via you can select an existing GRAFCET variable
460. that there are two versions of the license connector The newer one is silver in color and has the product label CodeMeter If you have purchased FluidSIM as an update of an earlier version you can also continue to use your existing green WibuKey con nector if it has been reprogrammed accordingly For online activation you do not need a license connector instead you require your individual product ID which is printed on the back of the DVD case Follow the instructions of the installation program If you are not sure how to answer any of the questions simply click vex Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM First steps Chapter 3 3 1 Create a new circuit drawing Available technologies When you start FluidSIM the system checks whether you have installed more than one technology pneumatics hydraulics elec tronics If you have the selection window appears listing the available technologies Here you specify which components and program functions you wish to use in this program session This decision is especially important for network users because a li cense will be occupied for each technology until you exit FluidSIM You can restart FluidSIM at any time and select a different combina tion fed FluidSIM Select Technologies Available technologies Pneumatics 3 available i Hydraulics Local license MW Electrical engineering 3 available For each selected technol
461. the input and output variables of the related GRAFCET PLC component Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM perf ols Jiz fis fia fis fis 7 GRAFCET PLC ov a0jat a2 aa as as asja7 Figure 10 14 GRAFCET PLC component A GRAFCET PLC component needs to be assigned to a GRAFCET This is normally the GRAFCET on the same page However you can also specify a separate page in the project where the related GRAFCET is located You can open the properties dialog box by double clicking You can access the adjustable parameters on the Component Parameters tab Drawing Properties Related pages r Inputs Outputs i0 Qo l1 al 2 Q2 3 Q3 l4 Q4 15 5 16 QE 7 a7 Figure 10 15 Adjustable parameters of the GRAFCET PLC compo nent Related pages The GRAFCET plans on the specified pages will be assigned to the GRAFCET PLC component If you do not specify any related pages the GRAFCET assigned will be the one on the same page as the GRAFCET PLC component Inputs This list defines the names of the input variables that can be evalu ated by the conditions of the related GRAFCET Specifying a name is Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 193 Outputs 194 optional The input variable names l0 to I7 are created auto matically The value of an input variables is set to 1 when a voltage of at least 24 volts is applied to the c
462. the curve the display alters accord ingly updating the values as the mouse pointer moves If you move 118 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH FluidSIM the mouse along the curve the display alters accordingly updating the values as the mouse pointer moves 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Desmip ion O Identification Quantity value Figure 8 24 Display of the exact values in the state diagram Time 10 805 s 1 0 035 A You can use multiple state diagrams in one window and can also display multiple components in the same diagram You can add a component to a state diagram by dragging it onto the diagram A dialog will open where you can select the quantity values to be logged and can assign different colors to them Dragging onto the diagram again opens the dialog box again allowing you to change your selection If no quantity value is assigned to a component it is not displayed in the diagram This concludes the example Further editing and simulation con cepts are described in the next section Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 119 Advanced concepts in simulating and creating circuits Chapter 9 This section describes advanced concepts and functions for simula tion and circuit creation in FluidSIM 9 1 Adjusting the component parameters Most of the symbols in FluidSIM s component library are basic symbols representing various different versions o
463. the piston rods double ended with magnetic coupling or slide and the number none one two is possible An end position cushioning without with adjustable can also be defined FluidSIM automatically adjusts the symbol according to the preset configuration In addition a load to be moved including possible static and sliding friction and a variable force profile can be defined in the properties dialog In the compo nent library from FluidSIM there are several pre configured cylin ders that can be inserted in your circuit and directly used Should no suitable symbol be available then simply choose the compo nent with the most similarity to the required component open the properties dialog and adjust the configuration accordingly Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Piston diameter 1 1000 mm 16 Piston rod diameter 0 1000 mm 10 Piston Position 0 5000 mm 0 Maximum stroke 1 5000 mm 200 Mounting angle 0 360 deg 0 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Break away force 0 10000N 65 Coulomb friction force 0 10000 N 55 Viscous friction 0 1 10000 N s m 215 Parameter input Calculate automatically Enter manually Calcu late automatically Moving mass 0 01 1000 kg 0 3 Leakage 0 101 min bar 0 Spring pressure at x 0 0 40 MPa 0 4 Spring pressure at x x_max 0 4
464. the same diagram You can add a component to a state diagram by dragging it onto the diagram A dialog will open where you can select the quantity values to be logged and can assign different colors to them Dragging onto the diagram again opens the dialog box again allowing you to change your selection If no quantity value is assigned to a component it is not displayed in the diagram This concludes the example Further editing and simulation con cepts are described in the next section 8 3 2 Example with a hydraulic circuit Create the circuit shown in the figure Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 103 104 Figure 8 9 Simple hydraulic circuit To define the valve s actuation type double click the valve valve s property dialog opens Go to the Configure Valve tab Then in the top drop down list on the left side select a manual actuation and the valve bodies Crosswise and Parallel Then on the right side click the Spring returned field If required you can also set the hydraulic resistance of the valve Close the dialog box with OK The valve should now look like this Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM P T Figure 8 10 Manually operated 4 2 way valve Now try to simulate this circuit Start the simulation with p gt or with or with F9 Then all pressures and flow rates are calculated the lines are
465. time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 427 428 3 2 way solenoid valve normally open The solenoid valve is controlled by applying a voltage signal at the solenoid coil Connection 1 is shut By stopping the signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return spring The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 If no signal is applied to the valve it can be manually operated This valve is derived froma configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 E
466. ting valve is mirrored horizontally in this exam ple Start the simulation and observe that the cylinder stops once it has traveled half the distance Now we want to expand the circuit so that the cylinder can move to any position we set on a slider during the simulation as quickly as possible but still accurately This is done using a PID controller Construct the following circuit and set the parameter values for the PID controller as shown 1 Note that the regulating valve is mirrored from its position in the example above Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 167 168 PID controller Proportional gain 0 Lt Integral gain 0 1s 0 1000 B Derivation gain 0 ms 0 1000 ll Control quantity offset 5 v 7 7 B Figure 9 37 Position control with PID controller Start the simulation and slowly move the y offset of the func tion generator between 0 and 10 The cylinder moves until it reaches its setpoint position where it stops The cylinder s target position is proportional to the voltage set on the function generator with 0 V equating to fully retracted and 10 V meaning fully advanced The value 5 thus represents Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM the cylinder piston s mid position It does not matter what position the cylinder starts from it will always stop at the specified target position Vary
467. tion In this mode GRAFCETs are treated as drawings only They are not incorporated into the simulation See also Drawing only GrafEdit This mode uses GRAFCETs for visual presentation of the simulation The defined actions however have no effect on the simulation In particular they do not in any way control the fluidic or electrical components See also Observation GrafView In this mode the GRAFCET has access to all the circuit variables that can be set from outside This allows it to switch valves over or to adjust throttle valves See also Control GrafControl When this option is switched on the GRAFCET monitors the proper functioning of a fluidic or electrical circuit For this purpose you can formulate conditions in the actions which will be checked during the simulation For more details see Monitoring with GRAFCET actions Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Note that these settings are only used if no others are defined in the page or project properties 18 12 DDE Connection BBE Connection Server FLUIDSIM E Enable DDE connection Figure 18 12 Options dialog window DDE Connection tab Here you can set the default values for the DDE interface Note that the server name is a global setting of the specific system environment and is not saved with the circuit data If you want to use the DDE interface in other environments ensure that the DDE options are adapted a
468. tion Loop is selected then the voltage profile is started again Adjustable parameters Signal type Rectangle Sine Triangle Constant Profile Sine Frequency 0 01 100000 Hz 1 Amplitude O 400 V 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 467 y Offset 100 100 V 0 Min Voltage 400 400 V 30 Max Voltage 400 400 V 30 Setpoint value card Voltage profiles in the range 10 V to 10 V can be created using H the setpoint value card Up to 8 setpoints W1 to W8 can be speci fied in the voltage range 10 V to 10 V The setpoint card requires a power supply of 24 V The increase from the current setpoint to the next setpoint is defined using 4 ramps R1 to R4 with values between 0 s V and 10 s V i e a low ramp value signifies a large increase whereas a high ramp value results in a small increase The active ramp is defined as follows R1 by a positive increase of 0 V R2 by a negative increase up to 0 V R3 by a negative increase of 0 V and R4 by a positive increase up to O V Three operating modes can be selected Wait for switching time Advance setpoints and External control n operating mode Wait for switching time the setpoints are sequentially advanced when the preset change over time has expired If Advance setpoints is selected then upon attaining the active setpoint the next setpoint is started without delay In operating mode
469. tion Motion energy is required for an increase in the flow velocity of the oil at a restriction This motion energy is derived from the pressure energy If the vacuum which results is smaller than 30 kPa 0 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 601 bar air dissolved in the oil is precipitated out When the pressure rises again due to a reduction in speed the oil bursts into the gas bubbles Cavitation is a significant factor in hydraulic systems as a cause of wear in devices and connections 36 Cavitation Local pressure peaks occur during cavitation This causes the erosion of small particles from the wall of the pipe immediately after the reduced cross section leading to material fatigue and often also to fractures This effect is accompanied by considerable noise 37 Input and output power Various losses occur at the individual devices within a hydraulic control chain These consist essentially of mechanical electrical and volumetric losses After an installation has been in service for some time there will be a change in particular in the volumetric efficiency of the pump as the result for example of cavitation See topic 35 24 5 Components of a Power Unit 602 38 Hydraulic power unit The hydraulic power unit power supply unit provides the energy required for the hydraulic installation Its most important compo nents are the reservoir tank drive elect
470. tion The newly plotted curve shows a clear deviation the leakage oil losses have become greater at higher operating pressures the volumetric efficiency has become worse The main reason for this is pump wear Regarding the circuit diagram for the test assembly The adjustable flow control valve 1V3 is adjusted in such a way that the pressure gauge 1Z1 shows the desired system pressure The pressure relief valve 1V2 is used to limit the system pressure while valve 1V1 acts as a Safety valve for the pump The measured values taken as the basis for this exercise do not allow for the characteristic curve of the electric motor The mo tor characteristic thus forms part of the calculated error Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 635 164 Exercise Bending machine directly controlled pressure l relief valve A bending machine is used to bend steel plates The bending tools l are driven by hydraulic cylinders It is now desired to use the bend ae ing machine for considerably thicker steel plates than before This requires a hydraulic system pressure of 45 bar against the previous 30 bar According to the manufacturer s data the pump used is suitable for the higher operating pressure Testing reveals howev er that the bending process is now much too slow In this case leakage losses in the piping or directional control valve are ruled out as the cause of the problem A directly controlled pressur
471. tity values Terminator 46 Connection pneumatic Identification Display quantity values E Pressure E Fow rate Teminator E ok Cancel Ay Hep Figure 5 15 Connectordialog window setting the properties of a connector You can enter a text identifying this connector into the input line If the Display option is activated then the identification is displayed in the circuit diagram Whether or not the identification is actually displayed depends on the option selected under Show Connector Descriptions During the simulation the calculated quantity values can be dis played not only with specialized measuring devices but also direct ly at the connectors For a quick overview you can use Quantity Values to show all values at all connectors with a single click As this is generally fairly confusing you can also choose to view the quantity values at selected connectors only For more details see Displaying quantity values Open the symbol list containing connector terminators by clicking the button using the arrow Select a suitable silencer or a blanking plug Note Please note that this symbol list is only available if a line is not connected to the connector in question If you wish to connect a Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM line to a sealed connector you first have to remove the blanking plug or silencer To do this select the empty fi
472. tive even if there is no gate current A thyristor can be switched off by falling below a minimum current the so called holding current DIAC A DIAC diode for alternating current is an electronic component with only two terminals DIACs are also referred to as symmetrical trigger diodes The junction between the terminals only becomes conductive after a breakover voltage has been reached The DIAC s bidirectional layout allows for the switching of alternat ing voltages As soon as the voltage on the terminals A1 and A2 rises above a certain threshold voltage it will switch through and the p n junction becomes conductive Resistance will rise rapidly again after the current that is flowing through the DIAC falls below a certain value the holding current This procedure is referred to as resetting the DIAC TRIAC In principle A TRIAC triode for alternating current represents an inverse parallel connection of two thyristors This allows for switch Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM ing of alternating current while a single thyristor can switch in only One direction and thus acts in its on state like a diode A TRIAC has a control terminal G gate and two main terminals MT1 and MT2 where M72 is usually directly connected to the casing In order to be able to use a single control terminal for both thyristors TRIACs contain two firing or helper thyristor junctions so that it
473. tly used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 375 21 1 5 Shutoff Valves 376 Shutoff valve The shutoff valve can be manually opened or closed The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Opening level 0 100 100 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 1 Check valve If the inlet pressure at Ais higher than the outlet pressure at B then the check valve allows the flow to pass otherwise it blocks the flow Adjustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 09 Check valve spring loaded If the inlet pressure at Ais higher than the outlet pressure at B and the nominal pressure then the check valve allows the flow to pass ot
474. to edit a polyline om wt a gt ca O rt fas O 5 O n Nn lt 3 oO O oa rt gt rt a gt ca a gt D Ee O n om wt a gt ca 3 O Wn ca O 2 3 r g gt a Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 319 19 3 Insert 320 Align Aligns the selected objects with each other Rotate Rotates the selected objects by 90 180 or 270 degrees anti clockwise Grouped objects are rotated around the center point of the group rectangle Mirror Mirrors the selected objects horizontally or vertically Grouped objects are mirrored along the axis of the group rectangle Properties Opens the Properties dialog window for the selected circuit sym bols in order to enter the component properties The Connector dialog window is opened for the selected compo nent connector enabling you to enter the connector properties When a line segment is highlighted a dialog window opens ena bling you to enter the line properties If multiple objects are selected then a dialog window with a limited selection of properties appears It only contains those properties which affect all of the selected objects Find Symbol Description Opens the search dialog for selecting a symbol via its appearance or its description Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Conduction Line Opens a dialog window that defines the settings for one or
475. to Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM ry r kr hi o mal rLla T j Dirkie Ansteucrurg Dirshte Arielauarumg unbebsilgt Emaii m __ Bu Like el J i au 1 a p rlia artia Indirskia Arabian J Indinckbe arshcucrung Unb hddgt bahiligt 61 Direct control unactuated A single acting cylinder of 25 mm diameter is to clamp a component when a push button is pressed As long as the push button is operated the cylinder is to remain in the clamped position Since the cylinder is the only working element or actuator in the circuit it is designated 1A1 The final control element that advances the cylinder is designated 1S1 Discuss the circuit layout standard numbering and operation Note the circuit is shown in the initial state 62 Indirect control unactuated A large diameter single acting cylinder is to extend upon operation of a push button valve The valve is situated at a remote and dis tant position The cylinder is to retract once the remote push button is released The signal at the pilot port 12 remains as long as the push button is held down This is an indirect push button control of the cylinder If the push button is released the spring return closes the 3 2 way valve and removes the pilot signal at the control valve Discuss the circuit layout standard numbering and operation Note the circuit is shown in the initial state 63 Exercise Direct control of a double acting cylind
476. to be displayed per page The relevant pages will also be output when the circuit diagram is printed Buttons for naviga tion are displayed underneath the page if the list is split across multiple pages Lists Tables 2 4 Ce Figure 13 2 Buttons for navigating through lists Previous 13 1 Display parts list We recommend setting up one file specifically for the parts list in a project If you wish to create a circuit drawing without creating a project you can switch the view for this circuit to the parts list view Selecting the Parts List menu item from the menu enables you to switch from the circuit view to the parts list view Conversely selecting the Circuit Diagram menu item from the menu enables you to switch from the parts list view to the circuit view A parts list is displayed as a table in the window You can edit the following options for editing the table Attributes which the user can edit can be entered directly into the corresponding table field Clicking on the column header sorts the rows on the basis of the column clicked Clicking on the head of the same column again reverses the sorting order You can adjust the column width by dragging the edges of a column header You can change the order of the columns by dragging and dropping a column header in another position 240 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 13 2 Find components from t
477. to operate only against the resistance of the valve which has a favorable effect on the power balance 112 4 3 way valve with pump bypass 3 The valve is in its left hand switching position there is flow from P to A and from B to T 113 4 3 way valve with pump bypass 4 The circuit shows the 4 3 way valve in functional representation as a final control element of a double acting cylinder The valve is in its mid position the pump delivery flows via the by pass line within the pilot piston to the tank The non return valve protects the pump in cases where the piston rod of the cylinder is subject to an external load 114 Circuit diagram 4 3 way valve with pump bypass The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the 4 3 way valve as a circuit symbol Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 621 Lie 115 4 3 way valve with pump bypass The animations show the switching of the 4 3 way valve into the three switching positions and the corresponding cylinder move ments During the advance stroke movement can be halted by switching to the mid position AS appropriate to the application in question a circuit of this kind must be equipped with a brake valve to prevent damage to the installation when the valve is switched to the mid position see also topic 64 116 4 3 way valve with closed mid position 1 From the logic point of view 4 3 way val
478. to the background This means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this In particular it means that symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements for example Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground This means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this In particu lar it means that symbols are covered by filled drawing elements for example To change the vertices of a polyline or to set new vertices switch to the polyline editing mode by selecting the Edit Poly Line menu item or activating the button on the toolbar You can move the existing vertices by clicking and dragging The mouse pointer changes to 8 when you mouse over an existing vertex If the mouse pointer is over a line without a vertex 1 is displayed and a new vertex is inserted as soon as you click A rectangle is drawn by defining two diagonally opposite corner points The rectangle specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Properties tab of the Properties dialog window for the rectangle Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 83 Scale Rotation Override Color Fill Area Line Style Line Width Background Foreground 84 Position Top Size Width Height Color Line Style Line Width G Background Drawing Properties Scale x l 1 Rotation 0 o OF Fil Area i 0i a ees Figure 7 11 Properties dialog w
479. trol solenoids the valve is set to parallel or crossover position If no current is flowing through the control solenoids the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the Library menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 I2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10s5 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way solenoid valve with bypass position ii In normal position the connections A and B are closed and P to T opened When actuated by the control solenoids the valve is set to crossover or parallel position If no current is flowing through the control solenoids the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequen
480. trol valve H 68 Exercise Indirect control of a double acting cylinder Note wa The supply line can be short since the control valve can be mounted close to the cylinder The other advantage is that the signal element i e push button 3 2 way valve can be small as it only provides a signal to operate the control valve and is not required to operate the cylinder directly 23 5 Shutoff valves 69 Non return valves Rockschilayeeriil Auickschlaqventil taderbalesies 5 Wecheekentil ODER Funkion 3 The non return or check valve will open due to the supply pressure _ exceeding the resistance of the spring if fitted and the inertia of Zrckinsseatl NDE the valve The non return valve is the basis for development of Schaelentihungsvert many combined components The shuttle valve two pressure valve and quick exhaust valve incorporate features of the non return valve Indicate the valves that include the non return function 70 Non return valve _l el Non return valves can stop the flow completely in one direction In a ER the opposite direction the flow is free with a minimal pressure drop E e Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 573 4 F 574 due to the resistance of the valve The one way blocking action can be effected by cones balls plates or diaphragms Discuss the relationship between pressure to open and the spring size 71 Two pressure valve The
481. ts Upon operation of a push button the clamping cylinder advances and trips a roller lever valve Once the forward end posi tion is reached the cylinder is to remain for 6 seconds and then immediately retract to the initial position A new start cycle is only possible after the cylinder has fully retracted and after a delay of 5 seconds The cylinder extension is to be slow and the retraction adjustable but relatively fast 4 as 108 Exercise The time delay valve Solution a The start conditions are the actuation of roller limit valve 1S3 a p delay of 5 seconds after the end of cycle and the operation of 1S1 The two pressure valve 1V4 actuates the 5 2 way memory valve at port 14 The cylinder advances at a preset speed via the flow con trol valve 1V2 The limit switch 1S3 is deactivated and therefore even if the start button is still held the signal at port 14 is exhaust ed by the removal of the limit switch signal which resets the timer 1V6 until the cylinder has retracted again The cylinder reaches the limit valve 1S2 and produces a pilot signal for the time delay valve 1V5 The time delay valve opens port 2 if the preset time is reached Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 585 586 A pilot signal is produced 6 seconds after the limit valve 1S2 is operated The 5 2 way valve switches to the initial position and the cylinder retracts and with speed controlled by the valve 1V1 The
482. ts lists are selected 13 3 Set parts list properties In the parts list view clicking on the button opens the Parts List Properties dialog window Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 243 Parts List Properties 5 Accumulated Parts List E Sort as Number Single Position Parts List iced Pages Include This Page s Components Only Include All Project Files Include Selected Files E Project 1 Circuit 1 Figure 13 4 Parts List Properties dialog window ncluded Pages tab Accumulated Parts List Compiles the components with the same attributes Single Position Parts List Lists all of the components individually Sort as Number Interprets the column contents as numbers so that 10 appears after 2 for example Include This Page s Compo Only lists the components of the corresponding circuit diagram nents Only Include All Project Files Lists all of the components of the active project Include Selected Files Lists all of the components of the selected circuit diagrams belong ing to the active project 244 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Accumulated Parts List Sort as Number Single Position Parts List Listed Attributes List All Attributes O List Selected Attributes Pos No Quantity Identification Part number Symbol Order code 1 Type Packaging unit tem name Description Find Target Button
483. tuation All steps in partial GRAFCET 12 are deac tivated in this example Setting the initial situation In this example the steps in partial GRAFCET 12 that are marked as initial steps are activated Enclosing step Enclosing steps can be specified using a step s properties dialogue You can either enter the enclosed partial GRAFCETs directly or select them from a list You have to separate individual partial GRAFCETs with a comma or a blank space During simulation the name of the enclosing step is shown at the top left of the partial GRAFCET frame as soon as the step is activat ed see example Grafcet Grafcet17 ct You have to set the Activation link field in the properties dialogue for steps within the enclosed partial GRAFCET that you wish to activate when the enclosing step is activated Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 213 10 6 18 Action when a transition is triggered An action on triggering is a stored effective action which is execut ed when the transition connected to the action is triggered The action is usually connected to the transition by a straight line see example Grafcet Grafcet20 circ 214 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Dimension Chapter 11 FluidSIM allows both automatic and manual dimensioning 11 1 Draw dimension Fe W J gt JE The buttons Angula Flag activate the corresponding mode for drawing the d
484. two pressure valve has two inputs 1 and one output 2 The two pressure valve is used mainly for interlocking controls safety controls check functions or logic operations The application of a signal at a single input produces no pressure at output 2 If pres sure is applied at both inputs 1 the signal which is last applied passes to the output 2 The two pressure circuit is equivalent to two input signaling devices in series i e one after the other Refer to topics 72 74 for the circuit example Discuss the advantages of the shown solution against series connection 72 Circuit Two pressure valve The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when a 3 2 way push button valve and a roller lever valve are actuated If either of the actuations is released then the cylinder is to return to the initial position Discuss the circuit layout standard numbering and operation 73 Circuit Two pressure valve II The inputs of the two pressure valve is connected to the outputs of the two 3 2 way valves Upon operation of the push button 1S1 a signal is generated at the left side of input 1 of the two pressure valve The signal is blocked by the two pressure valve No output is given at 2 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM a a a If I igi m a lea diii A a cre 14 ran a T PEE Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Discuss the logic funct
485. u open a dialog window where you can make the settings shown using the Conduction Line menu item or the button on the toolbar Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Conduction Line Type of connection line Pneumatic Hydraulic Hectic E Define multiple lines Number of lines Distance Start Point Appearance End Point Appearance E Display Identification W Display Identification Cancel Help Figure 16 1 Settings for the potential lines to be created You can then define the end points of the line with two consecutive mouse clicks Pm LI HITE L2 ws i J Figure 16 2 Three horizontal potential lines The identifications of the potentials can be changed In this exam ple we want to rename the potential from L4 to L6 Double click the left hand potential L1 Then enter L4 for the identification in the dialog window Then following prompt then opens Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 263 oe Se 5 l4 L4 yw 34 HEE L 5 9 fer a d 5 pE LE g 54 FluidDraw Professional 2 1 reference s are connected to this object a Rename all connected interruptions and potentials Cancel Figure 16 3 FluidSIM supports the automatic renaming of the potentials linked with the source potential If you answer Yes the potential L1 on the right hand side will also be renamed L4
486. uation Double click the end of the stem A dialog box will open in which you can enter a label If you enter the same label on the cylinder s distance rule the valve will be actuated mechanically when the cylinder s piston rod reaches the specified position A special instance of this type of linkage is the connection of a cylinder to a displacement encoder You can use such connections to construct closed loop control systems in combination with proportional valves for example Further information about propor tional control systems can be found in section Open loop and closed loop control by using continuous valves Double click a cylinder A dialog box will open in which you can adjust the cylinder s prop erties Go to the Actuating labels tab Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 145 Symbol Name CONFCYL Description Linear Drive Pneumatic wit E Display Part number Layer 1 Display in Parts Lists a E Display Displacement encoder Display Show all settings Figure 9 16 Cylinder configuration dialog box Enter a label under Displacement encoder Add the displacement encoder from the component library to the circuit and double click to open the properties dialog box Enter the same label there as you entered for the cylinder 146 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSI
487. ugh an input pulse The output is set when the configured count value is reached With every status change at the input Cnt from Lo to Hi the internal counter is increased Dir Lo or decreased Dir Hi by one unit If the internal counter is equal or larger compared to the specified value the output Q is set to Hi You can use the reset input R to reset the internal count value and the output to Lo As long as R Hi also the output is Lo and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted Adjustable parameters Counter 0 9999 5 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Symmetric Clock Generator A timing signal with a configurable period is given at the output Via the duration of the pulses you can determine the length of the on and off times Via the input En for Enable you can switch on the clock generator that is the clock generator sets the output to Hi for the duration of the pulse subsequent the output to Lo for the duration of the pulse and so on until the input status is Lo again Adjustable parameters Impulse time 0 0005 100s 0 5 Asynchronous Pulse Generator The pulse profile of the output can be changed via the configurable pulse duration and pulse pause duration It is possible to invert the output with input INV The input INV only negates the output if the block is enabled via EN Adjustable parame
488. uidic identification Activate the Frame fluidic identification option if you want fluidic identifications to be framed automatically This simplifies the depiction of circuits in accordance with standards Frame Electric Identification Activate the Frame Electric Identification option if you want electri cal identifications to be framed automatically This simplifies the depiction of circuits in accordance with standards Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 299 Zoom Display initially actuated closer as opener Grid 18 2 Save W Create Folder For New Projects Compress Files 300 Here you can set how you can zoom in or out of the page view with the mouse When this option is activated make switches that are actuated in their initial position are displayed as break switches Conversely break switches that are actuated in their initial position are dis played as make switches Here you can set the grid width and the style To display the grid select the Show Grid menu item on the menu As well as absolute values such as mm you can also specify the relative basic unit length M W Compress Files W Create Backup Files Save New Projects as Single File Figure 18 2 Options dialog window Save tab FluidSIM normally compresses the saved files in order to save space on the disk If you deactivate the option the files are saved as XML files without compression You
489. ulic fluid is drained off at T when the pressure at connection A exceeds the operating pressure The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Nominal pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 1 9 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 1 Pressure compensator upstream The pressure compensator maintains the differential pressure between port A und port X If for example a throttle point is located between A and X pres sure is held constant over the throttle point This corresponds to the function of a 2 way flow control valve Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 15 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 06 pee Pressure compensator upstream The pressure compensator maintains the differential pressure between port A und port X P If for example a throttle point is located between A and X pres sure is held constant over the throttle point This corresponds to the function of a 2 way flow control valve Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 0 4 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 0 15 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 06 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 385 386 Pressure compensator downstream
490. umatically operated 565 566 roller operated 566 4 4 2 way valve disc seat 567 roller operated 567 4 3 way valve turning disc principle 567 5 5 2 way valve longitudinal slide principle 568 suspended disc seat 569 5 3 way valve pneumatically operated 569 A air drying absorption 554 adsorption 554 low temperature __ 553 air lubricator 554 555 air motor 562 air service unit 552 C circuit diagram bistable valve 569 570 direct control 571 indirect control 571 pressure sequence valve 583 quick exhaust valve 579 sequential control _ 587 shuttle valve _ 576 577 signal overlap 588 589 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 647 time delay valve 585 two pressure valve 574 575 component animation animation component 534 description didactics component description 527 sectional view component usage in circuit didactics sectional view _ 529 compressed air filter filter 553 compressed air supply axial flow compressor axial flow compressor 556 delivery 555 distribution 556 piston compressor piston compressor 556 cylinder control cylinder double acting _ 559 single acting 558 double acting _ 559 560 mounting arrangements 560 seals 560 single acting 558 tandem double acting 561 D Delay Switches 475 490 diagram symbol designation of connections 562 directional valve _ 562 flow control valve _ 580 linear actuator _ 557 method of actuation 563 non return valve diagram symb
491. up the properties dialog window for the selected terminal strip using Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Properties You can also create a new terminal strip using Create New Display Identification If this box is checked then the identification for the associated terminal strip is displayed beside the new terminals 16 3 3 Create terminal strips FluidSIM does not treat terminal strips as visible objects within the circuit pages which explains why they cannot be interactively selected using the mouse in order to highlight them delete them or change their properties Terminal strips can either be managed via the associated terminals or using the Manage Terminal Strips menu item under Page or Project A terminal strip is always part of a specific circuit To define a new terminal strip you must therefore define a circuit file in addition to the description and number of terminals New Terminal Strip Containing Page 1 ET Identification a Number of Teminals fai 1 1000 So Geren Ged Figure 16 24 New Terminal Strip dialog window All properties can also be changed later at any time You open the properties dialog window for a terminal strip via any terminal in that terminal strip using the Properties button Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 283 External Target Internal Target Find Fos i i l l 2 3 4
492. used outside a digital module there is an additional analog electri cal connection at the digital input If there is an analog signal of more than 10V at this connection the digital input is set to Hi As an alternative you can click on the digital input with the left mouse button in order to set it to Hi Another click resets the value to Lo Digital output Digital outputs are designated with an Q The output connects a digital signal through from its input to its output In FluidSIM digital components can be used inside and outside a digital module Ifa digital output is used inside a digital module you can determine the output connector of the digital module in question with which the digital output shall be linked by allocating a number Q1 to Q16 Ifthe status of the digital output is Hi a potential of 24V is set at the corresponding output connector of the digital module If a digital output is used outside a digital module there is an Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM additional analog electrical connection at the digital output If the status of the digital output is Hi a potential of 24 V is set at this connection Memory bits Memory bits are designated with a M Memory bits are virtual outputs with a value at their output analog to that at their input When the simulation start is activated you can define by using the property dialog box i
493. ushbutton changeover Switch that changes over when actuated and changes back imme diately when released In FluidSIM switches can be actuated per Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 479 1 Evy 2 3 Esg 4 2 4 Ey manently locked when continuing to hold down the mouse button and pushing the Shift key This permanent actuation is released by a simple click on the component Detent switch break Switch that opens and locks when actuated Detent switch make Switch that closes and locks when actuated Detent switch changeover Switch that changes over and locks when actuated 1 21 3 8 ric uic vwitches 480 MD Pneumatic to electric converter The converter produces an electrical signal if the preset differential pressure of the differential pressure switch is exceeded Pressure switch break Switch that opens when the preset switching pressure of the pneumatic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded Pressure Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM BN E BK BIJ EN BEK BIJ switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a label Pressure switch make The switch closes when the preset switching pressure of the pneu matic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded Pressure switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a label Pressure switch changeover The switch changes
494. ust the objects in the function diagram Elements in the diagram can be moved Changing the size of text boxes is only possible in this mode Movement and dragging operations can be cancelled using the Esc key If the mouse pointer is moved outside the window area while the left mouse button is held down the view automatically scrolls Double clicking on a diagram element diagram row text box signaling element etc opens a dialog window in which you can make the desired adjustments 20 1 1 Set diagram properties 336 Clicking on the Eigenschaften button opens a dialog window in which you can set the diagram properties Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Text columns Number Text columns Width Diagram columns Number Diagram columns Width Color Row height Functional diagram Properties Text columns Diagram columns Number 1 Number 11 Width z mm width 10 Row height 20 mm Color Cancel Help Figure 20 2 If the number of text columns is changed than all of the table text boxes are distributed horizontally and evenly If the width of the text columns is changed than all of the table text boxes are distributed horizontally and evenly The diagram columns are located on the right hand side of the function diagram The diagram curves can be drawn in this area The number of diagram columns can also be changed by dragging the mouse pointer t
495. ustable parameters Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 09 21 1 6 Pressure Control Valves Pressure relief valve In normal position the valve is closed If the opening pressure is reached at P T opens When the pressure drops below the preset level the valve closes again The flow direction is indicated by the arrow The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 379 380 Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 3 8 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 17 Pressure relief valve The valve restricts the pressure at port P to the set value compared with the pressure at T If the differential pressure dp pP pT times the cross sectional area of the sealing cone exceeds the spring force the sealing cone lifts out of the seat and allows oil through to port T The valve closes again once the pressure in port P drops again The cushion ing piston acts like a shock absorber to increase stability during the control response The spring pretension can be adjusted at the handwheel Oil flows through the non return valve if the pressure at port T is greater than at P Adjustable parameters Opening pressure 0 40 MPa 3 Pressure regulation range 0 01 10 MPa 3 5 Hydraulic resistance Pressure relief valve 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 08 Hydrau
496. values Open a circuit In Edit Mode double click a component connector or select the menu item Properties The dialog box for the connector s settings then opens In the Display quantity values field you can choose which quantity values are to be displayed at that connector when the option is activated for that parameter in the dialog box for quanti ty values display 9 5 1 Display of direction of quantity values in FluidSIM 136 Vectorial quantity values are characterized by their quantity and their direction In circuit diagrams the direction is displayed at the component connectors by a mathematical sign into a com ponent out of a component If the amount of the quantity value is close to zero the exact numerical value is not displayed Instead gt 0 is displayed for a small positive value and lt 0 fora small negative value In the case of fluidic flows the direction is also indicated by an arrow in the middle of the line segment The visual impression is reinforced by conveyor belt style animation of the lines Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 9 6 Displaying state diagrams The state diagram records the quantity values for the most im portant components and displays them in graph form Quantity values or output variables all those values calculated by FluidSIM during the simulation or set by the user such as position
497. values are displayed and the cylinders move into their initial positions The switching of components is only possible while a simulation is running or when a simulation is paused 11 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM If you wish to simulate another circuit you do not need to close the currently loaded circuit FluidSIM allows you to have multiple circuits open at the same time and to simulate them either sepa rately from one another or as a total system within one project Click or to switch the currently active circuit from Simulation Mode to Edit Mode When you switch from Simulation Mode to Edit Mode the non adjustable components are automatically reset to their normal state In other words the switches are set to their initial position the valves switch to their normal position the cylinder pistons are set to the position previously set for them and all calculated quan tity values are deleted Components used to adjust or harmonize the system on the other hand such as flow control valves pres sure reducing valves or potentiometers retain the values set by the user during the simulation By clicking 11 alternatively you can switch from Edit Mode to Simulation Mode without starting the simulation This is useful if you want to switch any components before starting a simulation e g to simulate a protection circuit where two switch es need to be pressed at the same ti
498. valve Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 9 8 2 Relays Once the cylinder in the above example passes the 35 mm position the switch will drop out again If you want the actuation to be maintained over a longer distance enter the start and end posi tions accordingly in the dialog box To place labels on electrical switches double click the component Valves with mechanical actuation have a special connector for this purpose which may be on the end of the stem or in the center of the roller for example If there is already a label on the component or connector you can also double click the label directly and then click Find Target to open the corresponding dialog box for editing the label A relay or solenoid can be used to actuate multiple switches or contacts simultaneously It is of course necessary to link the relay to the relevant switches Therefore in FluidSIM relays too have labels which can be used to define an association with switches in the usual way When you double click a relay the dialog box for the label name will open The following figure shows an electrical circuit diagram in which a relay simultaneously actuates two break switches and two make switches K1 K1 K1 K1 K1 Figure 9 22 Relay with linked switches In addition to the simple relay there are also relays with switch on delay relays with switch off delay and counting relays They en sure that the linked
499. ve The model circuit diagram shows the arrangement of a 2 way flow control valve in the piston side supply line in order to achieve a constant feed speed even under varying load A non return valve is Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM fitted in the by pass to allow the flow control valve to be by passed on the return stroke 150 2 way flow control valve The advancing piston rod encounters a load half way through its stroke The flow control valve nonetheless ensures that the ad vance speed remains constant From 0 to 2 seconds shown at Ly asm bottom right the piston rod is unloaded and the pressure condi tions remain constant When the piston rod encounters the load the pressure p_3 rises at the outlet of the flow control valve In order to allow the rapid control operations to be shown more clear ly the time scale now changes to 1 100ths of a second The flow control valve briefly raises the pressure p_2 downstream of the adjustable restrictor Following this the regulating restrictor moves to the left and p_2 falls back to its original value i e the pressure difference between p_1 and p_2 remains constant The regulating operation shown is repeated a number of times as the result of which p_3 increases to 2 5 MPa 25 bar in several steps and the regulating restrictor opens more and more At the point at which 2 5 MPa 25 bar is reached the time scale changes back to 0 1 seconds
500. ve mouse clicks The drawing operation can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or clicking the right mouse button The last vertex must be set with a double click Rectangle Draws a rectangle by defining two diagonally opposite corner points Circle Draws a circle by defining a middle point and a radius Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Ellipse Draws an ellipse by defining a middle point and a radii on parallel axes Text Inserts a text at the mouse position Picture Dimension 19 5 Page 5 5 N wn a lt lt or mt a a je je o 5 3 3 a 5 oq v D O fel gt Comm ol om pt SA 3 lt D 3 o oO O _ Cc wn O O v O 5 Check Drawing Checks the active circuit drawing for drawing errors Paper Size Manage Terminal Strips Manage Cables 59 59 9 gt o gt o D 0 3 o 3 P N a N N a ao a o o o FL Ta v Oo 3S oq oq oq gt mm a a a O o o o 5 5 5 D D D Z Z 5 5 5 oq oq oq lt lt lt O O O mt rmt aa O O O 3 3 A D D D 5 5 ae D D gt z mt t 5 5 D D a O Fg 2 E v a N 3 gt 2 N a T O N Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 323 19 6 Execute 324 Properties Opens an dialog window enabling you to set the circuit properties Stop Switches the currently active circuit
501. verter The output Q is Hi if the input is Lo The NOT block is an input Status inverter 21 6 3 Special Functions 512 Digital module The digital module is used for a compact embedding of a digital switching circuit into a electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit The digital module offers 8 16 electrical inputs and outputs which transfer their states to its digital switching circuit in the inner part Therefore the digital switching circuit does not need much space in the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit for the display of the digital module as a rectangle with a total number of 18 34 connections By making a double click with the left mouse button on the digital module you come to the digital circuit in the inner part of the module A new window opens It shows the digital circuit and can be handled in the usual way The standard configuration in the inner part of a new inserted digital module is a row with 8 16 inputs and 8 16 outputs each They correspond to the inputs and outputs of the module in the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit In order to be able to test the digital circuit during the setup it can be simulated separated from the electropneumatic or elec trohydraulic circuit As soon as the processing window of the digital module is closed or the original circuit window is put into the fore ground the previously effected changes in the digital circuit are automatically adopte
502. ves are 4 2 way valves with an additional mid position There are various versions of this mid position in the mid position in the example shown all ports are closed in the mid position see next illustration In the switch ing position shown there is flow from P to B and from A to T 117 4 3 way valve with closed mid position 2 The 4 3 way valve is in its mid position all ports apart from the leakage oil port are closed In this mid position the pump is operating against the system pressure set on the pressure relief valve 118 4 3 way valve with closed mid position 3 The valve is in its left hand switching position there is flow from P 1 toAand from BtoT TA ll Hiatal 622 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 119 4 3 way valve with closed mid position 4 The circuit shows the 4 3 way valve in functional representation as a final control element of a double acting cylinder The valve is in its mid position the pump is operating against the system pressure set on the PRV If with an operational installation it is desired to switch to pump recirculation this can be achieved by using an additional 2 2 way valve as a changeover valve see part circuit diagram in topic 94 120 Circuit diagram 4 3 way valve with closed mid position The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration but with the 4 3 way valve as a circuit symbol
503. w control with throttle valves and one way flow control valve topic 94 96 Supply and exhaust air throttling Exhaust air throttling should be used with double acting cylinder circuits For supply air throttling the flow valves are installed so that the air entering the cylinder is throttled With exhaust air throttling the supply air flows freely to the cylinder and the exhaust air is throttled Discuss the numbering system Even numbers relate to advanc ing signals and odd numbers to the retracting signals Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 581 23 7 Pressure control valves ie 97 Pressure control valves t a The pressure control valves are generally adjustable against a Laie ma compression spring The sensing line for regulators is at the valve i outlet and for sequence valves the sensing is before the valve i e that pressure which is to be measured Compare the sensing line positions and flow arrows 98 Adjustable pressure sequence valve The adjusting screw normally incorporates a look nut to set the desired position The valve body is fitted to a sub base which can frame mounted with other compact valves Some applications for the valve are clamping pressing gluing and safety interlocks 99 Adjustable pressure sequence valve unactuated Sequence valves are installed in pneumatic controls where a specif ic pressure is required for a switching operation The output signal
504. way solenoid valve ii In normal position the connection P is open to A and B to T When actuated by the control solenoid the valve is set to crossover position If no current is flowing through the control solenoid the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a con figurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Desired position 0 4 0 Hydraulic resistance 1e 6 1000 bar min2 l2 0 164 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10 s 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 400 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 4 3 way solenoid valve with shutoff position i In normal position all connections are closed When actuated by the control solenoids the valve is set to parallel or crossover position If no current is flowing through the control solenoids the valve can be manually actuated This valve is derived from a configurable 4 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequ
505. with unconnected components Connect the new valve s outlet port to the cylinder Draw a line from the outlet port of the manually operated valve to the control port of the pneumatic valve If necessary drag the line segments until the drawing is ar ranged clearly Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 99 The circuit should now look something like this Figure 8 5 Circuit with indirect activation Save this circuit with fal or with Save File FluidSIM automatically opens the file selection box if the file did not al ready exist you can enter a file name in that box Start the simulation with and click the manually operated valve When you click a valve the real behavior of the valve is simulated In our example the clicked valve is switched over and recalculation begins automatically As a result the indirectly activated pneumatic valve is switched and the cylinder advances l FluidSIM not only animates the switching of manually actuated components but nearly all components which have multiple states 100 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM The following figure shows a 3 2 way valve in closed position and in open position Figure 8 6 Closed and open 3 2 way valve 1 When non detenting components are clicked they remain actuated as long as the mouse button is held down Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode Select the stat
506. x mm x i Starting Angle Center cy Fi mm k 1 Ending Angle Size Rotation Radius nc 0 Deg Radius ry Color 0 ELES Jf Line Style k Stat Cap Line Width i a y End Cap Background Foreground Figure 7 13 Properties dialog window for an ellipse Drawing Properties tab Scale Defines the scaling in the x or y direction Arc Defines the starting and final angles of an ellipse Rotation Defines the angle of rotation in degrees Override Color Defines the color of the drawing element Fill Area Fills the circle with the color listed Line Style Defines the line style Line Width Defines the line thickness Start Cap Defines how the beginning of the line is displayed End Cap Defines how the end of the line is displayed Background Sets the location of the drawing element to the background This means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this For example symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 87 Foreground 7 4 8 Text 7 4 9 Image 88 Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground This means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this For ex ample symbols are covered by filled drawing elements A text is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer by clicking The dialog window Properties for entering the text and setting the attributes then opens An image is inserted at the position of the mouse
507. xample of hydraulic circuit with two pressure ranges for example 3 MPa 30 bar for machining and 9 MPa 90 bar for clamping 2 Press with elevated reservoir This is an application in which extremely high forces are required Due to the suspended cylinder and the tractive load special measures are required for the activation of the advance stroke This in turn requires specially designed press drives A Special feature is the elevated reservoir which utilizes the static pressure in the pressure medium 592 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM a 3 Mobile hydraulics Excavator On this hydraulic excavator not only all working movements linear drives but also the propulsion of the vehicle rotary drive are hydraulically powered The primary drive of the excavator is an internal combustion engine A model calculation can be used here to demonstrate an ad vantage of hydraulics large forces with relatively small com ponents 24 2 Components of a Hydraulic Plant 4 Structure of a hydraulic system m a This simplified block diagram shows the division of hydraulic sys tems into a signal control section and a hydraulic power section This signal control section is used to activate the valves in the power control section The material depicted in these electronic slides is concerned in the main with the hydraulic power section and the three lev els of this
508. xhaust valve hydraulics 84 3 way pressure reducing valve This function illustration can be animated Click on gt or to start the animation 534 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM An animation can be frozen with 11 or by clicking on in the menu W or stops an animation whereas 4d or restarts an animation 22 2 Selecting Didactics Material from a List The entries Tutorial Simulating with FluidSIM Component Library and Didactics Material under the menu present the didactics material of FluidSIM organized in the form of overview pages From these pages topics can be chosen and viewed independently of the current window and possibly selected components 22 2 1 Tutorial Below this menu option you can launch the tutorial Simulating with FluidSIM which contains a variety of interesting experiments and an excursus By means of these useful examples you will get to know the possibilities of simulating with FluidSIM Furthermore for the most important components the mathematic models used in FluidSIM are also described Please click the menu option Tutorial Simulating with FluidSIM to open the tutorial Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 535 Tutorial Introduction Welcome to the tutorial Simulating with FluidSIM Pneumatics The aim of the tutorial is to provide an insight
509. xpiration of the configured time the output is reset to Lo off delay When the input Trg is switched on and off again the off delay restarts The input R Reset is used to reset the delay time and the output before the configured time has expired Adjustable parameters Delay time 0 100s 3 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 513 On Off delay An output with on off delay is switched on after a specified time and is reset on expiration of a second specified time As soon as the status at input Trg changes from Lo to Hi the configured on delay time starts If the status at input Trg remains Hi at least for the duration of the configured time the output Q is set to Hi on expiration of the on delay time the output follows the input on delayed If the status at input Trg changes again to Lo before the configured on delay time has expired the time is reset When the status at input returns to Lo the configured off delay time starts If the status at the input remains Lo at least for the dura tion of the configured off delay time the output is set to Lo on expiration of that time the output follows the input off delayed If the status at the input returns to Hi before this time has expired the time is reset Adjustable parameters On delay time 0 100s 3 Off delay time 0 100s 6 Retentive On delay A specified time starts af
510. xternal file references you must therefore consider that changes to these files affect all pro TD O om of T o O 5 mp v 5 oq oma 5 D 3 Save as Component Library Saves the active project as a library As a result a new library sym bol is generated for every circuit The new library bears the name of the project with the lib file suffix DXF Import Opens the dialog window for selecting a saved DXF file The select ed file is subsequently converted into a FluidSIM circuit diagram The original file remains unchanged Export Exports the circuit diagram in the active window to the data storage 3 ig a 3 Q Nn se UJ U Eis G TI TI U Ep w gt lt TI O 2 TI D Page Setup Sets up the printer properties for a page to be printed Print Preview O xe g gt Nn se O 5 rt ge x ig ig pe Nn pe xe je oq ca ig Print Opens the FluidSIM Print dialog window to set the print options for the active circuit Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 317 19 2 Edit 318 Recent Files A file can be selected for opening from a list of the recently opened files Recent Projects The most recently opened projects can be selected for opening from a list Exit Ends FluidSIM Undo Undoes the last editing action for the active circuit
511. y FluidSIM piston positions velocities pressures flow rates etc because these variables only permit read access Simi larly these variables cannot be assigned in GRAFCETs FluidSIM displays a warning if an attempt is made to modify a simulation variable Simulation variables therefore have only the option of variable assignment Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 123 Variable assignment Variable access Predefined variable User defined alias Figure 9 3 Variable assignment of a simulation parameter 9 2 Special settings for cylinders To adapt a cylinder drag a representative cylinder into the circuit and open the properties dialog box It contains settings that you can use to determine the appearance and function of the compo nent See section Configure cylinders for the basic functions for configuring the cylinder properties 9 2 1 Cylinder friction and cylinder mass If the options Show all settings and Enter manually are select ed you can specify parameters defining a velocity dependent characteristic curve and the mass moved by the cylinder If you select Ca culate automatically an heuristic is applied which calculates the settings on the basis of the cylinder dimensions Clicking an input field in the Cylinder friction section activates a button that can be used to open a dialog box containing a graph displaying the cylinder friction as a fun
512. y Variable Voltage out Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM eas Bu Figure 9 41 Adjusting the voltage limits for the displacement encoder Start the simulation and observe that the cylinder stops once it has traveled half the distance Now we want to expand the circuit so that the cylinder can move to any position we set on a slider during the simulation as quickly as possible but still accurately This is done using a PID controller Construct the following circuit and set the parameter values for the PID controller as shown Note that the pump unit and the tank are mirrored from their posi tions in the example above 173 174 PID controller Proportional gain 0 Ly Integral gain 0 1 s 0 1000 D Derivation gain 0 ms 0 1000 Control quantity offset 0 Vv Figure 9 42 Position control with PID controller Start the simulation and slowly move the y offset of the func tion generator between 10 and 10 The cylinder moves until it reaches its setpoint position where it stops The cylinder s target position is proportional to the voltage set on the function generator with 10 V equating to fully retract Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM ed and 10 V meaning fully advanced The value O thus repre sents the cylinder piston s mid position It does not matter what position the cylinder starts fro
513. y clicking on the component cancels the operated state and returns the valve to its starting position This valve is derived from a configurable 3 n way valve You find this valve in the component library Frequently used Way Valves under the menu Adjustable parameters Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM Desired position 0 4 0 Standard nominal flow rate 0 1 5000 l min 60 Positioning time 1e 4 10 s 0 02 Reset time 1e 4 10s5 0 03 Minimum voltage 0 1 300 V 20 Electrically left at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Electrically right at U_min 0 01 100 N 70 Mechanically left 0 01 100 N 100 Mechanically right 0 01 100 N 100 Physical spring force 0 01 100 N 30 Minimum force 0 01 100 N 20 Min pilot control force 0 01 100 N 15 Left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Right 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control left 0 01 100 cm2 1 Pilot control right 0 01 100 cm2 1 air spring left 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 air spring right 0 01 100 cm2 0 5 3 2 way valve with selection switch or striking button Pressing the red striking button operates the valve The flow passes freely from 1 to 2 Releasing the button has no effect the valve remains in its operating position Turning the button to the right sets the striking button back to its original position and the valve returns to its starting position through the use of a return spring Con
514. y of the instructional material in FluidSIM The following sections contain a description of the functions found under the menu 22 1 Information about Single Components The first three entries under the menu refer to selected components and are context sensitive More precisely When a component in the current circuit diagram window is select ed or all selected components are of the same type the menu entry Component description will be enabled 526 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 22 1 1 Component Descriptions All components possess a page with a technical description This page contains the diagram symbol for the component according to the DIN standard Deutsche Industrienorm a textual description of the component s function the designations of the connections and a listing of the adjustable parameters along with their value ranges You will find a photograph of the real life part provided for most components In the case that a component cannot exist singularly in areal system FluidSIM displays a photo of the assembly group that this component belongs to Examples for such components include the indicator light relays switches and the electrical power supply Components that do not exist in reality simply have no photo Examples include the text component and the distance rule Select the one way flow control valve and click on the menu item Component descript
515. yed as solid lines pilot lines as dashed lines 1 Please note that the way the lines are displayed during the simula tion depends on the physical status of the lines The colors line styles and line thicknesses will vary according to pressure flow 44 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM voltage etc You can define how the lines are displayed during the simulation on the Simulation tab under in the Tools menu When you exit Simulation Mode the lines once again appear the way you defined them in Edit Mode 5 8 Delete line To delete a line you can either highlight an associated line segment and press the Del key or select the menu item from the menu or highlight a component connector and press the Del key In these cases it is the line rather than the connector itself that is deleted If you delete a T distributor which three or four lines are attached to then all of the lines are deleted If on the other hand only two lines are connected then only the T distributor is deleted and the two lines combined into one 5 9 Set the properties of the connectors You can assign a component connector an identification and a blanking plug or silencer by double clicking on the connector or by selecting the connector and choosing the menu item on the menu The Connector dialog window then opens Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG e Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 45 Identification Display quan
516. ystems GmbH e FluidSIM Component Parameters Drawing Properties E Show designation W Show variable W Show Unit Variable Designation Value Range Unit Display Resistance 100 1E 06 1E 08 Ohm T Simulated values Designation Value Range Unit Display Variable Voltage Variable assignment Variable access Predefined variable User defined alias Cancel Figure 10 19 Variables of a voltmeter Read access to the variables listed in the component dialog box is permitted The complete variable name that can be used ina GRAFCET is made up of the component identification a dot asa separator and the variable designation The complete variable name of the voltage of a voltmeter M1 is therefore M1 U for example Alternatively the user defined alias can be used 1 The complete variable name of the actuated state of a manually operated switch S is S state For the sake of simplicity an alias with the switch s identification is created automatically In this example therefore S can be used directly in a GRAFCET instead of S state In the GrafControl GRAFCET mode write access is possible only to those variables which can actually be modified interactively during the simulation With a voltmeter for example the resistance can be specified only in Edit Mode It cannot be modified during the simulation The fol
517. ystems GmbH e FluidSIM 221 12 3 Drawing Properties Scale Rotation Override Color Reset 222 You can enter a number of drawing properties that influence how the symbols are displayed in the circuit diagram in the Drawing Properties tab Position Scale Top Rotation 0 E Overide Color Figure 12 4 Detail from the Properties dialog window for a compo nent Drawing Properties tab Defines the scaling in the x or y direction The scaling factor can also be defined with the help of the mouse pointer This is de scribed in the Scale symbols section Defines the angle of rotation in degrees The angle of rotation can also be defined with the help of the mouse pointer This is de scribed in the Rotate symbols section If this option is activated then another color can be selected for the symbol Resets the geometrical settings to the default values Scaling to 1 rotation to 0 and Override Color deactivated Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 12 4 Main and secondary components As described under Component attributes in the Properties dialog window the FluidSIM circuit symbols largely correspond to the components in the Festo product catalogue These symbols are called main components However there are also secondary com ponents which do not correspond to components in the Festo product catalogue These secondary components are usually sym bolic repre
518. zation All the variables in a GRAFCET are preset with the value 0 at the start of the simulation Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 205 10 6 2 Sequence rules Atransition is considered released once all the immediately preceding steps are active A transition is triggered once it has been released and its condition has the value 1 A transition with the value 1 is shown in green in FluidSIM regardless of whether the step linked to it is active or inactive The relevant transition is triggered at the same time and does not take any time Since triggering a transition does not take any time a step can be activated and deactivated at the same time even across various intermediate steps An active step remains active in this situation A loop of steps is only run through once at one point in time see example Grafcet Grafcet06 ct 10 6 3 Sequence selection A step can branch off into various partial sequences In the GRAFCET specifications these partial sequences have to be exclu sive Since this can generally only be checked during the sequence this exclusivity is not required in FluidSIM see example Grafcet Grafcet07 ct 10 6 4 Synchronization The GRAFCET synchronization component can be used to imple ment synchronizations See example Grafcet Grafcet08 ct 206 Festo Didactic GmbH amp Co KG Art Systems GmbH e FluidSIM 10 6 5 Transient sequenc

FluidSIM® 5 User's Guide 04/14

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

FluidSIM&reg; 5 User's Guide 04/14

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

FluidSIM® 5 User's Guide 04/14